2006 r350 r500 Owners Manual

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
Operator’s Manual
R-Class
Operator’s Manual R-Class

Ê9/t-qMË
2515841381
Order No. 6515 1803 13 Part No. 251 584 13 81 USA Edition B, 2006
R 350
R 500
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully,
on the purchase of your new then return it to your vehicle where it
Mercedes-Benz. will be handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your designed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-
We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started................................... 35

Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 22 Unlocking ............................................. 36
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 24 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 36
Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 28 Unlocking with Keyless-Go* ........... 37
Important notice for California Center console ..................................... 29 Starter switch positions.................. 38
retail buyers and lessees of Upper part ...................................... 29 Adjusting .............................................. 42
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Lower part ...................................... 30 Seats .............................................. 42
Maintenance .................................. 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 31 Steering wheel................................ 45
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Storage compartments......................... 32 Mirrors............................................ 47
Change of address or ownership.... 13 Door control panel................................ 34 Driving.................................................. 50
Operating your vehicle outside Fastening the seat belts ................. 50
the USA or Canada......................... 13 Starting the engine ......................... 53
Where to find it.................................... 14 Parking brake ................................. 56
Symbols............................................... 15 Driving ............................................ 56
Operating safety .................................. 16 Switching on headlamps................. 58
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Turn signals .................................... 58
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Windshield wipers........................... 59
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Rear window wiper/washer............ 61
Reporting safety defects ................ 18 Problems while driving.................... 62
Vehicle data recording......................... 19 Parking and locking.............................. 64
Information regarding electronic Parking brake ................................. 65
recording devices........................... 19 Switching off headlamps................. 65
Turning off the engine..................... 66
Releasing seat belts........................ 67
Locking ........................................... 67
Contents
Corner-illuminating front fog

Safety and Security .......................... 69 Controls in detail ............................. 109 lamps* ......................................... 152
Occupant safety................................... 70 Locking and unlocking ....................... 110 Hazard warning flasher ................ 153
Air bags .......................................... 71 SmartKey ..................................... 110 Interior lighting ............................ 154
Seat belts ....................................... 77 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 114 Door entry lamps ......................... 157
Preventive occupant safety* Opening the doors from the inside 121 Cargo compartment lamp ............ 157
(PRE-SAFE®) ................................... 81 Opening the tailgate..................... 122 Instrument cluster ............................. 158
Children in the vehicle.................... 82 Closing the tailgate ...................... 124 Instrument cluster illumination .... 158
Blocking of rear door window Automatic central locking ............ 130 Trip odometer .............................. 159
operation........................................ 93 Locking and unlocking from Tachometer.................................. 159
Panic alarm .......................................... 95 the inside ..................................... 131 Outside temperature indicator..... 159
Activating ....................................... 96 Seats ................................................. 132 Control system .................................. 161
Deactivating ................................... 96 Easy-entry/exit feature* .............. 132 Multifunction display.................... 161
Driving safety systems......................... 97 Lumbar support............................ 136 Multifunction steering wheel........ 162
ABS ................................................ 97 Multicontour seat*....................... 136 Menus.......................................... 164
BAS ................................................ 99 Rear seats .................................... 137 Standard display menu ................ 168
ESP® ............................................... 99 Seat heating*............................... 141 AUDIO menu ................................ 170
EBP............................................... 102 Memory function* ............................. 144 NAV* menu.................................. 172
4-ETS............................................ 102 Storing positions into memory ..... 145 AIRMATIC*/Compass menu ........ 172
Anti-theft systems.............................. 104 Recalling positions from memory. 145 Vehicle status message memory
Immobilizer................................... 104 Storing exterior rear view mirror menu............................................ 173
Anti-theft alarm system................ 104 parking position ........................... 146 Settings menu.............................. 174
Tow-away alarm ........................... 106 Lighting.............................................. 147 Vehicle configuration ................... 191
Exterior lamp switch..................... 147 Trip computer menu..................... 192
Combination switch ..................... 151 TEL menu* ................................... 194
Contents
Automatic transmission..................... 197 Setting the temperature................ 222 Power windows .................................. 248
Gear selector lever....................... 197 Adjusting air distribution............... 222 Opening and closing ..................... 248
Shifting procedure ....................... 199 Adjusting air volume ..................... 222 Synchronizing the door windows .. 251
Transmission positions................. 200 Front defroster.............................. 223 Summer opening feature .............. 251
Gear ranges ................................. 202 Air recirculation mode .................. 224 Convenience closing feature......... 252
Driving tips................................... 203 Air conditioning............................. 226 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ................ 255
Automatic shift program .............. 204 Residual heat and ventilation........ 227 Opening and closing ..................... 255
Steering wheel gearshift control .. 205 Rear climate control ..................... 228 Synchronizing ............................... 258
Emergency operation 3-zone automatic climate control* ..... 230 Panorama roof with power
(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 207 Deactivating the climate control tilt/sliding panel*............................... 259
Good visibility .................................... 208 system .......................................... 234 Roller sunblinds for the
Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 208 Operating the climate control panorama roof with power
Rear view mirrors ......................... 208 system in automatic mode............ 235 tilt/sliding panel ........................... 259
Power folding exterior rear view Setting the temperature................ 236 Opening and closing the
mirrors* ....................................... 211 Adjusting air distribution............... 236 panorama roof with power
Sun visors .................................... 212 Adjusting air volume ..................... 237 tilt/sliding panel ........................... 260
Rear door window sunshade* ...... 214 Front defroster.............................. 238 Synchronizing the panorama roof
Third-row sunshade*.................... 214 Maximum cooling MAX COOL ....... 239 with power tilt/sliding panel......... 262
Rear window defroster ................. 215 Air recirculation mode .................. 239 Driving systems.................................. 264
Climate control .................................. 216 Air conditioning............................. 241 Cruise control ............................... 264
Deactivating the climate control Using driver-side settings for all AIRMATIC* ................................... 269
system ......................................... 220 temperature zones........................ 242 Parktronic* (Parking assist).......... 274
Operating the climate control Residual heat and ventilation........ 243
system in automatic mode........... 221 Rear automatic climate control..... 244
Contents
Loading .............................................. 279 At the gas station .............................. 342

Roof rack*.................................... 279 Operation ......................................... 329 Refueling...................................... 342
Loading instructions..................... 280 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 330 Check regularly and before a
Cargo tie-down rings .................... 281 Driving instructions............................ 331 long trip ....................................... 343
Hooks........................................... 282 Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 331 Engine compartment ......................... 345
Expanding cargo compartment .... 283 Drinking and driving ..................... 331 Hood ............................................ 345
Cargo compartment cover blind* . 288 Pedals .......................................... 331 Engine oil ..................................... 346
Partition net* ............................... 290 Power assistance ......................... 331 Transmission fluid level................ 350
Useful features .................................. 294 Brakes.......................................... 332 Coolant level ................................ 351
Storage compartments................. 294 Driving off .................................... 333 Windshield/rear window washer
Parcel nets ................................... 298 Parking......................................... 334 system and headlamp cleaning
Cup holders.................................. 299 Tires ............................................. 334 system*....................................... 352
Ashtrays* ..................................... 302 Hydroplaning................................ 335 Tires and wheels................................ 353
Cigarette lighter* ......................... 305 Tire traction.................................. 335 Important guidelines .................... 353
Power outlets ............................... 306 Tire speed rating .......................... 336 Tire care and maintenance........... 354
Rear center console* ................... 308 Winter driving instructions ........... 337 Direction of rotation..................... 356
Telephone*................................... 310 Standing water............................. 338 Loading the vehicle ...................... 356
Tele Aid* ...................................... 311 Passenger compartment .............. 338 Recommended tire inflation
Garage door opener* ................... 320 Driving abroad.............................. 339 pressure....................................... 363
Compass ...................................... 327 Control and operation of radio Checking tire inflation pressure ... 365
Floormats* ................................... 328 transmitters ................................. 339 Tire labeling ................................. 375
Infrared reflecting windshield* ..... 328 Catalytic converter....................... 340 Load identification ....................... 380
Emission control .......................... 340 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Coolant temperature.................... 341 (TIN) ............................................. 380
Maximum tire load ....................... 382
Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 382
Contents
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Replacing wiper blades ...................... 475

Standards (U.S. vehicles) ............. 383 Practical hints .................................. 403 Front wiper blades ........................ 475
Tire ply material ........................... 385 What to do if … ................................... 404 Rear wiper blade........................... 476
Tire and loading terminology........ 385 Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 404 Flat tire............................................... 478
Rotating tires ............................... 388 Lamp in center console................. 414 Preparing the vehicle .................... 478
Winter driving .................................... 390 Vehicle status messages in the Mounting the spare wheel ............ 479
Winter tires .................................. 390 multifunction display..................... 416 Battery ............................................... 487
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 391 Where will I find ...? ............................ 454 Disconnecting, removing,
Snow chains................................. 391 First aid kit.................................... 454 reinstalling and reconnecting
Maintenance...................................... 392 Vehicle tool kit.............................. 454 the battery .................................... 489
Clearing the maintenance service Spare wheel .................................. 457 Charging the battery..................... 495
indicator....................................... 393 Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 459 Jump starting...................................... 496
Maintenance service term Unlocking the vehicle.................... 459 Towing the vehicle.............................. 499
exceeded ..................................... 393 Locking the vehicle ....................... 460 Installing towing eye bolts ............ 501
Calling up the maintenance Fuel filler flap ................................ 461 Stranded vehicle........................... 502
service indicator........................... 393 Opening/closing in an emergency..... 462 Fuses.................................................. 503
Resetting the maintenance Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ........... 462 Main fuse box ............................... 504
service indicator........................... 394 Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 463 Fuse box in cargo compartment ... 504
Vehicle care....................................... 395 SmartKey ...................................... 463 Fuse box in passenger
Cleaning and care of the vehicle .. 395 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ....... 464 compartment ................................ 505
Replacing bulbs .................................. 465
Bulbs............................................. 465
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 468
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 472
Contents
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 521

Technical data.................................. 507 Capacities .................................... 521 Technical terms............................... 529
Parts service ...................................... 508 Engine oils.................................... 523
Warranty coverage............................. 509 Engine oil additives ...................... 523
Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 523 Index................................................. 535
Information Booklet...................... 509 Brake fluid.................................... 523
Identification labels............................ 510 Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 524
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 512 Fuel requirements ........................ 524
Engine................................................ 513 Gasoline additives ........................ 525
Rims and tires.................................... 514 Coolants....................................... 525
Same size tires............................. 516 Windshield washer and headlamp
Spare wheel (collapsible tire) ....... 517 cleaning* system ......................... 528
Electrical system................................ 518
Main Dimensions ............................... 519
Weights.............................................. 520
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at your
We recommend using Genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies Center where you will receive comprehen-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- sive information, also on permissible tech-
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, nical modifications, and where proper
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. installation will be performed.
their reliability, safety and special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Light Truck Limited Warranty,
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty,
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty,
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only),
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Light Truck Center will be glad to inform (Lemon Laws).
the operation of any equipment, your you of correct care and operating proce-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck dures.
Center will be glad to demonstrate the The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
proper procedures. Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calendar days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have
Written notification should be sent to us,
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
Customer Assistance Center,
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than 07645-0350.
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Roadside Assistance Additional charges may be applicable for a

breakdown location determined not to be a
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance reasonably accessible roadside location as
necessary maintenance work which should Program provides factory-trained technical determined by our authorized technician
be performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to and tow service provider.
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with For additional information refer to the
you when you take the vehicle to your 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) Program brochure in your vehicle literature
Center for service. The service advisor will portfolio.
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus-
record each service in the booklet for you. tomer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in ac-
cordance with standard program guide-
lines which include providing service to the
vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a
paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, howev-
er, the accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center techni-
cian or the tow service provider on a
case-by-case basis and may be a factor in
our ability to respond.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the USA

or Canada
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice” If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
found in the Service and Warranty Informa- eign countries, please be aware that:
tion Booklet, or simply call the
앫 service facilities or replacement parts
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
may not be readily available,
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser- 앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in alytic converters may not be available;
your own interest that we can contact you the use of leaded fuels will damage the
should the need arise. catalysts,
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all 앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
literature with the vehicle to make it avail- er octane rating, and improper fuel can
able to the next operator. cause engine damage.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
13
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
Controls in detail Technical data
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section about the equipment installed on your ve- cle can be found in this section.
has its own reference color. hicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
At a glance with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the
this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms.
Here you will find an overview of all the
you.
controls that can be operated from the The table of contents and the index are de-
driver’s seat. signed to help you find information quickly
Operation and easily.
Getting started Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your
need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation:
Here you will find all the information you
cle. 앫 this Operator’s Manual
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first 앫 the Maintenance Booklet
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be
ing or borrowing this vehicle.
This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the
dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your vehi-
Safety and Security cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety

and security features of your vehicle.
14
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols 왘 This symbol points to instructions for

Trademarks:
Warning! G you to follow.
왘 A number of these symbols appearing
앫 ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
trademarks of DaimlerChrysler. ards that may endanger your health or life, in succession indicates a multiple-step
or the health or life of others. procedure.
앫 HomeLink® is a registered trademark
컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company. ! look for further information on a
topic.
The following symbols are found in this Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle. 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
Operator’s Manual:
an interrupted procedure which
* Optional equipment is identified will be continued on the next
with an asterisk. Since standard i
page.
equipment varies between models, Helpful hints or further information you
the descriptions and illustrations in may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical
this manual may differ slightly from terms, this symbol is used to in-
the actual equipment of your vehi- dicate cross-references to term
cle. definitions.
Display Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle

Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could bance, or you suspect that damage to your 앫 traffic rules and regulations
seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
down, and drive with caution to an area dards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to which is a safe distance from the road.
electronic components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the or repair facility for further inspection or re- risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- pairs. warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
16
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the
matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management, or if
necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid* system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid* subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
19
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Storage compartments
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Cockpit
22
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Cruise control lever 265 a Glove box 294 k Parking brake release 56
2 Instrument cluster 24 b Electrical outlet 307 l Headlamp washer switch* 208
3 Multifunction steering 28 c Center console 29 m Exterior lamp switch 147
wheel d Starter switch 38 n Door control panel 34
4 Horn e Steering wheel adjustment, 45 o Combination switch
5 Steering wheel gearshift 206 manual 앫 Turn signals 58
buttons f Steering wheel adjustment, 46 앫 Windshield wipers 59
6 Gear selector lever for 53 electrical*
앫 High beam 58
automatic transmission g Hood lock release 345
앫 Rear window wiper 61
7 Front Parktronic* warning 276 h Parking brake pedal 65
indicators
j Remote tailgate switch 123
8 Overhead control panel 31
9 Glove box release 294
Glove box lock 295
23
At a glance
Instrument cluster
24
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 L Left turn signal 7 Speedometer with: ’ Variable speed limiter
indicator lamp - Antilock Brake 404 indicator lamp1
2 To dim instrument cluster 158 System (ABS) l Distance warning
illumination indicator lamp lamp1
3 Reset button 158 ; Brake warning lamp, 405 H Combination low tire 412
4 To brighten instrument clus- 158 USA only pressure/TPMS mal-
ter illumination 3 Brake warning lamp, 405 function telltale*
Canada only 1
5 K Right turn signal Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when
the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine
indicator lamp v Electronic Stability 409 is running.
6 Clock Program (ESP®)
warning lamp
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
26
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page Item Page

8 Multifunction display with: a Fuel gauge with:
Trip odometer 159 Fuel tank reserve warning 409
Main odometer 161 lamp
9 Tachometer with: 4 Fuel filler flap indica- 342

tor: The fuel filler flap
< Seat belt telltale 77, is located on the rear
410 right-hand side
1 Supplemental 70, b Multifunction display with:
Restraint System 411
(SRS) indicator lamp Outside temperature display 161
or
? Engine malfunction in- 407 Digital speedometer 161
dicator lamp, (depending on selected
USA only setting in the control system) 179
± Engine malfunction in- 407 Gear position indicator 199
dicator lamp,
Canada only Gear range indicator 199
A High beam headlamp 151 Selected program mode 199

indicator indicator
27
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page Item Page

1 Multifunction display 161 4 Moving within a menu:
Operating the control 162 Press button
system j for next display
2 Telephone* k for previous display
Press button 5 Menu systems:
s to take a call Press button
t to end a call è for next menu
3 Selecting the submenu or ÿ for previous menu
setting the volume:
Press button
æ up/to increase
ç down/to decrease
28
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Modular COMAND System, 6 Front passenger front air 89,
see separate operating in- bag indicator lamp 414
structions 7 Hazard warning flasher 153
2 Climate control 216 8 Alarm system indicator 105
3-zone automatic climate lamp
control* 230
9 Parking assist (Parktronic 277
3 Seat heating*, front passen- 141 system)* deactivation
ger side switch
4 Vehicle level control 272 a Electronic Stability Program 101
switch* (ESP®) switch
5 Program mode selector 204 b Adaptive damping system 269
switch for automatic trans- (ADS)* switch
mission
c Seat heating*, driver’s side 141
29
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page

1 Storage compartment 296
2 Armrest storage tray re-
lease 296
3 Armrest storage compart-
ment release 296
4 Storage compartment 296
Ashtray with cigarette
lighter* 303
5 Cup holder 299
6 Card, ticket holder 300
Bottle opener 300
30
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off 154 a Interior rear view mirror 208
2 Rear interior lighting on/off 154 b Reading lamp, front passen- 154
3 Automatic interior lighting 154 ger side
4 Front interior lighting on/off 154 c Vehicles with telephone* 311

installed:
5 Right reading lamp on/off 154 Hands-free microphone for
6 Front right interior lamp 154 TeleAid* (emergency call
lens system) and telephone*
7 Tilt/sliding sunroof* switch 255 d Garage door opener* 320
Tilt/sliding panel* switch 259 e Reading lamp, driver’s side 154
8 Tele Aid* (emergency call 314 f Front left interior lamp lens 154
system) button
9 Vehicles without 311
telephone* installed:
Hands-free microphone for
TeleAid* (emergency call
system)
31
At a glance
32
At a glance
Item Page Item Page

1 Parcel net in front passen- 298 c Door pocket
ger footwell d Parcel net on driver’s seat 298
2 Glove box/CD-changer* 294 backrest
3 Door pocket e Door pocket
4 Parcel net on front passen- 298 f Storage compartment in 296
ger seat backrest center console
5 Door pocket g Storage compartment in 296
6 Cup holder 302 center console
Ashtray* 303
7 Third-row storage compart- 298
ment h Cupholders 298
8 Parcel net in cargo compart- 299 j Front armrest storage com- 296
ment partments
9 First aid kit, vehicle tool kit, 454 k Cup holders* 302
spare wheel l Rear armrest storage com- 297
a Third-row storage compart- 298 partment*
ment m Cup holders 301
b Cup holder 302 Rear storage compartment 297
Rear seat ashtray* 304
33
At a glance
Door control panel
Item Page
1 Door handle 121
2 Central locking/unlocking 131
switch
3 Exterior rear view mirror ad- 48
justment
4 Selection buttons for exteri- 48
or rear view mirror adjust-
ment
Power-folding exterior rear 211
view mirrors*
5 Switches for opening/clos- 248
ing front and rear door win-
dows
6 Rear side window override 94
switch
7 Hinged quarter window 250
switch*
8 Remote tailgate release 123,
switch, Tailgate opening 124
system*
34
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
35
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey

overview of the vehicle’s most basic func- Warning! G
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the infor- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
mation given here. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
If you are already familiar with the basic children unattended in the vehicle, or with
functions described here, the “Controls in access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
detail” section will provide you with further vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
information. The corresponding page an accident and/or serious personal injury.
references are located at the end of each
segment.
왘 Press unlock button Œ on the
SmartKey
SmartKey.
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate All turn signal lamps flash once. The ve-
3 Œ Unlock button hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 95) doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
system is disarmed. The locator light-
ing comes on if the feature is enabled
in the control system (컄 page 183).
왘 Enter the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 110).
36
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with Keyless-Go* i 왘 Grasp an outside door handle or the

To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey tailgate handle.
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the All turn signal lamps flash once. The ve-
lock or unlock the vehicle without using
vehicle, no further than approximately hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the
the remote control buttons on the
3 feet (1 meter) away from the respec- doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
SmartKey and start the engine without in-
tive door. system is disarmed. The locator light-
serting the SmartKey into the starter
ing comes on if the feature is enabled
switch.
in the control system (컄 page 183).
Warning! G
i
When leaving the vehicle, always take the If the vehicle has been parked for more
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and than 72 hours, you must pull an outside
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- door handle in order to activate the
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an KEYLESS-GO function.
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident 왘 Enter the vehicle.
and/or serious personal injury.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 114).
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate
3 Œ Unlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 95)
37
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions SmartKey mains on after starting the engine or

comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 404).
Warning! G 3 Starting position
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i

SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* When you switch on the ignition, the in-
from the starter switch, take it with you and dicator and warning lamps (except high
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- beam headlamp indicator lamp and
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- vated) in the instrument cluster come
cle equipment may cause an accident Starter switch on. The indicator and warning lamps
and/or serious personal injury. (except high beam headlamp indicator
0 For removing SmartKey
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if
1 Power supply for some electrical con-
activated) will go out when the engine
sumers, such as seat adjustment
is running. This indicates that the re-
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
spective systems are operational.
consumers) and driving position
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator i
lamps unless activated) in the instru- When the SmartKey is removed from
ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the the starter switch and the automatic
instrument cluster fails to come on transmission is in a position other
when the ignition is switched on, have than P, the automatic transmission
it checked and replaced if necessary. If automatically shifts to P.
a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
38
Getting started
Unlocking
! SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* i

If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
starter switch, the battery may not be feature are supplied with a SmartKey with does not need to be removed from the
sufficiently charged. integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a re- starter switch when you leave the vehi-
앫 Check the battery and charge it if movable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. cle. However, always take the
necessary (컄 page 487). SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you
With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
when you leave the vehicle. As long as
앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 496). inserted and the SmartKey with
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in
KEYLESS-GO present in the vehicle, press-
To prevent accelerated battery dis- the vehicle, the vehicle’s electrical sys-
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
charge or a completely discharged bat- tems can be switched on or the engine
tery, always remove the SmartKey from 앫 without the brake pedal depressed can be started using the KEYLESS-GO
the starter switch when the engine is corresponds to the various starter start/stop button.
not in operation. switch positions (컄 page 40)
앫 with the brake pedal firmly depressed
will start the engine (컄 page 54)
If you wish or should there be a need to in-
sert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the
starter switch, the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button can be easily removed by pulling it
out of the starter switch.
39
Getting started
Unlocking
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be i

located in the vehicle. If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
왘 Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop start/stop button
button 1 into starter switch 2 (if not 앫 once more, the ignition (position 2)
inserted already). is switched on
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission 앫 twice more, the power supply is
is set to P. again switched off
왘 Do not depress the brake pedal.
Ignition (or Position 2)
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Position 0
2 Starter switch 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO ton twice.
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
This supplies power for all electrical
electronics have status 0 (as with
consumers.
SmartKey removed).
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
Position 1 indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instru-
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the
ton once.
instrument cluster fails to come on
This supplies power for some electrical when the ignition is switched on, have
consumers, such as seat adjustment. it checked and replaced if necessary. If
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
3 USA only mains on after starting the engine or
4 Canada only comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 404).
40
Getting started
Unlocking
i For information on starting the engine

If you now press the KEYLESS-GO using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
start/stop button once more, the pow- see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
er supply is again switched off. (컄 page 54).
For more information on KEYLESS-GO, see
i “SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 114).
When you switch on the ignition, the in-
dicator and warning lamps (except high
beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
vated) in the instrument cluster come
on. The indicator and warning lamps
(except high beam headlamp indicator
lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps if
activated) will go out when the engine
is running. This indicates that the re-
spective systems are operational.
41
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 50).
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Never place hands under the seat or near According to accident statistics, children
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- any moving parts while a seat is being ad- are safer when properly restrained in the
tening of seat belts, must be done before justed. rear seating positions than in the front seat-
the vehicle is put into motion. ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
Seats Warning! G whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the must be seated and properly secured in an
Warning! G SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* appropriate infant or toddler restraint, or
from the starter switch, take it with you, and booster seat recommended for the size and
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. lock the vehicle. weight of the child. For additional informa-
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey tion, see “Children in the vehicle”
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the (컄 page 82).
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat starter switch or the SmartKey with A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
back in an excessively reclined position as KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, significantly increased if the child restraints
this can be dangerous. You could slide un- the power seats can be operated when the are not properly secured in the vehicle and
der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide respective door is open. the child is not properly secured in the child
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Therefore, do not leave children unattended restraint.
domen or neck. That could cause serious or in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
belts provide the best restraint when the ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
wearer is in a nearly upright position and ous personal injury.
belts are properly positioned on the body.
42
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). i

The seat adjustment switch is located on or The memory function* (컄 page 144)
the entry side of each front seat base. lets you store the settings for the seat
왘 Open the respective door (vehicles
position together with the settings for
with memory function*).
the steering wheel column and the ex-
The seat can be adjusted with the re- terior rear view mirrors.
spective door opened.
or Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘 Open a front door (vehicles without 왘 Press the switch forward or backward
memory function*). in direction of arrow 5.
The seat can be adjusted within Adjust the seat to a comfortable seat-
3 minutes after either front door has ing position that still allows you to
1 Head restraint height* been opened. reach the accelerator/brake pedal
2 Seat cushion tilt safely. The position should be as far to
3 Seat height ! the rear as possible, consistent with
4 Backrest tilt When adjusting the seat backrest tilt ability to properly operate controls.
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment and head restraint height, make sure
the sun visor is folded up (컄 page 212). !
If the head restraint is in the uppermost When moving the seat, make sure
position, it could hit and damage the there are no items in the footwell or be-
sun visor. hind the seat. Otherwise you could
damage the seat.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat height Head restraint height Vehicles with memory function*:

왘 Press the switch up or down in the 왘 Press switch (컄 page 43) up or down in
direction of arrow 3. Warning! G direction of arrow 1.
Vehicles without memory function*:
Seat cushion tilt For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
왘 Press the switch up or down in
direction of arrow 2 until your upper Adjust head restraint so that the center of
legs are lightly supported. the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
Seat backrest tilt tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
왘 Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 4 until your arms Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
are slightly angled when holding the head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
steering wheel. ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent. 1 Head restraint
2 Release button
!
Do not attempt to remove front seat
head restraints. They can only be re-
moved by qualified technicians. We
recommend that you have this work
carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
44
Getting started
Adjusting
Raising: Head restraint tilt Steering wheel

왘 Manually adjust the height of head
restraint 1 by pulling it upward. Steering wheel adjustment, manual
If head restraint 1 is fully retracted,
push release button 2 in direction of Warning! G
arrow and pull head restraint 1 up-
ward. Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehi-
cle at a standstill and make sure the steer-
Lowering:
ing wheel is securely locked in place before
왘 To lower head restraint 1, push driving off.
release button 2 in direction of arrow Manually adjust the angle of the head Driving without the steering wheel adjust-
and press down on head restraint 1. restraint. ment locked may cause an unexpected
왘 Push or pull on the lower edge of the steering wheel movement which could
head restraint cushion. cause the driver to lose control of the vehi-
cle. Make sure the steering wheel is secure-
i ly locked by trying to move it up and down,
Adjust the head restraint in such a way and in and out before driving off.
that it is as close to the head as possi-
ble.
For more information, see “Seats”

(컄 page 132).
45
Getting started
Adjusting
The handle for steering wheel adjustment 왘 Push handle back to its original posi- Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*
is located on the lower left of the steering tion to relock the steering column.
column.
The steering column is locked into po- Warning! G
sition again.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
왘 Make sure the steering column is se-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
curely locked by trying to move the
ing could cause the driver to lose control of
steering wheel up and down as well as
the vehicle.
in and out before driving off.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
왘 To unlock the steering column, pull Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
handle out to its stop limit. KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
왘 Move steering wheel to the desired po-
removed from the vehicle, the steering
sition.
wheel adjustment feature can be operated
Make sure your legs can move freely when the driver’s door is open. Therefore,
and that all displays (including malfunc- do not leave children unattended in the ve-
tion and indicator lamps) on the instru- hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
ment cluster are clearly visible. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
46
Getting started
Adjusting
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is Adjusting steering column in or out Mirrors
located on the lower left of the steering
왘 Move stalk forward or back in direction
column. Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
of arrow 1 until a comfortable steer-
mirrors before driving so that you have a
ing wheel position is reached with your
good view of the road and traffic condi-
arms slightly bent at the elbow.
tions.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘 Move stalk up or down in direction of
Warning! G
arrow 2.
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
Make sure your legs can move freely escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
and that all displays (including malfunc- breaks.
tion and indicator lamps) on the instru- Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out ment cluster are clearly visible. low the liquid to come into contact with
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
i
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). In case it does, immediately flush affected
The memory function (컄 page 144) lets area with water, and seek medical help if
or you store the settings for the steering necessary.
왘 Open the driver’s door. wheel column together with the set-
tings for seat positions and the exterior
rear view mirrors. !
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.
47
Getting started
Adjusting
Interior rear view mirror The buttons are located on the driver’s 왘 Press button 1 for the driver’s side ex-
door. terior rear view mirror or button 3 for
왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view mir-
The indicator lamp on the respective
rors” (컄 page 208).
button comes on for approximately
15 seconds.
Exterior rear view mirrors
i
Warning! G If you do not make adjustments to the
selected exterior rear view mirror with-
Exercise care when using the in 15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror out. You will then have to select the de-
The mirror surface is convex (outwardly button sired exterior rear view mirror again be-
curved surface for a wider field of view). Ob- 2 Adjustment button fore any adjustments can be made.
jects in mirror are closer than they appear. 3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- Adjustments can only be made with the
Check your interior rear view mirror or ror button indicator lamp for the respective exteri-
glance over your shoulder before changing 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). or rear view mirror button illuminated.
lanes.
왘 Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
48
Getting started
Adjusting
! i
If an exterior rear view mirror was forc- The memory function* (컄 page 144)
ibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) lets you store the settings for the exte-
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from rior rear view mirrors together with the
the front), reposition it by applying firm setting for the steering wheel column
pressure until it snaps into place. The and the seat positions.
mirror housing is then properly posi-
At low ambient temperatures, the
tioned and you can adjust the mirror in
exterior rear view mirrors will be heat-
the usual manner.
ed automatically.
! For more information, see “Rear view mir-

Vehicles with power folding exterior rors” (컄 page 208) and “Storing exterior
rear view mirrors*: rear view mirror parking position”
If an exterior rear view mirror housing (컄 page 146).
is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
from the front) press button 1 to fold
mirrors in, then press button 1 again
to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirrors
by hand as this may damage the adjust-
ment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly po-
sitioned and you can adjust the mirror
in the usual manner.
49
Getting started
Driving
Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-

sition your seat belt greatly increases your
Warning! G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot- risk of injuries and their likely severity in an According to accident statistics, children
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in accident. You and your passengers should are safer when properly restrained in the
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear- always wear seat belts. rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ance for the pedals. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
During sudden driving or braking maneu- can be considerably more severe without that children be placed in the rear seats. Re-
vers, the objects could get caught between your seat belt properly buckled. Without gardless of seating position, children 12
the pedals. You could then no longer brake your seat belt buckled, you are much more years old and under must be seated and
or accelerate. likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be properly secured in an appropriate infant or
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
or killed. mended for the size and weight of the child.
Fastening the seat belts For additional information, see “Children in
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your the vehicle” (컄 page 82).
Warning! G seat belt. The airbags can only provide the A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
protection they were designed to afford if significantly increased if the child restraints
Always fasten your seat belt before driving the occupants are using their seat belts are not properly secured in the vehicle and
off. Always make sure your passengers are (컄 page 77). the child is not properly secured in the child
properly restrained, even those sitting in the restraint.
rear and pregnant women.
50
Getting started
Driving
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Never let more people ride in the vehicle
backrest in an excessively reclined position than there are seat belts available. Make
as this can be dangerous. You could slide sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Never use a seat belt for more than one per-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or son at a time.
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the Warning! G
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 74) and (컄 page 77).
1 Seat belt outlet

2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
51
Getting started
Driving
왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt out 왘 Press release button 1 and move the 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
of seat belt outlet 1. seat belt height adjuster upward or person at a time.
downward.
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt 앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-
across the top of your shoulder and the son and another object at the same
Proper use of seat belts
lap portion across your hips. time. When using a seat belt to secure
앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening. infant or toddler restraints or children
왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3
in booster seats, always follow the
(컄 page 51) until it clicks. 앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
portion is located as close as possible
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
to the middle of the shoulder (it should 앫 Check your seat belt periodically
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
not touch the neck). Never pass the during travel to make sure that it is
up.
shoulder portion of the belt under your properly positioned.
arm. For this purpose, you can adjust
Seat belt height adjustment 앫 Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
the height of the belt outlet
snugly. Take special care of this when
(컄 page 52).
wearing loose clothing.
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly
upright position.
1 Release button
52
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission

Warning! G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They Warning! G
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
This could damage the belt. monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and possible death.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effective- Do not run the engine in confined areas
ness of the belts. (such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may transmission
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may P Park position
have the cause determined and corrected
not be able to provide adequate protection. R Reverse gear
immediately. If you must drive under these
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly conditions, drive only with at least one win- N Neutral
stressed in an accident must be replaced. dow fully open. D Drive position
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
For more information on how to operate
Truck Center.
the gear selector lever, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 197).
53
Getting started
Driving
Starting with the SmartKey Starting with KEYLESS-GO*

왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P. Warning! G
The gear position indicator in the multi-
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
function display should be on P.
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
왘 Do not depress the accelerator. Therefore, never leave children unattended
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch in the vehicle, as they could otherwise acci-
to position 3 (컄 page 38) and hold until dentally start the engine.
the engine starts. When leaving the vehicle, always take the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
i lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- 1 USA only
You can also use the “touch-start” tended in the vehicle, or with access to an 2 Canada only
function. Turn the SmartKey to unlocked vehicle. 왘 Make sure KEYLESS-GO start/stop
position 3 and release it again immedi- button 1 is inserted in the starter
ately. The engine then starts automati- switch (컄 page 40).
You can start your vehicle without the
cally.
SmartKey in the starter switch using the 왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in the is set to P.
For information on turning off the engine starter switch.
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off the en- The gear position indicator in the multi-
gine” (컄 page 66). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be function display should be on P.
located in the vehicle.
왘 Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure.
왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
54
Getting started
Driving
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop Starting difficulties 왘 Start the engine with the SmartKey as
button 1 once. radio signals from another source may
If the engine does not start as described,
be interfering with the SmartKey with
The engine starts if the SmartKey with carry out the following steps:
KEYLESS-GO*.
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.
왘 If you are starting the engine with the
왘 Repeat the starting procedure
i SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting (컄 page 54). Remember that extended
If you wish to start the vehicle using the starting attempts can drain the battery.
procedure.
SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO
왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 496).
feature, remove the KEYLESS-GO 왘 If you are starting the engine with
start/stop button from the starter KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that If the engine does not start after several
switch (컄 page 40). may be open to allow for better detec- starting attempts, there could be a mal-
tion of the SmartKey with function in the engine electronics or in the
For information on turning off the engine KEYLESS-GO. fuel supply system.
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with Or: 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 66). Light Truck Center.
왘 Remove KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from starter switch.
55
Getting started
Driving
Parking brake Driving

Warning! G
왘 Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever can now be
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
used.
from the starter switch, take it with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- 왘 Shift automatic transmission to D or R
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an (컄 page 198).
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake, which could result in an acci- i
dent and/or serious injury. Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
1 Parking brake pedal motion.
왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on
2 Release handle
release handle 2.
i
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument Shifting from gear position P to posi-
cluster goes out. tion R, N, or D is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed. Without the
brake pedal depressed, the gear selec-
tor lever can be moved, but the parking
pawl remains engaged, not allowing
shifting to occur.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
56
Getting started
Driving
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator After a cold start, the automatic transmis- !
pedal. sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. Shift the automatic transmission to
This allows the catalytic converter to reach position P or R only when the vehicle is
Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-
its operating temperature earlier. stopped in order to avoid damaging the
matic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs drop down. transmission.
Warning! G
i !
The automatic door lock feature can be On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
Do not run cold engine at high engine
deactivated (컄 page 188). in order to obtain braking action. This could
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
engine speeds may shorten the service
i cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
life of the engine.
vent this type of loss of control.
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions !
are safe to do so.
Warning! G Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
! It is dangerous to shift the gear selector duces engine performance and causes
If you hear a warning signal and the lever out of P or N if the engine speed is premature brake and drivetrain wear.
message Release parking brake higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
appears in the multifunction display firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could For more information, see “Driving instruc-
when driving off, you have forgotten to accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You tions” (컄 page 331).
release the parking brake. could lose control of the vehicle and hit
Release the parking brake. someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
57
Getting started
Driving
Switching on headlamps High beam Turn signals

The combination switch is located on the
For more information on headlamps, see The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
“Lighting” (컄 page 147). left of the steering column.
Low beam headlamps

The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
Combination switch
Combination switch
1 High beam
1 Turn signals, right
2 High beam flasher
2 Turn signals, left
왘 Push the combination switch in direc-
왘 Press combination switch in direction
Exterior lamp switch tion of arrow 1.
of arrow 1 or 2.
1 Off The high beam headlamp indicator
The corresponding turn signal indicator
2 Low beam headlamps on lamp A in the instrument cluster
lamp L or K in the instrument
comes on (컄 page 24).
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to cluster flashes.
position B. For more information on headlamps, see
“Combination switch” (컄 page 151).
The low beam headlamps come on.
58
Getting started
Driving
The combination switch resets automati- Windshield wipers !

cally after major steering wheel move- Do not operate the windshield wipers
ment. The combination switch is located on the when the windshield is dry. Dust that
left of the steering column. accumulates on a windshield might
i
scratch the glass and/or damage the
To signal minor directional changes, wiper blades when wiping occurs on a
move combination switch to point of dry windshield. If it is necessary to op-
resistance and release. The corre- erate the windshield wipers in dry
sponding turn signal flashes three weather conditions, always operate the
times. windshield wipers with windshield
washer fluid (컄 page 60).
Switching on windshield wipers

Combination switch 왘 Turn the combination switch to the de-
1 Single wipe sired position depending on the inten-
Wiping with windshield washer fluid sity of the rain.
2 Switching on windshield wipers 0 Windshield wipers off
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). I Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
59
Getting started
Driving
Intermittent wiping i Wiping with windshield washer fluid
! Intermittent wiping is interrupted when 왘 Press the combination switch in direc-

the vehicle is at a standstill and a front tion of arrow 1 past the resistance
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
door is opened. point.
mittent setting when the vehicle is tak-
en to an automatic car wash or during Intermittent wiping will be continued The windshield wipers operate with
windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper- when washer fluid.
ate in the presence of water sprayed on 앫 all doors are closed
the windshield, and windshield wipers i
may be damaged as a result. and To prevent smears on the windshield,
앫 the automatic transmission is set to wipe with windshield washer fluid every
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent position D or R now and then even when it is raining.
on wetness of windshield. or
For information on filling up the washer
왘 Set the wiper switch to position I. 앫 the wiper setting is changed using reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
After the initial wipe, pauses between the combination switch washer system and headlamp cleaning
wipes are automatically controlled by the system*” (컄 page 352).
rain sensor. Single wipe
왘 Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
60
Getting started
Driving
! 앫 Remove blockage. Rear window wiper/washer

If anything blocks the windshield 앫 Turn the windshield wipers on
wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch The combination switch is located on the
again. left of the steering column.
them off immediately.
If the windshield wipers fail to function
앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle at all in combination switch position I,
in a safe location and
앫 set the combination switch to the
앫 remove the SmartKey from the next higher wiper speed
starter switch
앫 have the windshield wipers
or checked at the nearest authorized
앫 turn off the engine by pressing Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button and open the driver’s
door (with the driver’s door Combination switch
open, starter switch is in 1 Rear window wiper switch
position 0, same as with 2 Wiping rear window with washer fluid
SmartKey removed from starter 3 Intermittent wiping
switch) 4 Rear window wiper off
before attempting to remove any 5 Wiping rear window with washer fluid
blockage.
61
Getting started
Driving
Deactivating intermittent wipe Problems while driving

왘 Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to
position 4 (컄 page 61). The engine runs erratically and misfires
Symbol 6 for the rear window wiper is 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged.
cleared from the lower multifunction
앫 The engine electronics may not be
display, indicating that the rear window
6 Rear window wiper indicator operating properly.
wiper is deactivated.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered
Wiping with windshield washer fluid the catalytic converter and damaged it.
i
왘 Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to 왘 Give very little gas.
The rear window wiper engages auto-
position 2 or 5 (컄 page 61). 왘 Have the problem repaired by an
matically when the automatic transmis-
sion is shifted to position R with the The wiper operates with washer fluid. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
windshield wipers switched on. Center as soon as possible.
왘 Hold rear window wiper switch 1 in
position 2 or 5 (컄 page 61) until the
Activating intermittent wipe rear window is clean.
왘 Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to For information on filling up the washer
position 3 (컄 page 61). reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
In the lower multifunction display you washer system and headlamp cleaning
will see symbol 6 , indicating that the system*” (컄 page 352).
rear window wiper is activated.
62
Getting started
Driving
The coolant temperature is above In case of accident

248°F (120°C)
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
왘 Do not start the engine under any
cooling the engine.
circumstances.
왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in
왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
a safe location and turn off the engine.
ties.
Allow engine and coolant to cool.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
왘 Check the coolant level and add cool-
termined:
ant if necessary (컄 page 351).
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫 major assemblies
앫 fuel system
앫 engine mount:
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
63
Getting started
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.

You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G 앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
your vehicle. End your drive as follows. from the starter switch, or press the
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
start/stop button (vehicles with
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot
KEYLESS-GO*).
앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
exhaust system, as these materials could be
With the engine not running, there is no KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
power assistance for the brake and the leaving.
steering system. In this case, it is important To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
to keep in mind that a considerably higher sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
degree of effort is necessary to brake and the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
steer the vehicle. 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫 Shift the automatic transmission to
position P.
앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
64
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking brake
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the auto-
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* matic transmission not fully engaged in
from the starter switch, take it with you and position P is dangerous. Also, when parked
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- on an incline, position P alone may not pre-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an vent your vehicle from moving, possibly hit-
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the ting people or objects.
parking brake and/or shift the automatic Always set the parking brake in addition to
transmission out of position P, either of shifting to position P (컄 page 199).
which could result in an accident and/or
1 Parking brake pedal serious personal injury. When parked on an incline, also turn front
2 Release handle wheel towards the road curb.
왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 1.

Switching off headlamps
When the engine is running, the warn-
ing lamp ; (USA only) or 3 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M.
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
comes on. For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 147).
65
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off the engine Turning off with the SmartKey Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to
to position 0 (컄 page 38). button (컄 page 40) to turn off the
position P (컄 page 199).
engine.
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 65).
switch. With the driver's door closed, the start-
i er switch is now in position 1. With the
The immobilizer is activated.
Always set the parking brake in addi- driver’s door opened, the starter switch
tion to shifting to position P i is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
(컄 page 199). If you turn off the engine using the removed from starter switch
SmartKey and remove the SmartKey (컄 page 38).
When parked on an incline, also turn
from the starter switch with the trans-
front wheel towards the road curb. i
mission in a position other than P, the
If you turn off the engine using the
transmission will automatically shift
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
to P.
open the driver’s door with the trans-
Keep in mind that turning off the engine mission in a position other than P, the
with the SmartKey alone will not auto- transmission will automatically shift
matically shift the transmission to P. to P.
Only when the SmartKey is removed
from the starter switch will the trans- Keep in mind that turning off the engine
mission automatically shift to P. with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button alone will not automatically shift
the transmission to P. Only when the
driver’s door is opened will the trans-
mission automatically shift to P.
66
Getting started
Parking and locking
Releasing seat belts Locking i

A warning sounds and the message
왘 Press the seat belt release button
Switch off lights appears in the
(컄 page 51). Warning! G multifunction display if the vehicle’s
Allow the retractor to completely re- exterior lamps are not switched off
To prevent possible personal injury, always
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
keep hands and fingers away from the door 앫 with the SmartKey removed from
plate.
openings when closing the doors. Be espe- the starter switch and the driver’s
! cially careful when small children are door open
Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so around. 앫 with the engine turned off using the
that the seat belt and/or latch plate Before closing doors, make sure there is no KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
cannot get caught or pinched in the possibility of someone getting caught in a and the driver’s door open (same as
door or in the seat mechanism. This door during closing. SmartKey removed from starter
can damage the seat belt and impair switch)
the effectiveness of the seat belt, Switch off the exterior lamps.
and/or cause damage to the door Warning! G
and/or door trim panel. Such damage
왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors and
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
the tailgate.
Limited Warranty. SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
Light Truck Center. attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
cle equipment may cause an accident
67
Getting started
Parking and locking
Locking with the SmartKey Locking with KEYLESS-GO*

왘 Press lock button ‹ on the
SmartKey (컄 page 36).
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
1 Lock button on the outside door handle
왘 Press lock button 1 on an outside
door handle or on the tailgate
(컄 page 120).
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
armed.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- Advanced air bag system components with The SRS system conducts a self-test when
portant facts about the restraint systems the ignition is switched on and in regular
앫 Front passenger air bag off indicator
of the vehicle. intervals while the engine is running. This
lamp (컄 page 89)
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The restraint systems are
앫 Front passenger seat with Occupant The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
앫 Seat belts (컄 page 77) Classification System (OCS) cluster (컄 page 24) comes on when the
(컄 page 85) ignition is switched on and goes out no
앫 Child restraints (컄 page 90)
As independent systems, their protective later than a few seconds after the engine
앫 Lower anchors and tethers for children was started.
functions work in conjunction with each
(LATCH) (컄 page 92)
other. The SRS components are in operational
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
i lit when the engine is running.
앫 Air bags (컄 page 71)
For information on infants and children
앫 Air bag control unit (with crash traveling with you in the vehicle and A malfunction in the system has been
sensors) restraint systems for infants and chil- detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫 Emergency tensioning device (ETD) for dren, see “Children in the vehicle” 앫 fails to go out no later than approxi-
seat belts (컄 page 80) (컄 page 82). mately 4 seconds after the engine was
started
앫 does not come on at all
앫 comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning! G If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp contact a local authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center or call our Customer
Warning! G
comes on during driving or does not come
at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly (1-800-367-6372) for details.
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im-
recommend that you visit an authorized pacts (front air bags), side impacts (side
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi- impact air bags and head protection window
ately to have the system checked; otherwise curtain air bags) or rollovers (head protec-
the SRS may not deploy when needed in an tion window curtain air bags). However, no
accident, which could result in serious or fa- system available today can totally eliminate
tal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly injuries and fatalities.
and unnecessarily which could also result in
The activation of the air bags temporarily re-
injury.
leases a small amount of dust from the air
In addition, improper work on the SRS bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera- to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
tive or causing unintended air bag deploy- the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem-
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only porary breathing difficulty for people with
be performed by qualified technicians. asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
Truck Center. as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible

rearward, still permitting proper opera-
앫 Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
tion of vehicle controls. The distance heads in the area of the door where the
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast- side impact air bag inflates. This could
air bags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the air bag cover result in serious injuries or death should
driver and front passenger to always be in a on the steering wheel must be at least the air bag be triggered. Always sit near-
properly seated position and to wear their 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should ly upright, properly use the seat belts
respective seat belt. be able to accomplish this by a combina- and use an appropriately sized infant or
For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and toddler restraint or booster seat recom-
steering wheel. If you have any prob- mended for the size and weight of the
collision always be in normal seated position
lems, please see an authorized child.
with your back against the seat backrest.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Failure to follow these instructions can re-
Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
앫 Do not lean your head or chest close to sult in severe injuries to you or other occu-
properly positioned on your body
the steering wheel or dashboard. pants.
(컄 page 50).
앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in- you make the buyer aware of this safety
speed and force, a proper seating and hands side the rim can increase the risk and
on steering wheel position will help to keep information. Be sure to give the buyer this
potential severity of hand/arm injury
you at a safe distance from the air bag. Operator’s Manual.
when driver’s front air bag inflates.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
or too close to the air bag can be seriously possible rearward from the dashboard
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates when the seat is occupied.
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
Warning! G (2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and for children 12 years Air bags are designed to activate only
old and under, use an appropriately in certain frontal impacts (front air
Accident research shows that the safest
sized infant or toddler restraint or bags), side impacts (side impact and
place for children in an automobile is in the
booster seat recommended for the size head protection window curtain air
rear seat.
and weight of the child. bags) which exceed preset thresholds,
It should be noted that with respect to both, and in certain rollovers (head protec-
front side impact air bags or the rear side (3) Always wear seat belts properly.
tion window curtain air bags). Only dur-
impact air bags*, there is a possibility for a If you believe that, even with the use of ing these events will they provide their
side impact air bag related injury if occu- these guidelines, it would be safer for your supplemental protection.
pants, especially children, are not properly rear seat occupants to have the rear seat
seated or restrained when next to a side im- mounted side impact air bags deactivated, The driver and passengers should
pact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in then deactivation can be accomplished always wear their seat belts. Otherwise
a side impact in order to do its job. upon your written request to do so at an it is not possible for air bags to provide
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck their supplemental protection.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines: Center at an additional cost. In case of other types of impacts and
Please contact your local authorized impacts below air bag deployment
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call thresholds, air bags will not deploy. The
never place their bodies or lean their
our Customer Assistance Center at driver and passenger will then be pro-
heads in the area of the door where the
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) tected to the extent possible by a prop-
side impact air bag inflates. This could
for details. erly fastened seat belt. A properly
result in serious injuries or death should
fastened seat belt is also needed to
the side impact air bag be activated.
provide the best possible protection in
a rollover.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
We caution you not to rely on the Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
presence of the air bags in order to emergency tensioning device and may severely weaken them. In a crash
avoid wearing your seat belt. air bag they may not be able to provide ade-
quate protection.
It is important to your safety and that of
your passengers that you replace de- Warning! G 앫 No modifications of any kind may be
ployed air bags and repair any malfunc- made to any components or wiring of
tioning air bags to make sure the 앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were the SRS. This includes changing or
highly stressed in an accident must be removing any component or part of the
vehicle will continue to provide supple-
replaced and their anchoring points SRS, the installation of additional trim
mental crash protection for occupants.
must also be checked. Use only belts in- material, badges, etc. over the steering
stalled or supplied by an authorized wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. cover, outboard sides of the front seat
backrests, door trim panels, or door
앫 Air bags and pyrotechnic emergency
frame trims, and installation of addition-
tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed
al electrical/electronic equipment on or
to function on a one-time-only basis. An
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
air bag or ETD that is deployed must be
area between air bags and occupants
replaced. PRE-SAFE®* has electrically
free from objects (e.g. packages, purs-
operated reversible pre-tensioners in
es, umbrellas, etc.).
addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs.
앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers
앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
from the coat hooks or handles over the
They could tear.
door. These items may turn into projec-
앫 Do not make any modification that could tiles and cause head and other injuries
change the effectiveness of the belts. when curtain air bag is deployed.
앫 Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags

앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
Warning! G
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
Only use seat covers which have been test-
seat.
ed and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
앫 In addition, improper repair work on the vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
inoperative or causing unintended air
the front side impact air bags or the rear
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified side impact air bags*. Contact your autho-
technicians. Contact an authorized rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. availability.
앫 For your protection and the protection 1 Driver air bag
of others, when scrapping the air bag When you sell your vehicle we strongly 2 Passenger air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device, urge you to give notice to the subsequent
our safety instructions must be fol-
Driver and front passenger air bags are
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
lowed. These instructions are available deployed:
alerting them to the applicable section in
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz the Operator’s Manual. 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
Light Truck Center.
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
앫 Given the considerable deployment
threshold
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags, 앫 independently of the side impact air
there is the possibility of abrasions or bags
other more significant injuries resulting
from air bag deployment.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i The air bags will not deploy in impacts Side impact air bags, window curtain
The front air bags in this vehicle have which do not exceed the system’s deploy- air bags
been designed to inflate in two stages. ment thresholds. You will then be protec-
This allows the air bag to have different ted by the fastened seat belts.
rates of inflation that are based on the The passenger front air bag will only be
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as deployed if:
assessed by the air bag control unit.
앫 the system, based on OCS weight sen-
On the front passenger-side, the front sor readings, senses that the front
air bag deployment is additionally influ- passenger seat is occupied
enced by the passenger’s weight cate-
앫 the 59 indicator lamp in
gory as identified by the Occupant
the center console is not lit
Classification System (OCS) 1 Front side impact air bag
(컄 page 89)
(컄 page 85). 2 Window curtain air bag
앫 the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
The lighter the front passenger side oc- 3 Rear side impact air bag*
ment threshold
cupant, the higher the vehicle deceler- The side impact air bags and window
ation rate required for the second curtain air bags are deployed:
stage inflation of the air bag.
앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
앫 independently of the front air bags
76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In addition, the window curtain air bags 2 Seat belts exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) if either
are deployed in certain vehicle rollovers. the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
When the engine is started, the seat belt belt remains unfastened.
The front passenger side impact air bag
telltale < illuminates for a maximum of
will not deploy if the OCS senses that the If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to
front passenger seat is empty and the front belt remains unfastened after
remind you and your passengers to fasten
passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch 60 seconds, the seat belt telltale <
your seat belts.
plate is not inserted into the buckle). With stops flashing and the warning chime
an empty front passenger seat and the If after these 6 seconds, the driver’s or the stops sounding. The seat belt
seat belt fastened (latch plate properly in- front passenger’s seat belt (with the front telltale < then continues to be illu-
serted into buckle) the front passenger passenger seat occupied) are not fastened minated for as long as either the driv-
side impact air bag will deploy indepen- with all doors closed, er’s or front passenger’s seat belt are
dently of the empty seat. 앫 and the vehicle speed does not exceed not fastened.
The side impact air bags and window cur- 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt The seat belt telltale < will only go out
tain air bags are not deployed in impacts telltale < remains illuminated for as if both the driver’s and the front passen-
which do not exceed the system’s deploy- long as either the driver’s or front ger’s seat belt (with the front passenger
ment threshold. passenger’s seat belt is not fastened seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle
앫 and the vehicle speed exceeds is standing still and a front door is opened.
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt For more information, see “Practical hints”
telltale < starts flashing and a (컄 page 410).
warning chime sounds with increasing
intensity until both the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat belt are fas-
tened, or for a maximum of 60 seconds
from the time the vehicle speed
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Always wear your seat belt. All vehicle

occupants always need to have their seat Warning! G Warning! G
belts fastened and wear them properly.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
In addition, applicable motor vehicle safety off. Always make sure all of your passengers backrest in an excessively reclined position
laws require you to wear seat belts. Even are properly restrained, even those sitting in as this can be dangerous. You could slide
where this is not the case, we strongly the rear and pregnant women. under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
recommend that all vehicle occupants under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
have their seat belts fastened and wear Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your domen or neck. That could cause serious or
them properly. even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
For more information, see “Fastening the accident. You and your passengers should seat belt provide the best restraint when the
seat belts” (컄 page 50). always wear seat belts. wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
i If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
For information on infants and children can be considerably more severe without
traveling with you in the vehicle and re- your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
Warning! G
straint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle” likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
(컄 page 82). ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
than there are seat belts available. Make
or killed.
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
death is lessened if you are properly wearing Never use a seat belt for more than one per-
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as son at a time.
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
der. In a frontal crash, your body would
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
move too far forward. That would in-
stressed in an accident must be replaced 앫 Seat belts can only work when used crease the chance of head and neck in-
and their anchoring points must also be properly. Never wear seat belts in any juries. The belt would also apply too
checked. other way than as described in this sec- much force to the ribs or abdomen,
Only use seat belts which have been ap- tion, as that could result in serious inju- which could severely injure internal or-
proved by Mercedes-Benz. ries in case of an accident. gans such as your liver or spleen.
앫 Each occupant should wear their seat 앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help objects in or on your clothing, such as
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
reduce the likelihood of and potential eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys, etc., as
of the ETDs or to failure. severity of injuries in accidents, includ- these might cause injuries.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may ing rollovers. The integrated restraint 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
severely weaken them. In a crash they may system includes SRS (driver air bag, pas- on your hips and not across the abdo-
not be able to provide adequate protection. senger front air bag, side impact air men. If the belt is positioned across your
bags, head protection window curtain abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
Have all work carried out only by qualified air bags for side windows) and ETD (seat in a crash.
technicians. Contact an authorized belt emergency tensioning device). The
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. system is designed to enhance the pro- 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
tection offered to properly belted occu- person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt
pants in certain frontal (front air bags around a person and another person or
and ETD) and side (side impact, window other objects. 컄컄
curtain air bags and ETD) impacts which
exceed preset deployment thresholds
and in certain rollovers (window curtain
air bags and ETD).
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Emergency tensioning device (ETD), In an impact, emergency tensioning

앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you would not have the full width seat belt force limiter devices remove slack from the belts in
of the belt to distribute impact forces. such a way that the seat belts fit more
The seat belts for the front and rear seats
The twisted belt against your body could snugly against the body. Belt force limiters
are equipped with emergency tensioning
cause injuries. reduce the force exerted by the seat belts
devices and belt force limiters.
앫 Pregnant women should also use a on occupants during a crash.
The ETD is designed to activate in the
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
following cases:
should be positioned as low as possible Warning! G
on the hips to avoid any possible pres- 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
sure on the abdomen. ing a preset severity level A pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument (ETD) that was activated must be replaced.
앫 in certain vehicle rollovers
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
When disposing of the pyrotechnic emer-
keep both feet on the floor in front of the 앫 if the restraint systems are operational
seat. gency tensioning device, our safety instruc-
and functioning correctly, see
tions must be followed. These are available
앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 411)
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
or toddler restraints or children in
booster seats, always follow the child i Truck Center.
seat manufacturer's instructions. The ETDs for the front seats will only PRE-SAFE®* has electrically operated
activate if the respective front seat belt reversible pre-tensioners that do not require
is fastened (latch plate properly insert- replacement after activation.
ed into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear seats will activate
with or without the respective seat belt
fastened.
80
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Preventive occupant safety* In such cases, the following systems are i

(PRE-SAFE®) automatically activated: The PRE-SAFE® system is activated in
앫 The front seat belts are pre-tensioned the previously described circumstanc-
es only at speeds exceeding 22 mph
Warning! G electrically.
(35 km/h).
앫 Vehicles with front passenger seat
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to re- memory function*: When the driving dynamic situation has
duce the effects of an accident on properly If the OCS senses that the front pas- passed without an accident occurring,
seat-belted vehicle occupants. Despite senger seat is occupied and the seat is the pre-tensioning on the seat belts is
having the PRE-SAFE® system in your vehi- in an unfavorable position, it will be deactivated.
cle, the possibility of injuries occurring as a adjusted to a better position. You can then adjust the seats and the
result of an accident cannot be totally elimi- tilt/sliding sunroof* to their previous
앫 Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof*:
nated. Therefore you should always drive position.
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes if the
carefully and adjust your driving to the pre-
vehicle is in a severe skid or is spin-
vailing road, weather, and traffic conditions.
ning. If the seat belts do not release:
i 왘 Adjust the backrest or seat slightly to

Your vehicle automatically takes preven-
tive measures to better protect the occu- the rear until the seat belt tension is
If the closing procedure of the
pants in the following hazardous diminished.
tilt/sliding sunroof* is blocked, the
situations: tilt/sliding sunroof* will stop and open The locking mechanism releases.
앫 You execute an emergency braking slightly.
maneuver and the Brake Assist System
(컄 page 99) is activated.
앫 The PRE-SAFE® system detects a criti-
cal driving dynamics situation.
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle Infant and child restraint systems i

We recommend all infants and children be For information on child seats with
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
properly restrained at all times while the mounting fittings for tether anchorag-
the vehicle:
vehicle is in motion. es, see “Installation of infant and child
앫 Secure the child using an infant or child restraint system” (컄 page 90).
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
restraint appropriate to the age and
seat belt have special seat belt retractors For information on LATCH-type child
size of the child.
for secure fastening of child restraints. seat mounts, see “Child seat
앫 Make sure the infant or child is proper- anchors – LATCH type” (컄 page 92).
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
ly secured at all times while the vehicle
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
is in motion. The use of infant or child restraints is re-
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
Infant and child restraint seats and infor- let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a quired by law in all 50 states, the District
mation on choosing an appropriate ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Ca-
restraint system can be obtained at any that the special seat belt retractor is acti- nadian provinces.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck vated. The belt is now locked. Push down Infants and small children should be seat-
Center. on child restraint to take up any slack. ed in an appropriate infant or child re-
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and straint system properly secured by a
let seat belt retract completely. To deacti- lap/shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
vate the special seat belt retractor for the child restraint lower anchorage system
front passenger seat, the front passenger that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
seat must be in the most backward posi- Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and
tion. The seat belt can again be used in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
usual manner. 213 and 210.2.
82
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G Children can be killed or seriously injured by

an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
Never release the seat belt buckle while the According to accident statistics, children portant information when circumstances re-
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat are safer when properly restrained in the quire you to place a child in the front
belt retractor will be deactivated. rear seating positions than in the front seat- passenger seat:
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend 앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
that children be placed in the rear seats technology designed to turn off the front
A statement by the child restraint manu-
whenever possible. Regardless of seating passenger front air bag in your vehicle
facturer of compliance with this standard
position, children 12 years old and under when the OCS senses the weight of a
can be found on the instruction label on typical 12-month-old child or less along
the restraint and in the instruction manual must be seated and properly secured in an
with the weight of a standard appropri-
provided with the restraint. appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
ate child restraint on the front passen-
mended for the size and weight of the child.
When using any infant or child restraint ger seat.
The infant or child restraint must be properly 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
system, make sure to carefully read and
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat the front passenger seat will be serious-
follow all manufacturer’s instructions for
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
installation and use.
and top tether strap, fully in accordance senger front air bag inflates in a collision
Please read and observe warning labels af- with the child seat manufacturer’s instruc- which could occur under some circum-
fixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or tions. stances, even with the air bag technolo-
child restraints. gy installed in your vehicle. The only
means to completely eliminate this risk
is to never place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the back seat. 컄컄
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
앫 If you must install a rear-facing child re-
straint on the front passenger seat be-
앫 If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
Warning! G
cause circumstances require you to do front passenger seat, move the seat as
Infants and small children should never
so, make sure that the far back as possible, use the proper
59 indicator lamp is illumi- child restraint recommended for the share a seat belt with another occupant.
nated, indicating that the front passen- age, size and weight of the child, and se- During an accident, they could be crushed
ger front air bag is deactivated. Should cure child restraint with the vehicle’s between the occupant and seat belt.
the 59 indicator lamp not seat belt according to the child seat A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
illuminate or go out while the restraint is manufacturer’s instructions. For significantly increased if the child restraints
installed, please check installation. Peri- children larger than the typical
are not properly secured in the vehicle
odically check the 59 indi- 12-month-old child, the front passenger
and/or the child is not properly secured in
cator lamp while driving to make sure front air bag may or may not be activat-
the lamp is illuminated. If the ed (컄 page 85). the child restraint.
59 indicator lamp goes out Children too big for a toddler restraint must
or remains out, do not transport a child ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
on the front passenger seat until the tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
system has been repaired. A child in a der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
rear-facing child restraint on the front
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
passenger seat will be seriously injured
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates. height where a lap/shoulder belt fits proper-
ly without a booster.
84
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-

When the child restraint is not in use, re-
pear to increase or decrease due to
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
objects hanging on the seat, other passen-
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from automatically turns the front passenger
gers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac- front air bag on or off based on the classi-
underneath the seat or stuffed between
cident. fied occupant weight category determined
seat and middle console or between seat
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- by weight sensor readings from the front
and door or due to objects applying pres-
hicle, even if the children are secured in a passenger seat.
sure on the back of the seat. Always make
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
i sure the seat has clearance in all direc-
dren in a child restraint system may use tions at all times.
The system does not deactivate the
vehicle equipment and may cause an acci-
front passenger side impact air bag,
dent and/or serious personal injury. i
the window curtain air bag, and the
emergency tensioning device. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in
any way, take the vehicle to an autho-
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
nearly upright position with their back
Center.
against the seat backrest and feet on the
floor to be correctly classified. If the occu- Only seat accessories approved by
pant’s weight is transferred to another Mercedes-Benz may be used.
object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on
armrests), the OCS may not be able to Both, driver and the front passenger
properly approximate the occupant’s should always use the 59 in-
weight category. dicator lamp as an indication of whether or
not the front passenger is properly posi-
tioned.
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G When the OCS senses that the front passen-

ger seat occupant is classified as being up
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat occupant is classified as being
If the 59 indicator lamp illumi- to or less than the weight of a typical heavier than the weight of a typical
nates when an adult or someone larger than 12-month-old child in a standard child re- 12-month-old child seated in a standard
a small individual is in the front passenger straint, the 59 indicator lamp child restraint or as being a small individual
seat, have the front passenger reposition will illuminate when the engine is started (such as a young teenager or a small adult),
himself or herself in the seat until the and remain illuminated, indicating that the the 59 indicator lamp will illu-
59 indicator lamp goes out, or front passenger front air bag is deactivated. minate for approximately 6 seconds when
check whether objects are caught under or When the OCS senses that the front passen- the engine is started and then, depending on
around the seat. ger seat is classified as being empty, the occupant weight sensor readings from the
59 indicator lamp will illumi- seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the
More information about air bag display mes- 59 indicator lamp illuminated,
sages (컄 page 423). nate when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the front passen- the front passenger front air bag is deacti-
In the event of a collision, the air bag control ger front air bag is deactivated. vated. With the 59 indicator
unit will not allow front passenger front air lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is
bag deployment when the OCS classified activated.
the front passenger seat occupant as being When the OCS senses that the front passen-
up to or less than the weight of a typical ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
12-month-old child in a standard child re- someone larger than a small individual, the
straint or if the front passenger seat is 59 indicator lamp will illumi-
sensed as being empty. nate for approximately 6 seconds when the
engine is started and then go out, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is acti-
vated.
86
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
If the 59 indicator lamp is illu-

minated, the front passenger front air bag is
Warning! G Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
deactivated and will not be deployed. According to accident statistics, children portant information when circumstances re-
If the 59 indicator lamp is not are safer when properly restrained in the quire you to place a child in the front
illuminated, the front passenger front air rear seating positions than in the front seat- passenger seat:
bag is activated and will be deployed: ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend 앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
that children be placed in the rear seats technology designed to turn off the front
앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
whenever possible. Regardless of seating passenger front air bag in your vehicle
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment when the system senses the weight of a
position, children 12 years old and under
threshold typical 12-month-old child or less along
must be seated and properly secured in an
앫 independently of the side impact air with the weight of a standard appropri-
appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
bags. ate child restraint on the front passen-
ger seat.
If the front passenger front air bag is de-
The infant or child restraint must be properly 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
ployed, the rate of inflation will be influ-
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat the front passenger seat will be serious-
enced by
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
앫 the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration and top tether strap, fully in accordance senger front air bag inflates in a collision
as assessed by the air bag control unit with the child seat manufacturer’s instruc- which could occur under some circum-
앫 the front passenger’s weight category tions. stances, even with the air bag technolo-
as identified by the Occupant Classifica- gy. The only means to completely
tion System (OCS) eliminate this risk is to never place a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the back seat. 컄컄
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 The Occupant Classification System

앫 If you must install a rear-facing child 앫 If you have to place a child in a
restraint on the front passenger seat forward-facing child restraint on the (컄 page 85) may have determined:
because circumstances require you to front passenger seat, move the seat as 앫 that the seat was empty or occu-
do so, make sure that the far back as possible, use the proper
pied by the weight up to or less than
59 indicator lamp is illumi- child restraint recommended for the
that of a typical 12-month-old child
nated, indicating that the front passen- age, size and weight of the child, and se-
ger front air bag is deactivated. Should cure child restraint with the vehicle’s seated in a standard child restraint
the 59 indicator lamp not seat belt according to the child seat – both instances where the system
illuminate or go out while the restraint is manufacturer’s instructions. For suppresses deployment of the front
installed, please check installation. Peri- children larger than the typical passenger front air bag even
odically check the 59 indi- 12-month-old child, the front passenger though the impact met the criteria
cator lamp while driving to make sure air bag may or may not be activated and was of sufficient severity to de-
the 59 indicator lamp is il- (컄 page 85). ploy the driver front air bag
luminated. If the 59 indica-
tor lamp goes out or remains out, do not 앫 that the seat was occupied by a
transport a child on the front passenger
i small individual (such as a young
seat until the system has been repaired. Deployment of the driver front air bag teenager or a small adult) or a child
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on does not mean that the front passenger weighing more than the weight of a
the front passenger seat will be serious- front air bag also should have de- typical 12-month-old child in a stan-
ly injured or even killed if the front pas- ployed. dard child restraint – instances
senger front air bag inflates. where the system may suppress
deployment of the front passenger
front air bag even though the
impact met the criteria and was of
sufficient severity to deploy the
driver front air bag
88
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The 59 indicator lamp is lo-

cated in the center console. Warning! G 앫 Do not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.
If the 1 indicator lamp and the 앫 Do not stuff objects such as books be-
59 indicator lamp are lit at the tween the middle console and the front
same time, there is a malfunction in the passenger seat.
Occupant Classification System. The front 앫 Do not move the front passenger seat
passenger front air bag will be deactivated backwards against stiff objects.
in this case. Have the system checked as 앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
soon as possible by qualified technicians. position with your back against the seat
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light backrest.
Truck Center. 앫 Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-
1 59 indicator lamp In order to ensure proper operation of the self from the seat by using the handle
air bag system and OCS: over the door as this may cause the OCS
The 59 indicator lamp 1 will to be unable to correctly approximate
be illuminated, except with the SmartKey 앫 Do not place more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) the occupant weight category.
removed from the starter switch or with into the parcel net on the back of the
앫 Only have the seat repaired or replaced
the starter switch in position 0 front passenger seat. Otherwise, the
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
(컄 page 38). OCS may not be able to properly approx-
Truck Center.
imate the occupant weight category.
앫 Read and observe all warnings in this
앫 Do not place objects under and/or
chapter.
around the front passenger seat.
89
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test Occupant Classification Sys- Installation of infant and child restraint

tem Warning! G system
After turning the SmartKey in the starter If the 59 indicator lamp should This vehicle is equipped with tether an-
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the not illuminate, the system is not functioning. chorages for a top tether strap at each of
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz the rear seat backrests.
twice, the 59 indicator lamp Light Truck Center before seating any child 왘 Remove anchorage ring cover 1 from
(컄 page 89) located in the center console on the front passenger seat. seat backrest of the seat on which a
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly child seat is to be installed.
sitting on the front passenger seat and the
system senses the occupant as being an For more information, see the “Practical
adult, the 59 indicator lamp hints” section (컄 page 414).
will illuminate and go out after approxi-
mately 6 seconds. Warning! G
If the seat is not occupied and the system
Never place anything between seat cushion
senses the front passenger seat as being
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
empty, the 59 indicator lamp
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi-
will illuminate and not go out.
cation System. The bottom of the child seat
must make full contact with the passenger
1 Anchorage ring cover
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
seat could cause injuries to the child in case
of an accident, instead of increasing protec-
tion for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
90
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i 왘 Securely fasten hook 3, which is part

When installing a child seat and top of the tether strap, to anchorage
tether on a rear seat if a cargo compart- ring 2.
ment cover blind* or a partition net* is
in place behind that rear seat, make Warning! G
sure the top tether strap is positioned
between the seat backrest and the When installing a child seat on a third-row
cargo compartment cover blind* or seat, do not fasten hook 3 to the strap be-
partition net* in order for the child seat low anchorage ring 2. Otherwise, the child
to be properly secured. seat will not be securely fastened. A child’s
2 Anchorage rings risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly
3 Hook 왘 Make sure the tether strap is not twist- increased if the child seat is not properly se-
왘 Guide top tether strap between head ed. cured in the vehicle.
restraint and top of seat backrest.
Head restraint must be installed and i
positioned such that the top tether For safety, make sure the hook has at-
strap can pass freely between the head tached to the ring beyond the safety
restraint and top of seat backrest. catch, as illustrated. 컄컄
2 Anchorage ring
3 Hook
91
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Child seat anchors – LATCH type 왘 Remove anchorage ring covers 1 from
Warning! G This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
seat on which a child seat is to be in-
stalled.
Always lock backrest in its upright position (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
when rear seat bench is occupied by pas- type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
sengers, or the expanded cargo area is not the installation of a LATCH child seat with
in use. Check for secure locking by pushing matching mounting fittings.
and pulling on the backrest. The LATCH anchors on the second-row
seats are covered with an upholstery
Once the top tether anchorage hook is blend.
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Tighten the top tether strap
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions. 3 Anchorage ring covers, third-row seats
1 Anchors second-row seats

2 Indicates the position of the anchors
92
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation

Warning! G
With the override switch you can disable
Children too big for a toddler restraint must the rear side window switches in the rear
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi- door panels.
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
G
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
Warning!
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
Activate the override switch when children
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits prop-
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
4 Anchors third-row seats erly without a booster.
The children may otherwise injure them-
왘 Install a LATCH type child seat accord- Install child seat according to manufactu- selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
ing to the manufacturer’s instructions. rer’s instructions. dow opening.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
i right and left side anchors 1. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Non-LATCH type child seats may also from the starter switch, take it with you, and
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
be used and can be installed using the lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
loose during an accident which could result
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
in serious injury or death to the child.
seat according to the manufacturer’s unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
instructions. Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be re-
placed.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
93
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The override switch is located on the Disabling Enabling

driver’s door control panel.
왘 Press override switch 1 until it engag- 왘 Press override switch 1 once more.
es. The switch disengages from its re-
The switch engages in the recessed po- cessed position back to its original po-
sition. sition.
The rear door windows can no longer The rear door windows can again be
be operated using the switches located operated using the switches located in
in the rear doors. the rear doors.
i
Operating the rear door windows using
1 Override switch the switches located on the door con-
For more information on power windows, trol panel of the driver’s door is still
see “Power windows” (컄 page 248). possible.
94
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior (2) this device must accept any inter-
lamps will operate for approximately ference received, including interfer-
21/2 minutes. ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Canada only:
1 Â button This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
SmartKey i to the following two conditions:
1 Â button USA only: (1) This device may not cause
This device complies with Part 15 of interference, and
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
(1) This device may not cause harmful ence that may cause undesired
interference, and operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
95
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Activating
왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least

1 second.
Deactivating
왘 Press button 1 again.

or
왘 Insert SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch.
or
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 40).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
be in the vehicle.
96
Safety and Security
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on ABS
the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of Warning! G
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) accidents:
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
앫 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
앫 EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning) 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
앫 Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
앫 4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)
The ABS, BAS, ESP® and 4-ETS cannot re- effectiveness.
duce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the pre- The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
vailing road and weather conditions. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
i
In winter operation, the maximum ef- The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
fectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
ESP®, the EBP, and the 4-ETS is only of road surface conditions.
achieved with winter tires (컄 page 390) On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
or snow chains as required. spond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 24) comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
97
Safety and Security
Braking Emergency brake maneuver

At the instant one of the wheels is about to 왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the
Warning! G
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
the regulating mode.
Warning! G it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the yond that afforded by the condition of the
brake pedal while experiencing the pul- When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS, vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
sation. the ESP®, and the 4-ETS are also switched afforded. The ABS cannot prevent acci-
off. The basic driving and braking functions dents, including those resulting from exces-
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
are still available sive speed in turns, following another
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
namely braking power and ability to steer
may lock during hard braking, reducing safe, attentive, and skillful driver can pre-
the vehicle.
steering capability and extending the brak- vent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS
The pulsating brake pedal can be an equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
ing distance.
indication of hazardous road conditions a reckless or dangerous manner which
and functions as a reminder to take extra could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
care while driving. safety of others.
For more information, see the “Practical

Hints” section (컄 page 404).
98
Safety and Security
BAS ESP®
Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
emergency situations. If you apply the The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of operational as soon as the engine is run-
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can ning and monitors the vehicle’s traction
provides full brake boost, thereby poten- it increase braking efficiency beyond that (force of adhesive friction between the
tially reducing braking distance. Apply con- afforded by the condition of the vehicle tires and the road surface) and handling.
tinuous full braking pressure until the brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
emergency braking situation is over. The The BAS cannot prevent accidents, includ-
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking. ing those resulting from excessive speed in
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
When you release the brake pedal, the and by limiting engine output, the ESP®
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
brakes function again as normal. The BAS helps stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is es-
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
is then deactivated. pecially useful while driving off and on wet
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
or slippery road surfaces. The ESP® also
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
Warning! G ous manner which could jeopardize the
stabilizes the vehicle during braking ma-
neuvers.
user’s safety or the safety of others.
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys- The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
tem is still functioning, but without the addi- ment cluster (컄 page 24) flashes when the
tional brake boost available that BAS would ESP® is engaged.
normally provide in an emergency braking
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance
ment cluster comes on when you switch on
may increase.
the ignition. It goes out when the engine is
running.
99
Safety and Security
!
Warning! G Warning! G Because of the ESP’s® automatic oper-
ation, the engine and ignition must be
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the in- physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO*
strument cluster. In this case, proceed as it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1)
follows: cannot prevent accidents, including those
when
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
as possible. lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro- 앫 the parking brake is being tested on
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful a brake test dynamometer
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
driver can prevent accidents. The capabili- 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the
tor.
ties of an ESP® equipped vehicle must never front or rear axle raised
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
the prevailing road conditions. Active braking action through the ESP®
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
Failure to observe these guidelines could safety or the safety of others. may otherwise seriously damage the
cause the vehicle to skid. brake system.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result- i Operational tests with the engine
ing from excessive speed. running can only be conducted on a
The ESP® will only function properly if
two-axle dynamometer.
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size (컄 page 514).
hints” section (컄 page 409).
100
Safety and Security
Switching off the ESP® When you switch off the ESP® The ESP® switch is located on the upper
part of the center console.
앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
Warning! G 앫 the engine output is not limited, which
® allows the drive wheels to spin and
The ESP should not be switched off during
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
normal driving other than in the circum-
stances described below. Disabling of the 앫 the 4-ETS will still brake a spinning
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan- wheel
dard driving maneuvers. 앫 the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP® in driving situations where it i
1 ESP® switch
would be advantageous to have the drive When the ESP® is switched off and one
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for or more drive wheels are spinning, the 왘 Press ESP® switch 1 until the
better grip such as: ESP® warning lamp v in the instru- ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
ment cluster flashes. However, the ment cluster comes on.
앫 starting out on slippery surfaces and in
ESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is deactivated.
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
앫 in sand or gravel
!
Turn the ESP® on immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
101
Safety and Security
Switching on the ESP® 4-ETS

Warning! G 왘 Press ESP® switch 1.
The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
When the ESP® warning lamp v is The ESP® warning lamp v in the in- improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is strument cluster goes out. available traction, especially under slip-
switched off. pery road conditions. The brakes are ap-
You are now again in normal driving
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- mode with the ESP® switched on. plied to the spinning wheel and power is
ing road conditions and to the non-operating transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.
status of the ESP®. The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
hints” section (컄 page 404).
ment cluster starts to flash at any vehicle
! EBP speed, as soon as a tire loses traction and
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an the wheel begins to spin.
extended period of time with the ESP® The EBP enhances braking effectiveness
switched off. This may cause serious by allowing the rear brakes to supply a
damage to the drivetrain which is not greater proportion of the braking effort
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited without a loss of vehicle stability.
Warranty.
102
Safety and Security
! i
Warning! G Because of the ESP’s® automatic oper- If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v
ation, the engine must be shut off comes on while driving, the 4-ETS is be-
When you see the ESP® warning lamp v
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 ing switched off temporarily to prevent
flashing in the instrument cluster, then pro-
or 1) when the parking brake is being overheating of the drive wheel brakes.
ceed as follows:
tested on a brake test dynamometer. In addition, the message ESP unavail-
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle able See Operator’s Manual appears
as possible. Active braking action through ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the in the multifunction display.
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
brake system.
tor. For more information, see the “Practical
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to Operational tests with the engine hints” section (컄 page 404) and
the prevailing road conditions. running can only be conducted on a (컄 page 416).
two-axle dynamometer.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resul-
ting from excessive speed.
103
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Deactivating Anti-theft alarm system
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized With the SmartKey Once the alarm system has been armed, a
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
someone opens
to position 2 (컄 page 38).
Activating
앫 a door
With KEYLESS-GO* 앫 the tailgate
With the SmartKey
앫 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). 앫 the hood
switch. i The alarm will stay on, even if the activat-
Starting the engine will also deactivate ing element (a door, for example) is imme-
With KEYLESS-GO* diately closed.
the immobilizer.
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop The alarm system will also be triggered
In case the engine cannot be started
button (컄 page 40) once. when
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
The engine is turned off. the system is not operational. Contact 앫 the vehicle is raised, see “Tow-away
왘 Open the driver’s door. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light alarm” (컄 page 106)
Truck Center or call
앫 the vehicle is opened with the mechan-
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ical key, see “Unlocking the vehicle”
(컄 page 459)
앫 a door is opened from the inside, see
“Opening the doors from the inside”
(컄 page 121)
104
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
i 왘 Make sure all doors and the tailgate are

If the alarm stays on for more than closed.
30 seconds, a call to the Response 왘 Lock the vehicle (컄 page 67).
Center is initiated automatically by the
The turn signal lamps flash three times
Tele Aid* system (컄 page 311) provid-
to indicate that the vehicle is locked.
ed Tele Aid* service was subscribed to
and properly activated, and that neces- The alarm system is armed within ap-
sary cellular service and GPS coverage proximately 10 seconds. Alarm system
are available. indicator lamp 1 flashes.
1 Alarm system indicator lamp i

Arming the alarm system
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
The alarm system is armed after you have three times, one of the following ele-
locked the vehicle with the SmartKey or ments may not be properly closed:
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
앫 a door
The alarm system indicator lamp is located
앫 the tailgate
to the lower left of the hazard warning
flasher. Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
105
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming the alarm system Canceling the alarm Tow-away alarm

왘 Unlock the vehicle (컄 page 36). To cancel the alarm:
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
The turn signal lamps flash once to and audible alarm will be triggered when
With the SmartKey
indicate that the vehicle is disarmed. someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
i switch. i
The alarm system will rearm automati- The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
or
cally again after approximately gered, for example, if the vehicle is
40 seconds if neither a door nor the 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the lifted on one side.
tailgate is opened. SmartKey.
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
With KEYLESS-GO*
Center is initiated automatically by the
왘 Grasp an outside door handle. Tele Aid* system (컄 page 311) provid-
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must ed Tele Aid* service was subscribed to
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. and properly activated, and that neces-
sary cellular service and GPS coverage
or are available.
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄 page 40).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
106
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the tow-away alarm Switching off the tow-away alarm 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘 Make sure all doors and the tailgate are i With the tow-away alarm set to default
closed. enabled (on) in the control system, the
The tow-away alarm feature can be set
following message appears in the mul-
왘 Lock your vehicle. to default enabled (on) or disabled (off)
tifunction display.
The tow-away alarm is automatically using the control system (컄 page 191).
armed after about 10 seconds.
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
Disarming the tow-away alarm feature, switch off the tow-away alarm be-
fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on
왘 Unlock your vehicle. a surface subject to movement, such as a
i ferry or auto train.
왘 If you now wish to deactivate the
When you unlock your vehicle, the If the tow-away alarm is set to default en- tow-away alarm on a one-time basis,
tow-away protection disarms automati- abled (on) in the control system and you press button + or - on the mul-
cally. wish to retain the default setting, you can tifunction steering wheel.
switch off the tow-away alarm temporarily
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed The tow-away alarm is switched off.
on a one-time basis as follows:
until you lock your vehicle again. The following message appears in the
multifunction display.
컄컄
107
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
컄컄 왘 Exit and lock the vehicle (컄 page 67). Canceling tow-away alarm With KEYLESS-GO*
The alarm system is armed indepen- To cancel the alarm after it has been 왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
dently of whether the tow-alarm is triggered:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
switched on or off.
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
With the SmartKey
i or
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
The tow-away alarm is switched off on 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
switch.
a one-time basis only. It will be armed button (컄 page 40).
automatically the next time you lock or
the vehicle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the be inside the vehicle.
If you have disabled the tow-away SmartKey.
alarm feature in the control system
(컄 page 191), you can switch on the
tow-away alarm on a one-time basis as
described above.
108
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Climate control
3-zone automatic climate control*
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
109
Controls in detail
In the “Controls in detail” section you will For more information on locking and un-
find detailed information on how to oper- locking, see the “Getting started” section
ate the equipment installed in your vehicle. (컄 page 36) and (컄 page 67).
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will SmartKey
be of particular interest to you.
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
a removable mechanical key.
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are The locking tabs for the mechanical key
SmartKey with remote control
given at the beginning of each segment. portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ-
ent color to help distinguish each 1 ‹ Lock button
SmartKey unit. 2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate
3 Locking tab for mechanical key
The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
4 Œ Unlock button
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
5 Battery check lamp
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
앫 the doors
앫 the tailgate
앫 the fuel filler flap
110
Controls in detail
i i
Warning! G USA only: Canada only:
This device complies with Part 15 of This device complies with RSS-210 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to Industry Canada. Operation is subject
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
the following two conditions: to the following two conditions:
with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with (1) This device may not cause harmful (1) This device may not cause
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible interference, and interference, and
for children to open a locked door from the
(2) this device must accept any inter- (2) this device must accept any inter-
inside, which could result in an accident
ference received, including interfer- ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired ence that may cause undesired
operation. operation of the device.
! Any unauthorized modification to this Any unauthorized modification to this
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid device could void the user’s authority device could void the user’s authority
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of to operate the equipment. to operate the equipment.
electromagnetic radiation.
i
You can also open and close the power
windows (컄 page 248) and tilt/sliding
sunroof* (컄 page 255), or the
tilt/sliding panel* (컄 page 259) using
the SmartKey.
111
Controls in detail
Factory setting Global locking Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘 Press button ‹.
Global unlocking
왘 Press button Œ once.
왘 Press button Œ. the turn signal lamps flash three times. All turn signal lamps flash once. The
All turn signal lamps flash once. The The locking knobs on the doors move locking knob in the driver’s door moves
locking knobs in the doors move up. down. The anti-theft alarm system is up. The anti-theft alarm system is
The anti-theft alarm system is armed. disarmed.
disarmed.
Selective setting Global unlocking
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Press button Œ twice.
within approximately 40 seconds of un- to reprogram the SmartKey so that
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking if pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
locking knobs in the doors move up.
door and the fuel filler flap.
앫 neither door nor tailgate is opened The anti-theft alarm system is
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ disarmed.
앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
starter switch
until battery check lamp 5
앫 the central locking switch is not (컄 page 110) flashes twice.
activated
The SmartKey will then function as fol-
lows:
112
Controls in detail
Global locking ! Checking the batteries

왘 Press button ‹. If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle 왘 Press button ‹ or Œ.
with the SmartKey, then either the bat-
With the tailgate and all doors closed, Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 110)
teries in the SmartKey are discharged,
the turn signal lamps flash three times. comes on briefly to indicate that the
the SmartKey is malfunctioning, or the
The locking knobs on the doors move SmartKey batteries are in order.
vehicle battery is drained.
armed. 앫 Check the batteries in the i
SmartKey and replace them if If battery check lamp 5 does not
Restoring to factory setting necessary (컄 page 463). come on briefly during check, the
앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock SmartKey batteries are discharged.
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds the driver’s door (컄 page 459). Replace the batteries (컄 page 463).
until battery check lamp 5 앫 Lock the vehicle as described in the You can obtain the required batteries
(컄 page 110) flashes twice. “Practical hints” section at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
(컄 page 460). Truck Center.
앫 Have the vehicle battery and the
vehicle battery connections i
checked (컄 page 487). If the batteries are checked within
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, con- signal range of the vehicle, pressing the
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz button ‹ or Œ will lock or un-
Light Truck Center. lock the vehicle accordingly.
113
Controls in detail
Unlocking and opening the tailgate i SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

You can unlock and open the tailgate sep- If the vehicle was previously centrally
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
arately. locked with the SmartKey, the tailgate
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
will lock automatically when closed.
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft each with remote control and a removable
The turn signals will flash three times to
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. mechanical key.
confirm locking.
왘 Press and hold button Š on the The locking tabs for the mechanical key
SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys with
begins to open. KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key, distinguish each SmartKey with
! you should do the following: KEYLESS-GO unit.
The tailgate swings open upwards auto- 왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
matically. Always make sure there is The function of the SmartKey overrules the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck KEYLESS-GO function.
sufficient overhead clearance. Center.
Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
system*: into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
mechanical key immediately to your validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
To stop the opening procedure, press car insurance company.
button Š on the SmartKey. The tail- is checked when you grasp an outside door
왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock handle.
gate stops moving.
replaced. If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light your vehicle unlocks
Truck Center will be glad to supply you 앫 the doors
with a replacement.
앫 the tailgate
앫 the fuel filler flap
114
Controls in detail
i
Warning! G USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
the following two conditions:
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an (1) This device may not cause harmful
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ence that may cause undesired
1 ‹ Lock button ! operation.
2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate To prevent possible malfunction, avoid Any unauthorized modification to this
3 Mechanical key locking tab exposing the SmartKey with device could void the user’s authority
4 Œ Unlock button KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electro- to operate the equipment.
5 Battery check lamp magnetic radiation.
115
Controls in detail
i Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO* 앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the

Canada only: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
앫 You can also use the SmartKey with
This device complies with RSS-210 of located outside the vehicle within ap-
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
Industry Canada. Operation is subject proximately 3 ft (1 m) of the respective
(컄 page 110).
to the following two conditions: door or the tailgate.
앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
(1) This device may not cause 앫 In order to start the engine with the
tions with normal SmartKey functions
interference, and (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
locking with the ‹ button). 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer- must be located in the vehicle.
앫 Always carry the SmartKey with
ence that may cause undesired KEYLESS-GO with you. 앫 All doors must be closed.
operation of the device.
앫 Never store the SmartKey with 앫 The brake pedal must be firmly de-
Any unauthorized modification to this KEYLESS-GO together with pressed. Do not depress the accel-
device could void the user’s authority erator.
앫 electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
i
앫 metallic objects such as coins or
You can also open and close the power metal foil
windows (컄 page 248) and tilt/sliding
sunroof* (컄 page 255), or the Doing so could impair the function of
tilt/sliding panel* (컄 page 259) using the KEYLESS-GO system.
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
116
Controls in detail
앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re- Possibility 2: (One SmartKey with
positioned farther away from the vehi- moved from the vehicle with the engine KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no
cle, the system may no longer recog- running (e.g. if a passenger exits the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. vehicle with the SmartKey with the vehicle):
The vehicle then cannot be locked or KEYLESS-GO), the message Key not When exiting and trying to lock the ve-
the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO detected will appear in the multifunc- hicle, the message Key detected in
system. tion display while driving off. vehicle will appear in the multifunc-
tion display. The vehicle will not be
앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re- Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
locked.
moved from the vehicle while starter change its present location immediate-
switch position 1 (e.g. if a passenger ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger
exits the vehicle with the SmartKey seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
with KEYLESS-GO), the message Key
앫 Remember that the engine can be
not detected will appear in the multi-
started by anyone with a SmartKey
function display while driving off. with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or vehicle.
change its present location immediate- Possibility 1: (One SmartKey with
ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one
seat or insert it in shirt pocket). SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle):
If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, no message
appears in the multifunction display.
117
Controls in detail
Factory setting i Selective setting

The vehicle could be inadvertently If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
Global unlocking unlocked if the SmartKey with to reprogram the SmartKey with
왘 Grasp an outside door handle. KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driv-
vehicle and er’s door handle only the driver’s door and
앫 an outside door handle is splashed the fuel filler flap unlocks.
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is dis- with water 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
armed. or simultaneously for about 6 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
i 앫 you attempt to clean the outside (컄 page 115) flashes twice.
If the vehicle has been parked for more door handle
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
than 72 hours, you must pull an outside
then function as follows:
door handle in order to activate the Global locking
KEYLESS-GO function.
왘 Press the lock button at an outside Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
door handle (컄 page 68) or the tailgate flap
The vehicle will lock again automatically (컄 page 120).
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system 왘 Grasp the driver’s outside door handle.
within approximately 40 seconds of With the tailgate and all doors closed,
unlocking if the turn signal lamps flash three times.
locking knob in the driver’s door moves
앫 neither door nor tailgate is opened up. The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
앫 the central locking switch is not armed.
activated
118
Controls in detail
Global unlocking ! Checking the battery

왘 Grasp any outside door handle other If you can no longer lock or unlock the 왘 Press button ‹ or Œ.
than the driver’s outside door handle. vehicle with the SmartKey with
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 115)
KEYLESS-GO, then the battery in the
All turn signal lamps flash once. The comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey is discharged, the SmartKey
locking knobs in the doors move up. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO battery is
with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or
The anti-theft alarm system is dis- in order.
the vehicle battery is drained.
armed.
앫 Check the battery in the SmartKey i
Global locking with KEYLESS-GO (컄 page 119) If battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 115)
and replace it if necessary does not come on briefly during check,
왘 Press the lock button on an outside
(컄 page 463). the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO bat-
door handle (컄 page 68) or the tailgate
앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock tery is discharged.
(컄 page 120).
the driver’ door (컄 page 459). Replace the battery (컄 page 463).
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move 앫 Lock the vehicle as described in the You can obtain the required battery at
down. The anti-theft alarm system is “Practical hints” section any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
armed. (컄 page 460). Truck Center.
앫 Have the vehicle battery and the
Restoring to factory setting vehicle battery connections i
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ checked (컄 page 487). If the battery is checked within signal
simultaneously for about 6 seconds If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is range of the vehicle, pressing the
until battery check lamp 5 malfunctioning, contact an authorized button ‹ or Œ will lock or un-
(컄 page 115) flashes twice. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. lock the vehicle accordingly.
119
Controls in detail
Unlocking and opening the tailgate ! Locking the vehicle

You can unlock and open the tailgate sep- The tailgate swings open upwards auto-
arately. matically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
system*:
The handle is located above the rear
To stop the opening procedure, press
license plate recess.
button Š on the SmartKey. The tail-
gate stops moving.
i 1 Lock button at tailgate

If the vehicle was previously centrally 왘 Press lock button on tailgate 1.
locked with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO, the tailgate will lock au- or
tomatically when closed (컄 page 124). 왘 Press the lock button on an outside
The turn signals will flash three times to door handle (컄 page 68).
confirm locking.
or
왘 Pull on the handle.
왘 Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
or
system*: Press the KEYLESS-GO
왘 Press and hold button Š on the locking/closing switch in the tailgate
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO until the (컄 page 129).
tailgate unlocks and opens.
The vehicle locks. The turn signals flash
three times to confirm locking.
120
Controls in detail
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Opening the doors from the inside Front doors
If you lose your SmartKey with 왘 Pull on inside door handle 2 on the
You can open a locked door from the in-
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you respective front door to open door.
side. Open door only when conditions are
should do the following:
safe to do so. If the door was locked, locking knob 1
왘 Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will move up.
deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Rear doors
왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey with 왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the respec-
KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key im- tive rear door to unlock door.
mediately to your car insurance com-
왘 Pull on inside door handle 2 on the re-
pany.
spective rear door to open door.
왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light 1 Locking knob
Truck Center will be glad to supply you 2 Inside door handle
with a replacement.
121
Controls in detail
i Opening the tailgate !

If the vehicle has previously been Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
locked from the outside with the Opening the tailgate from the outside system*:
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a To stop the opening procedure, press
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft button Š on the SmartKey. The tail-
door from the inside will trigger the
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. gate stops moving.
anti-theft alarm system.
The handle is located above the rear The tailgate swings open upwards auto-
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
license plate recess. matically. Always make sure there is
following:
sufficient overhead clearance.
With the SmartKey
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
i
switch.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
앫 Press the Œ or ‹ button on locked, the tailgate will lock automati-
the SmartKey. cally after closing it (컄 page 124). The
With KEYLESS-GO* turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
앫 Grasp an outside door handle.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The tailgate can also be opened using the
button (컄 page 40). The vehicle must be unlocked (컄 page 37). SmartKey (컄 page 114).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 왘 Pull on the handle.
must be inside the vehicle.
The tailgate opens slightly.
왘 Pull tailgate upwards to open.
122
Controls in detail
Opening the tailgate from the inside 왘 Lift handle 1 in direction of arrow 3.
manually
The tailgate is released and can be
You can unlock the tailgate from the opened manually.
third-row seats and then open it manually.
i
The handle is located on the right of the
Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
tailgate’s window trim.
system*:
If you do not open the tailgate within a
few seconds, the tailgate lock will auto-
matically engage again.
1 Remote tailgate switch with indicator
lamp
Opening the tailgate from the inside
electrically* 왘 Pull remote tailgate switch 1 until
tailgate begins to open.
You can open the tailgate from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary. The tailgate opens. The indicator lamp
in the remote tailgate switch comes on
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft
1 Handle and remains lit until the tailgate is
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
2 Push closed. While the tailgate is opening, an
3 Lift The switch is located on the door control acoustic signal sounds. 컄컄
panel.
왘 Push handle 1 in direction of arrow 2
and hold it there.
123
Controls in detail
컄컄 i Closing the tailgate

Warning! G The tailgate can also be opened using
the Š button on the SmartKey or Closing the tailgate from the inside
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* electrically*
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
(컄 page 114).
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
with the Š button on the SmartKey or system* you can close the tailgate from
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. Monitor the Limiting opening height of tailgate* the inside using the remote tailgate switch.
opening procedure carefully to make sure Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing 왘 Press remote tailgate switch 1
no one is in danger of being injured. system*: (컄 page 123) until tailgate begins to
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or The tailgate opening height can be limited close.
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate when transporting goods on a roof rack*
switch or press the Š button on the
The tailgate closes. The indicator lamp
(e.g. presence of an MB sport luggage con- in the remote tailgate switch goes out.
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. tainer*). When activated, the tailgate While the tailgate is closing an acoustic
opens to approximately 6.4 ft (1.95 m). signal sounds.
! 왘 Activate the limiting opening height of To interrupt the closing procedure:
The tailgate swings open upwards auto- tailgate using the control system
matically. Always make sure there is (컄 page 189). 왘 Press or pull remote tailgate switch 1
sufficient overhead clearance. To stop (컄 page 123).
the opening procedure, press or pull
remote tailgate switch 1. The tailgate
stops moving.
124
Controls in detail
Closing the tailgate from the outside

Warning! G Warning! G manually
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with among other dangers such as blocked
the door mounted switch. Monitor the visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the
closing procedure carefully to make sure no vehicle interior.
one is in danger of being injured.
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or If the tailgate comes into contact with an
pull the door mounted remote tailgate object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
switch. been piled too high) the closing procedure
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey is stopped and the tailgate reopens.
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the 1 Handle
starter switch or the SmartKey with 왘 Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, handle 1.
the remote tailgate switch can be operated.
왘 Close tailgate with hands placed flat on
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
it. 컄컄
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
125
Controls in detail
컄컄 i Closing the tailgate from the outside

Warning! G To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do (vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)
not place the SmartKey in the cargo In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
To prevent possible personal injury, always
compartment. system* you can close the tailgate sepa-
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
compartment opening when closing the tail- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: rately from the outside using the tailgate
gate. Be especially careful when small chil- To prevent a possible inadvertent lock- closing switch or the Š button on the
dren are around. out, the tailgate will open automatically SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* recognized inside the vehicle.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- i
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an If the vehicle was previously centrally
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- locked with the SmartKey or
cle equipment may cause an accident KEYLESS-GO, the tailgate will lock
and/or serious personal injury. automatically after closing it. The turn
signals flash three times to confirm
locking. 1 Tailgate closing switch
Warning! G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as blocked
visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the
vehicle interior.
126
Controls in detail
왘 Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly.

The tailgate closes.
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
i
make sure no one is in danger of being in- among other dangers such as blocked
You can also close the tailgate manual-
jured. To prevent possible personal injury, visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehi-
ly (컄 page 125).
always keep hands and fingers away from cle interior.
the cargo compartment opening when clos-
If the tailgate comes into contact with an ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has i
small children are around. To stop the clos-
been piled too high), the closing procedure ing procedure, do one of the following: Do not place the SmartKey in the open
is stopped and the tailgate reopens cargo compartment. You may lock
앫 Press the tailgate closing switch 1. yourself out.
slightly.
앫 Press the Š button on the SmartKey.
앫 Press or pull the remote tailgate switch i
(on the driver’s door).
Even with the SmartKey removed from the locked, the tailgate will lock automati-
starter switch, the tailgate closing switch cally after closing it. The turn signals
can be operated. Therefore, do not leave will flash three times to confirm lock-
children unattended in the vehicle, or with ing.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
127
Controls in detail
Closing the tailgate from the outside i

(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) You can also close the tailgate manual-
Warning! G
In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing ly (컄 page 125).
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
system* you can close the tailgate sepa- make sure no one is in danger of being in-
rately from the outside using the tailgate If the tailgate comes into contact with an jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
closing switch or the Š button on the object while closing (e.g. luggage that has always keep hands and fingers away from
SmartKey. been piled too high), the closing procedure the cargo compartment opening when clos-
is stopped and the tailgate reopens slight- ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when
ly. small children are around. To stop the clos-
ing procedure, do one of the following:
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock- 앫 Press the tailgate closing switch 1.
out, the tailgate will open automatically 앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is switch.
recognized inside the vehicle. 앫 Press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO.
앫 Press or pull the remote tailgate switch
1 Tailgate closing switch (on the driver’s door).
왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you.
왘 Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly.
The tailgate closes.
128
Controls in detail
Closing the tailgate and locking the 왘 Press switch 1 briefly.

Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
removed from the vehicle, the tailgate The vehicle is locked and the tailgate
KEYLESS-GO*)
closing switch can be operated. Therefore, closes automatically. The turn signals
do not leave children unattended in the ve- In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing flash three times to confirm locking.
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. system* and KEYLESS-GO*, you can close The locking knobs in the doors move
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may the tailgate and lock the vehicle simulta- down. The anti-theft alarm system is
cause an accident and/or serious personal neously from the outside using the armed.
injury. KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch or
the Š button on the SmartKey. i
You can also close the tailgate manual-
Warning! G ly (컄 page 125).
Only drive with the tailgate closed as, If the tailgate comes into contact with an
among other dangers such as blocked object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehi- been piled too high), the closing procedure
cle interior. is stopped and the tailgate reopens
slightly.
i i
1 KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
locked, the tailgate will lock automati-
out, the tailgate will open automatically
cally after closing it. The turn signals 왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with
if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
will flash three times to confirm lock- KEYLESS-GO* with you.
recognized inside the vehicle.
ing.
129
Controls in detail
You can open a locked door from the in-

Warning! G Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the tailgate
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to closing switch can be operated. Therefore,
make sure no one is in danger of being in- do not leave children unattended in the ve- i
jured. To prevent possible personal injury, hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
The doors unlock automatically after an
always keep hands and fingers away from Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
accident if the force of the impact ex-
the cargo compartment opening when clos- cause an accident and/or serious personal
ceeds a preset threshold.
ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when injury.
The vehicle automatically locks when
small children are around. To stop the clos-
the ignition is switched on and the
ing procedure, do one of the following:
Warning! G wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
앫 Press the tailgate closing switch 1. approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing Only drive with the tailgate closed as, more. You could therefore lock yourself
switch*. among other dangers such as blocked out when the vehicle
앫 Press the Š button on the SmartKey visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehi-
앫 is pushed or towed
with KEYLESS-GO*. cle interior.
앫 is on a test stand
앫 Press or pull the remote tailgate switch
(on the driver’s door). Automatic central locking 앫 during a wheel change
The doors and the tailgate lock automati- For information on towing the vehicle, see
cally when the ignition is switched on and “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 499).
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system
(컄 page 188).
130
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking from the inside The switches are located in the front-door i
control panels. You can open a locked door from the
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
inside. Open door only when conditions
tailgate from inside using the central lock-
are safe to do so.
ing or unlocking switch. This can be useful,
for example, if you want to lock the vehicle If the vehicle was previously centrally
before starting to drive. locked with the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*, it will
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
not unlock using the central unlocking
locked with the central locking or unlock-
switch 1.
ing switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch 2:
Warning! G 1 Central unlocking switch
앫 While in the selective remote con-
2 Central locking switch
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the trol mode, only the front door
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* opened from the inside is unlocked.
Locking
from the starter switch, take it with you, and 앫 While in the global remote control
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- 왘 Press central locking switch 2.
mode, the vehicle is unlocked com-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an If all doors and the tailgate are closed, pletely when a front door is opened
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- the vehicle locks. from the inside.
and/or serious personal injury. Unlocking i
왘 Press central unlocking switch 1. With the passenger-side door opened,
The vehicle unlocks. you cannot lock the vehicle with the
central locking switch.
131
Controls in detail
Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see !

the “Getting started” section (컄 page 43). Warning! G Do not activate the easy-entry/exit fea-
For more information on seats, see “Load- ture if the seat backrest is in an exces-
You must make sure no one can become
ing” (컄 page 279). sively reclined position. Doing so could
trapped or injured by the moving steering
cause damage to the driver’s seat or
wheel and driver’s seat when the
Easy-entry/exit feature* left rear seat.
easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement,
Move the seat backrest to an upright
Easy-entry/exit feature for driver’s do one of the following:
position first.
seat
앫 Press seat adjustment switch
When exiting the vehicle, with the
This feature allows for easier entry into and (컄 page 43).
easy-entry/exit feature activated and
exit from the vehicle. 앫 Move steering column stalk* depending on your selection, the steering
The easy-entry/exit feature can be (컄 page 46). wheel tilts upwards and/or the driver’s
activated or deactivated in the 앫 Press memory button M* (컄 page 145). seat moves a few inches to the rear when
Convenience submenu of the control sys- Do not leave children unattended in the ve- you
tem (컄 page 189). hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
Children could open the driver’s door and switch
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident or
and/or serious personal injury. 앫 open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position
0 or 1 (컄 page 38) or the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in
position 1 (컄 page 40)
132
Controls in detail
Seats
i When entering the vehicle, with the i

If the current position for the steering easy-entry/exit feature activated, the For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, steering wheel or, depending on your se- not return to its last set position with
the steering wheel will no longer be lection, the steering wheel and driver’s the easy-entry/exit feature activated if
able to move upward when the seat will return to their last set memory po- the system recognizes the last set posi-
easy-entry/exit feature is activated. sition or a factory-set maximum forward tion as an extreme forward position. In-
position when you stead, the driver’s seat will remain at or
If the current seat position falls into a
factory-set position range and the sys- 앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition move to a factory-set maximum for-
switched on ward position. To again fully return the
tem recognizes the current seat posi-
tion to be rearward enough for easy driver’s seat to your last set position or
앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter
to memory position, adjust the seat to
entry and exit, the driver’s seat will not switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
the desired position or press and hold
move to the rear when the start/stop button (컄 page 40) once
easy-entry/exit feature is activated. the respective memory position button
with the driver’s door closed
(컄 page 145).
i
Vehicles with memory function*:
The steering wheel and seat position is
stored into memory when you
앫 switch off the ignition (컄 page 38)
앫 allocate the current position steer-
ing wheel and seat position to a cer-
tain memory position button
(컄 page 145)
133
Controls in detail
Seats
Easy-entry/exit feature for third-row Easy-entry feature for third-row seats 왘 Push the seat forward as far as it will
seats go.
The releases for the easy-entry feature are
This feature allows for easier access to and located on the entry side and the back of You should now have sufficient space
exit from the vehicle’s third-row seats. each second-row seat. to access the vehicle’s third-row seat.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, the sec-
ond-row seat backrests must be properly
locked either in the upright position or,
when using the expanded cargo compart-
ment, in the fully folded position while the
vehicle is in motion.
1 Easy-entry lever Easy-entry/exit position

왘 Pull and hold easy-entry lever 1 in di- For information on how to fold down the
rection of arrow at resistance point. second-row seats completely, see “Folding
second-row seats” (컄 page 285).
The seat backrest folds down.
134
Controls in detail
Seats
Easy-exit feature for third-row seats Returning seats to their original position The second-row seats have red markings
on the seat base that indicate when a
The easy-exit strap is located on the rear of
the second-row seat base. Warning G second-row seat is not properly locked.
Make sure all seats are properly locked in

position before driving off. Do not drive with
seats not properly locked.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
not properly locked as this can be danger-
ous. The seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. You could slide un-
der the seat belt during braking, vehicle ma-
neuvers, or in an accident. If you slide under 왘 When the red marking on the seat base
1 Easy-exit strap it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen is visible, push seat backrest back until
왘 To exit the vehicle when seated on a or neck. That could cause serious or even fa- the seat audibly engages.
third-row seat, pull up and hold tal injuries.
With the seat properly locked in posi-
easy-exit strap 1. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the
tion, you will not see the red marking
The second-row seat backrest folds best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly
on the seat base.
down. upright position and the belt is properly po-
sitioned on the body.
왘 Push second-row seat forward a far as
it will go.
For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see “Folding
second-row seats” (컄 page 285).
135
Controls in detail
Seats
Lumbar support Multicontour seat* 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
The curvature of the driver’s seat can be The multicontour seat has an extendable Seat cushion depth
adjusted to help enhance lower back sup- seat cushion and inflatable air chambers
왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
port and seating comfort. built into the backrest to provide additional
length of your upper leg with
lumbar and side support.
The lever for lumbar support adjustment is switch 1.
located on the right hand side of the The seat cushion depth, seat backrest
driver’s seat backrest. cushion-height and curvature can be con- Backrest contour
tinuously varied with switches on the in-
왘 Adjust the contour of the seat backrest
side of each front seat base after the
to the desired position with switch
ignition is switched on (컄 page 38).
æ or ç.
왘 Move the seat backrest support to the
bottom with button 4 or to the center
with button 3.
Backrest side bolsters

왘 Adjust the side bolsters so that they
1 Adjustment lever provide good lateral support with
왘 Move adjustment lever 1 in direction switch 2.
of arrows until you have reached a
comfortable seating position. 1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest side bolsters
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest bottom
136
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seats Rear seat adjustment Fore and aft adjustment

(second-row seats only)
Warning! G Warning! G The handles for adjusting the seats are

located on the front of each seat base.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
According to accident statistics, children
backrest in an excessively reclined position
are safer when properly restrained in the
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
that children be placed in the rear seats. Re-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
gardless of seating position, children 12
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
years old and under must be seated and
belts provide the best restraint when the
properly secured in an appropriate infant or
wearer is in a nearly upright position and
toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
belts are properly positioned on the body.
For additional information, see “Children in Your seat must be adjusted so that you can 1 Adjustment handle
the vehicle” (컄 page 82). correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 50). 왘 Pull up handle 1 in direction of arrow
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is Never place hands under the seat or near and hold it there.
significantly increased if the child restraints any moving parts while a seat is being ad- 왘 Move seat to the desired position.
are not properly secured in the vehicle and justed.
왘 Release handle 1.
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. The seat must audibly engage.
137
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat backrest tilt (second-row seats) 왘 To move seat backrest back, lean light- Seat backrest tilt (third-row seats)
ly against backrest.
The handles for adjusting the seats are The handles for adjusting the seats are
located on the rear of each seat base. 왘 To move seat backrest forward, lean located on the outer side of each seat
forward with handle 1 pulled and held backrest.
at resistance point.
The seat backrest will move forward
against your back.
왘 Release handle 1 when the seat back-
rest has reached the desired position.
To make sure the seat backrest has en-
gaged, lean firmly against the backrest.
1 Adjustment handle
1 Adjustment handle
왘 While seated, pull handle 1 in direc-
tion of arrow to resistance point and 왘 While seated, pull handle 1 in direc-
hold it there. tion of arrow and hold it there.
138
Controls in detail
Seats
왘 To move seat backrest back, lean Head restraint height Raising:

lightly against backrest.
왘 Manually adjust the height of head
왘 To move seat backrest forward, lean Warning! G restraint 1 by pulling it upward to the
forward with handle 1 pulled. desired position.
For your protection, drive only with properly
The seat backrest will move forward Lowering:
against your back.
왘 To lower head restraint 1, push
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
왘 Release handle 1 when the seat back- release button 2 and press down on
the head restraint supports the back of the
rest has reached the desired position. head restraint 1.
To make sure the seat backrest has en- tial for injury to the head and neck in the i
gaged, lean firmly against the backrest. event of an accident or similar situation.
The third-row seat head restraints are
adjusted in the same manner.
i
The tilt of the second-row head re-
straints is adjusted in the same manner
as the front-seat head restraints, see
“Head restraint tilt” (컄 page 45).
The tilt of the third-row head restraints
cannot be adjusted.
Second-row seat head restraint

1 Head restraint
2 Release button
139
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraints Removing head restraints
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
tial for injury to the head and neck in the 1 Head restraint
event of an accident or similar situation. Seat position for head restraint removal 2 Release button
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat 왘 When removing the head restraint of a 왘 To remove head restraint 1, pull head
head restraints installed when the rear seats second-row seat, adjust the seat to the restraint 1 to its highest position.
are occupied. Head restraints are intended rear as far as possible (컄 page 137)
to help reduce injuries during an accident. 왘 Push release button 2 and pull out
and fold the seat backrest
head restraint.
(컄 page 134) forward.
140
Controls in detail
Seats
Installing head restraints Armrests i

왘 Insert head restraint 1 into openings The second-row seat armrests can be fold- If you wish to readjust the armrest to a
on the seat backrest. ed up, when loading for example, and ad- lower position, you must first fold up
justed. the armrest again and repeat the steps
i above.
On the second-row seats, the guide bar Folding up
with the detent must be on the left. Seat heating*
왘 Move the armrest into a vertical posi-
tion until it engages.
왘 Push head restraint 1 down until it au-
Front-seat heating
dibly engages. Adjusting
The switches for front-seat heating are lo-
왘 Push release button 2 and adjust 왘 With the armrest folded up, disengage cated in the center console. The red indica-
head restraint 1 to the desired posi- the armrest by pushing it towards the tor lamps in the switch come on to show
tion (컄 page 139). rear slightly. which heating level you have selected.
왘 Fold the armrest down to the lowest
and then to the desired position until it
engages.
왘 To readjust the armrest to a higher
position, move armrest up to the
desired position until it engages.
141
Controls in detail
Seats
Level
Warning! G
off No indicator lamps on.
The seat heating switches off automatically. 1 One indicator lamp on.
However, should a malfunction occur and
the automatic switch-off function fail, the The seat heating automatically
seat cushion and seat backrest can become switches off after approximately
very hot. This may cause burns. 20 minutes.
Always be aware of the selected heating 2 Two indicator lamps on.

level for all seats equipped with seat heat- The seat heating automatically
ing. Vehicle occupants, especially occu- switches to level 1 after approxi- 1 Seat heating switch, front seats
pants who suffer from spinal cord injuries or mately 10 minutes. 2 Indicator lamps
spinal cord disorders, may not notice that 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
3 Three indicator lamps on.
the seat heating is switched on and/or if the
seat heating does not switch off as intend- The seat heating automatically
Switching on
ed. To reduce the risk of burns and personal switches to level 2 after approxi-
injury, take notice of wether and how the mately 5 minutes. 왘 Press switch 1.
seat heaters are operational and switch off Three red indicator lamps 2 in the
manually if necessary. switch come on.
왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until
desired seat heating level is reached.
142
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off Second-row seat heating

왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all The switches for the second-row seats are
indicator lamps 2 go out. located in the rear center console.
i
If one or more of the indicator
lamps 2 on seat heating switch 1 are
flashing, there is insufficient voltage
due to too many electrical consumers
being switched on. The seat heating
switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as
sufficient voltage is available. 1 Seat heating switch
2 Indicator lamps
왘 Operate the seat heating for the
second-row seats as described in
“Front-seat heating” (컄 page 141).
143
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver With the memory function you can store up
should check and adjust the seat height, to three different settings for each front Warning! G
seat position fore and aft, and seat back- seat.
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate Do not activate the memory function while
The following settings are saved for each driving. Activating the memory function
control, reach and comfort. The head re-
stored position on the entry side of the while driving could cause the driver to lose
straint should also be adjusted for proper
driver’s seat: control of the vehicle.
height. See also the section on air bags
(컄 page 71) for proper seat positioning. 앫 Driver’s seat, head restraint height and
backrest position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation 앫 Steering wheel position
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior 앫 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for position
adequate rear vision.
앫 Passenger-side exterior rear view
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil- mirror position
dren should be seated in a properly se-
cured restraint system that complies with The following are saved for each stored po-
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- sition on the entry side of the front passen-
dard 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Ve- ger seat:
hicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. 앫 Front passenger seat, head restraint
height and backrest position
144
Controls in detail
Memory function*
The memory button and stored position Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
buttons are located on the entry side of
each front seat base. 왘 Adjust the seats, steering wheel and !
exterior rear view mirrors to the de-
Do not operate the power seats using
sired position (컄 page 42).
memory button M if the seat backrest
왘 Press memory button M. is in an excessively reclined position.
왘 Release memory button M and press Doing so could cause damage to front
stored position 1, 2 or 3 within or rear seats.
3 seconds. First move seat backrest to an upright
All settings are stored to the selected position.
position.
왘 Press and hold memory position
M Memory button button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors
1, 2, 3 Stored positions
have fully moved to the stored posi-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). tions.
or i
왘 Open the respective door. Releasing the memory position button
stops movement to the stored posi-
tions immediately.
145
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Storing exterior rear view mirror 왘 Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
parking position view mirror with button 1 so that you
see the rear wheel and the road curb.
For easier parking, you can adjust the
왘 Press memory button M.
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as 왘 Within 3 seconds, press adjustment
soon as you engage reverse gear R. button 1 once more.
You can switch the parking position fea- The parking position is stored if the
ture on and off in the control system. mirror does not move.
For information on activating the parking 1 Adjustment button i
position feature, see “Setting parking posi- 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- If the mirror does move, repeat the
tion for exterior rear view mirror*” ror above steps. After the setting is stored,
(컄 page 190). M Memory button you can move the mirror again.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘 Press button 2 on the door control
panel.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected. The indicator lamp
on button 2 comes on.
146
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch M Off
headlamps and use the turn signals, see Daytime running lamp mode
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 58) The exterior lamp switch is located on the (컄 page 149)
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 58). dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
U Automatic headlamp mode
i Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 148)
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
the country in which the vehicle is reg- license plate lamps, side marker
istered, you must have the headlamps lamps, instrument panel lamps)
modified for symmetrical low beams. B Low beam headlamps (or high
Relevant information can be obtained beam headlamps when the
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light combination switch is pushed
Truck Center. forward) and parking lamps
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
i stop)
Vehicles equipped with active
Bi-Xenon* headlamps: ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps moni- stops)
tor the vehicles steering angle, then au- ‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps*
tomatically shift their beams to either
† Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
side to better follow the curvature of
the road ahead, increasing usable illu-
mination over conventional headlamps.
147
Controls in detail
Lighting
i Manual headlamp mode

To minimize risk to you and to others,
With the SmartKey removed from the The low beam headlamps and the parking activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
starter switch and the driver’s door lamps can be switched on and off with the switch to B when driving or when traffic
open, a warning sounds if the parking exterior lamp switch. and/or ambient lighting conditions require
lamps or low beam headlamps are you to do so.
switched on. Automatic headlamp mode In low ambient lighting conditions, only
The message Switch off lights The following lamps switch on and off au- switch from position U to B with the
appears in the multifunction display. tomatically depending on the brightness of vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
the ambient light: Switching from U to B will briefly
i switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
앫 Low beam headlamps
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
With the daytime running lamp mode
앫 Tail and parking lamps may result in an accident.
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be 앫 License plate lamps The automatic headlamp feature is only an
switched off manually. aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
앫 Side marker lamps
the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
For information on how to activate the
times.
daytime running lamp mode, see “Day- Warning! G
time running lamp mode”
(컄 page 149). If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
edly when the system senses bright
ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic
앫 the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions
148
Controls in detail
Lighting
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to Daytime running lamp mode Canada only
position U.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to The daytime running lamp mode is manda-
With the starter switch in position 1 position M or U. tory and therefore in a constant mode.
(컄 page 38), only the parking lamps
When the engine is running, the low beam When the engine is running and you shift
will switch on and off automatically. headlamps are switched on. from a driving position to position N or P,
When the engine is running, the low In low ambient light conditions, the
the low beam headlamps will switch off
beam headlamps, the tail and parking following lamps will switch on additionally:
with a three-minute delay.
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the When the engine is running and you
side marker lamps will switch on and 앫 Tail and parking lamps
off automatically. 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
앫 License plate lamps
position C, the parking lamps
앫 Side marker lamps switch on additionally
For nighttime driving you should turn the 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
exterior lamp switch to position B to position B, the manual headlamp
permit activation of the high beam head- mode has priority over the daytime
lamps. running lamp mode
i The corresponding exterior lamps
With the daytime running lamp mode switch on (컄 page 58).
activated and the exterior lamp switch
in position M, the high beam head-
lamps cannot be switched on.
The high beam flasher is available at all
times.
149
Controls in detail
Lighting
USA only Fog lamps i

By default, the daytime running lamp mode Fog lamps cannot be switched on with
is deactivated. Activate the daytime Warning! G the exterior lamp switch in
running lamp mode using the control position U. For switching on the fog
system, see “Setting daytime running lamp In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
mode (USA only)” (컄 page 182). only switch from position U to B with position B first.
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
When the engine is running, and you turn
Switching from U to B will briefly
the exterior lamp switch to position C
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
priority over the daytime running lamp
may result in an accident.
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 58). i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
Locator lighting and night security lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
illumination on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
The locator lighting and the night security Consult your State or Province Motor
illumination are described in the “Control Vehicle Regulations regarding permis-
system” section, see “Setting locator light- sible lamp operation.
ing” (컄 page 183) and “Setting night secu-
rity illumination” (컄 page 184).
150
Controls in detail
Lighting
Front fog lamps* Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) Combination switch
왘 Switch on the low beam headlamps 왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
The combination switch is located on the
(컄 page 58). second stop.
left of the steering column.
The rear fog lamp switches on.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 147).
i
If so equipped, the front fog lamps* will
also switch on.
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop. 1 High beam
stop.
2 High beam flasher
The front fog lamps switch on. The rear fog lamp switches off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the The yellow indicator lamp † in the High beam
exterior lamp switch comes on exterior lamp switch goes out. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
(컄 page 147). The front fog lamps* remain lit. position B or U (컄 page 147). 컄컄
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps switch off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
151
Controls in detail
Lighting
컄컄 왘 Push the combination switch in Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* Driving forward
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam. The corner-illuminating front fog lamps im- Switching on corner-illuminating front
prove illumination of the road into which fog lamps
The high beam headlamp indicator
you are turning.
lamp A in the instrument cluster 왘 Depending on whether you are turning
comes on (컄 page 24). The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will left or right, switch on the left or right
operate with the engine running and with turn signal (컄 page 58).
왘 Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to 앫 the exterior lamp switch in The respective front fog lamp comes on
switch off the high beam. position B (컄 page 147) and illuminates the road onto which
The high beam headlamp indicator or you are turning.
lamp A in the instrument cluster 앫 the exterior lamp switch in i
goes out. position U (컄 page 147) The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
or will come on automatically depending
High beam flasher
on the steering angle, even if you did
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in 앫 the daytime running lamp mode not switch on either turn signal. If the
direction of arrow 2. activated (컄 page 149) corner-illuminating front fog lamps
i came on automatically, they will also
go out automatically depending on the
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
steering angle.
only come on in low ambient lighting
conditions.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
function is not available at a vehicle
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
152
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching off corner-illuminating front Driving rearward Hazard warning flasher

fog lamps
Switching on corner-illuminating front The hazard warning flasher can be
The combination switch for the turn signal
fog lamps switched on at all times, even with the
resets automatically after major steering
SmartKey removed from the starter
wheel movements. This will switch off the 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to
switch.
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they reverse gear R (컄 page 198).
were activated by switching on the left or The hazard warning flasher switches on
The inverse front fog lamp comes on
right turn signal. automatically when an air bag deploys.
automatically depending on the
If the turn signal should stay on after mak- steering direction and steering angle. The hazard warning flasher switch is
ing the turn, the turn signal and located on the upper part of the center
corner-illuminating front fog lamps can be Switching off corner-illuminating front console.
switched off by returning the combination fog lamps
switch to its original position.
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to a
gear other than reverse gear R
(컄 page 197).
The respective front fog lamp goes out.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
153
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on hazard warning flasher Interior lighting

왘 Press hazard warning flasher
The controls for interior lighting are locat-
switch 1.
ed in the overhead control panel.
All turn signals are flashing.
i
i The interior lighting is factory-set to au-
With the hazard warning flasher tomatic mode (컄 page 155).
activated and the combination switch
set for either left or right turn, only the
respective turn signals will operate
when the ignition is switched on.
Switching off hazard warning flasher

왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 1 Front left reading lamp, on/off
again. 2 Rear interior lighting, on/off
i 3 Automatic interior lighting
4 Front interior lighting, on/off
If the hazard warning flasher has been
5 Front right reading lamp, on/off
activated automatically, press hazard
6 Front right interior lamp lens
warning flasher switch 1 once to
7 Reading lamps
switch it off.
8 Front left interior lamp lens
154
Controls in detail
Lighting
Deactivating automatic control Activating automatic control Manual control

왘 Press switch 3. 왘 Press switch 3.
Switching front interior lighting on and
The interior lighting and the locator The interior lighting and the locator off
lighting (컄 page 183) remain switched lighting (컄 page 183) come on when
왘 Press button 4.
off even when you you
The lamps in the front passenger com-
앫 unlock the vehicle 앫 unlock the vehicle
partment come on.
앫 open a door 앫 open a door
왘 Press button 4 once more.
앫 open the tailgate 앫 open the tailgate
The lamps in the front passenger com-
앫 remove the SmartKey from the 앫 remove the SmartKey from the partment go out.
starter switch starter switch
The interior lamps go out following an Switching rear interior lighting on and
adjustable time delay (컄 page 185). off
왘 Press button 2.
i
If a door remains open, the interior The lamps in the rear passenger com-
lamps switch off automatically after ap- partment come on.
proximately 5 minutes when the 왘 Press button 2 once more.
SmartKey is removed or in starter
The lamps in the rear passenger com-
switch position 0.
partment go out.
An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
155
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching front reading lamps on and off Switching second-row reading lamps on Switching third-row reading lamps* on
and off and off
왘 Press button 1 or 5.
The second row reading lamps are located The switches for the third-row reading
The corresponding front reading lamp
above the side windows. lamps are located in the rear overhead
comes on.
control panel.
왘 Press button 1 or 5 again.
The corresponding reading lamp goes
out.
1 Second-row reading lamp

1 Rear right reading lamp, on/off
왘 Press on reading lamp 1 in direction
2 Rear left reading lamp, on/off
of arrow.
3 Rear left reading lamp lens
The reading lamp comes on. 4 Rear interior lamp lens
왘 Press on reading lamp 1 in direction 5 Rear right reading lamp lens
of arrow once more.
The reading lamp goes out.
156
Controls in detail
Lighting
왘 Press button 1 or 2. Door entry lamps Cargo compartment lamp

The corresponding reading lamp
The corresponding door entry lamp comes The cargo compartment lamp comes on
comes on.
on if a door is opened and if the interior when the tailgate is opened.
왘 Press button 1 or 2 once more. lighting is switched to automatic mode.
If you leave the tailgate open for an extend-
The corresponding reading lamp goes The entry lamp goes out automatically ed period of time, the cargo compartment
out. when the door is closed. lamp will switch off automatically after ap-
proximately 10 minutes.
i i
The rear interior lighting is switched on If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
and off using the button on the front switch to position 0 or remove the
overhead control panel (컄 page 154). SmartKey from the starter switch, the
door entry lamps will remain lit for
approximately 5 minutes.
157
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument The instrument cluster is activated when Instrument cluster illumination
cluster, see “Instrument cluster” you
(컄 page 24). Use button 1 or 3 to adjust the illumina-
앫 open a door
tion brightness for the instrument cluster.
앫 switch on the ignition (컄 page 38)
i
앫 press reset button 2
The instrument cluster illumination is
앫 switch on the exterior lamps dimmed or brightened automatically to
(컄 page 147) suit ambient light conditions.
You can modify the instrument cluster set- The instrument cluster illumination will
tings in the instrument cluster submenu of also be adjusted automatically when
the control system (컄 page 178). you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.
1 Dimming instrument cluster illumina-
tion
Warning! G
To brighten illumination
2 Reset button If the instrument cluster or the multifunction
3 Brightening instrument cluster illumi- 왘 Press and hold button 3 until the
display, or both, are inoperative or malfunc- desired level of illumination is reached.
nation tioning, warning messages will not be re-
layed when potential danger exists. This To dim illumination
may cause you and others to be unaware of
certain risks, which may result in an acci- 왘 Press and hold button 1 until the
dent and/or personal injury. desired level of illumination is reached.
Contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
158
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Trip odometer Tachometer Outside temperature indicator
Make sure you are viewing the trip odome- The red marking on the tachometer
ter display (컄 page 161). (컄 page 24) denotes excessive engine Warning! G
speed.
왘 If it is not displayed, press button è
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
or ÿ on the multifunction steering ! signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
wheel (컄 page 162) repeatedly until
Avoid driving at excessive engine is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
the trip odometer appears in the multi-
speeds, as it may result in serious Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
function display.
engine damage that is not covered by ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
왘 Press and hold reset button 2 the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
(컄 page 158) until the trip odometer is
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
reset. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
The outside temperature is indicated in the
within the red marking.
multifunction display (컄 page 161).
159
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
The temperature sensor is located in the

front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by com-
parison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
perature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
160
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1 (컄 page 38) or as
soon as the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
ton* is in position 1 (컄 page 39). The con- conditions must always be his/her primary
trol system enables you to focus when driving.
앫 call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
앫 change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the
For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely.
due for maintenance service, to set the Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Trip odometer
language for messages in the instrument (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Main odometer
cluster display, and much more. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 3 Gear position indicator
ly 14 m) every second. 4 Current transmission program mode
i
5 Status indicator (outside temperature
The displays for the audio systems
The control system relays information to or digital speedometer)
(radio, CD player) will appear in English,
the multifunction display. For more information on menus displayed
regardless of the language selected.
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄 page 164).
161
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display Pressing any of the buttons, except for the
telephone buttons, on the multifunction
The displays in the multifunction display Operating the control system steering wheel will alter what is shown in
and the settings in the control system are 2 Telephone*: the multifunction display.
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc- Press button
The information available in the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
s to take a call tion display is arranged in menus, each
t to end a call containing a number of functions or sub-
menus.
3 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume: The individual functions are then found
Press button within the relevant menu (radio or
CD operations under AUDIO, for example).
æ up/to increase
These functions serve to call up relevant
ç down/to decrease information or to customize the settings
4 Moving within a menu: for your vehicle.
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
5 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
162
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of func- The menus are described on the following
functions within each menu, as being ar- tions, you will find a number of submenus pages.
ranged in a circular pattern. for calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
앫 If you press button è or ÿ
“Settings menu” (컄 page 174).
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other. The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
앫 If you press button k or j
is installed in your vehicle.
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus 1 to 5. overview of the individual menus.
164
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5

Standard display AUDIO NAV* Airmatic/ Vehicle status message
Compass memory
(컄 page 168) (컄 page 170) (컄 page 172) (컄 page 172) (컄 page 173)
Trip- and main odometer Selecting radio station Show route guidance Airmatic* Calling up vehicle malfunction,
instructions, current warning and system status
direction traveled messages stored in memory
Commands/submenus
Checking tire inflation pressure* Selecting satellite ra- Compass

dio station* (USA only)
Checking coolant temperature Operating CD player
Calling up digital speedometer or
outside temperature
Calling up maintenance service
indicator
Checking engine oil level
i control system displays. The first func-

The headings used in the menus table tion displayed in each menu will auto-
are designed to facilitate navigation matically show you which part of the
within the system and are not neces- system you are in.
sarily identical to those shown in the
165
Controls in detail
Control system
This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus 6 to 9. overview of the individual menus.
166
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8 Menu 9

Settings Vehicle configuration Trip computer Telephone*
(컄 page 174) (컄 page 191) (컄 page 192) (컄 page 194)
Resetting to factory settings Tow-away alarm on/off Fuel consumption statistics Loading phone book
after start
Commands/submenus
Instrument cluster submenu Fuel consumption statistics Searching for name in phone
since the last reset book
Time/Date submenu Calling up range (distance to
empty)
Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
Convenience submenu
i The first function displayed in each

The headings used in the menus table menu will automatically show you
are designed to facilitate navigation which part of the system you are in.
within the system and are not neces-
sarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
167
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu The following functions are available: Checking coolant temperature
In the standard display, the main odometer Function Page

and the trip odometer appear in the multi- Checking tire inflation pressure* 371
Warning! G
function display. Checking coolant temperature 168 앫 Driving when your engine is badly over-
Calling up digital speedometer or 169 heated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine com-
outside temperature
partment to catch fire. You could be se-
Calling up maintenance service 393 riously burned.
indicator 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
Checking engine oil level 347 cause serious burns and can occur just
1 Trip odometer (R 500 only) by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
2 Main odometer
ing from it.
If you see another display, press Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
button è or ÿ repeatedly until the and do not stand near the vehicle until the
standard display appears. engine has cooled down.
You can select the functions in the
standard display menu with
button k or j.
168
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Calling up digital speedometer or i

until the coolant temperature appears outside temperature You can select whether the digital
in the multifunction display. speedometer or the outside tempera-
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the digital speedometer or the ture is to be displayed.
outside temperature appears in the You can change the setting in the
multifunction display. submenu Instr. cluster via the
function Status line display, see
“Selecting display (digital speedometer
or outside temperature) for status
! indicator” (컄 page 179).
The engine should not be operated with
a coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious Digital speedometer
engine damage which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i
During severe operating conditions,
e.g. stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise close to 248°F Outside temperature
(120°C).
Excessive coolant temperature triggers
a warning message in the multifunction
display (컄 page 434).
169
Controls in detail
Control system
AUDIO menu Selecting radio station i

왘 Turn on the Modular COMAND System You can only store new stations using
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
and select radio. Refer to separate the corresponding feature on the radio.
the audio equipment which you currently
Modular COMAND System operating Refer to separate Modular COMAND
have turned on.
instructions. System operating instructions. You can
If no audio equipment is currently turned also operate the radio in the usual man-
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the ner.
until the currently tuned station
The following functions are available:
Function Page
Selecting radio station 170
Selecting satellite radio station* 171
(USA only)
Operating CD player 171 1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
until the desired station is found.
170
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting satellite radio station* i Operating the CD player

(USA only) Feature description is based on 왘 Turn on the Modular COMAND System
The satellite radio is treated as a radio preliminary information available at and select CD. Refer to separate
application. time of printing. Modular COMAND System operating
Additional optional satellite radio instructions.
왘 Select satellite radio with the
corresponding soft key on the Modular equipment and a subscription to satel- 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
COMAND System. lite radio service provider are required until the settings for the CD currently
for satellite radio operation. At time of being played appear in the multifunc-
printing, no date for the availability of tion display.
optional equipment required for satel-
lite radio operation had been set.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center for details and
availability for your vehicle.
1 SAT mode
2 Channel name or number For more information, refer to separate
Modular COMAND System operating 1 Current CD (for CD changer*)
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly instructions. 2 Current track
until the desired channel is found.
until the desired track is selected. 컄컄
171
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 i The message shown in the multifunction AIRMATIC*/Compass menu

To select a CD from the magazine, display depends on the status of the navi-
gation system: The AIRMATIC/Compass menu displays the
press a number on the Modular
Airmatic messages and the direction into
COMAND System key pad located in 앫 With the Modular COMAND System
which you are currently driving.
the center console. switched off, the message NAV OFF ap-
pears in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
NAV* menu until the AIRMATIC/Compass menu
앫 With the Modular COMAND System
switched on but route guidance not
The NAV menu contains the functions
activated, the direction of travel and, if
needed to operate your navigation system.
applicable, the name of the street cur-
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly rently traveled on appear in the multi-
until the message NAV appears in the function display.
앫 With the Modular COMAND System
switched on and route guidance acti-
For information on AIRMATIC*, see “AIR-
vated, the direction of travel and ma-
MATIC*” (컄 page 269).
neuver instructions appear in the
multifunction display. For information on the compass, see
“Vehicle submenu” (컄 page 186) and
Please refer to the Modular COMAND
“Compass” (컄 page 327).
System manual for instructions on how to
activate the route guidance system.
172
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle status message memory menu 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Vehicle status messages have been
until the vehicle status message recorded
Use the vehicle status message memory memory appears in the multifunction
If conditions have occurred causing status
menu to scan malfunction and warning display.
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages that may be stored in the
messages appears in the multifunction
system. Such messages appear in the No vehicle status messages
display:
multifunction display and are based on
If no conditions have been recorded in
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
memory, the message in the multifunction
system has recorded.
display is: No message.
Warning! G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
왘 Press button k or j.
indicated for certain systems and are inten-
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction The stored messages will now be
and warning messages are simply a remind- displayed in order in which they have
er with respect to the operation of certain occurred. For malfunctions and
systems and do not replace the owner’s warning messages, see “Vehicle status
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain messages in the multifunction display”
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all (컄 page 416).
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing i
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz After you have scrolled through all
Light Truck Center to address the malfunc- recorded status messages, the first
tion and warning messages (컄 page 416). recorded message appears again.
173
Controls in detail
Control system
Should the vehicle’s system record any i Settings menu

conditions while driving, the number of The vehicle status message memory
messages will reappear in the multifunc- In the Settings menu there are two func-
will be cleared when you turn the
tion display tions:
SmartKey in the starter switch to
앫 when the SmartKey in the starter position 1 or 2, or when you press the 앫 The function Reset to factory
switch is turned to position 0 or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once settings?, with which you can reset all
removed from the starter switch or twice without depressing the brake the settings to the original factory
pedal. You will then only see high settings.
or
priority messages in the multifunction 앫 A collection of submenus with which
앫 when you turn off the engine by display (컄 page 416). you can make individual settings for
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
your vehicle.
button (컄 page 66) in the starter
switch once and open the driver’s door 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
(this puts the starter switch in until the Settings menu appears in the
position 0, same as with the SmartKey multifunction display.
removed from the starter switch)
174
Controls in detail
Control system
The following settings and submenus are Resetting all settings i

available in the Settings menu: The settings you have changed will not
You can reset all the functions of all
Function Page submenus to the factory settings. be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
Resetting all settings 175 왘 Press the reset button in the
time.
instrument cluster (컄 page 158) for
Submenus in the Settings menu 176
approximately 3 seconds. After approximately 5 seconds, the
Resetting the functions of a 176 Settings menu reappears in the
submenu The request to press the reset button
once more to confirm appears in the
Instrument cluster submenu 178 multifunction display.
Time/date submenu 180 i
Lighting submenu 182 For safety reasons, the function
Light circuit headlamp mode in the
Vehicle submenu 186 Lighting submenu cannot be reset
Convenience submenu 189 while driving.
The following message appears in the
왘 Press the reset button once more. multifunction display:
Lighting
The functions of all the submenus will
Cannot be completely reset
reset to factory settings.
to factory settings while driving
175
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu With the selection marker on the desired i
submenu, use the j button to access The settings you have changed will not
왘 Press button j.
the individual functions within that sub- be reset unless you confirm the action
The collection of the submenus menu. Once within that submenu, you can by pressing the reset button a second
appears in the multifunction display. use the j button to move to the next time.
function or the k button to move to the
previous function within that submenu. After approximately 5 seconds, the
Settings menu reappears in the
The settings themselves are made with multifunction display (컄 page 174).
button æ or ç.
Resetting the functions of a submenu i

왘 Press button ç. For safety reasons, the function
You can reset all the functions for each
Lamp circuit headlamp (컄 page 182)
The selection marker moves to the next submenu to the factory settings.
in the Lighting submenu cannot be
submenu.
왘 Move to a function in the submenu. reset while driving.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
왘 Press the reset button in the The following message appears in the
Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
instrument cluster (컄 page 158) for multifunction display:
with button æ.
approximately 3 seconds. Lighting
Cannot be completely reset
The request to press the reset button
to factory settings while driving
once more to confirm appears in the
왘 Press the reset button once more.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
176
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can

be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following
pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE

Selecting speedometer display Setting the time Setting daytime running Calling up the compass Activating
mode (hours) lamp mode (USA only) easy-entry/exit feature*
Selecting language Setting the time Setting locator lighting Compass adjustment Setting parking position
(minutes) for exterior rear view
mirror
Selecting display (digital Setting the date Setting night security Compass calibration Setting fold-in function
speedometer or outside (month) illumination for exterior rear view
temperature) for status indicator mirrors
Setting the date Setting interior lighting Setting which display to
(day) delayed shut-off appear with ignition
switched off
Setting the date Setting automatic
(year) locking
Limiting opening height
of tailgate*
177
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu Selecting speedometer display mode Selecting language

Access the Instr. cluster submenu via 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. button æ or ç to the Instr. button æ or ç to the Instr.
cluster submenu to change the instru- cluster submenu. cluster submenu.
ment cluster display settings.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
The following functions are available: until the message Display unit until the message Language appears in
Digital speedometer appears in the the multifunction display.
Function Page multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current
Selecting speedometer display 178
The selection marker is on the current setting.
mode
setting.
Selecting language 178
Selecting display (digital 179
speedometer or outside
temperature) for status indicator
왘 Press button æ or ç to select

왘 Press button æ or ç to set the language to be used for the
speedometer unit to km or miles. multifunction display messages.
178
Controls in detail
Control system
Available languages: Selecting display (digital speedometer 왘 Press button æ or ç to select

or outside temperature) for status the desired setting.
앫 German (Deutsch)
indicator
The selected display is then shown
앫 English (English)
왘 Move the selection marker with continuously in the status indicator
앫 French (Français) button æ or ç to the Instr. (lower display).
앫 Italian (Italiano) cluster submenu.
The other display now appears in the
앫 Spanish (Español) 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly menu of the standard display
until the message Status line (컄 page 169):
display appears in the multifunction
앫 Digital speedometer
display.
or
The selection marker is on the current
setting. 앫 Outside temperature
179
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu Setting the time (hours) Setting the time (minutes)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the This function is not available if your vehicle This function is not available if your vehicle
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date is equipped with the Modular COMAND is equipped with the Modular COMAND
submenu to change the time and date System and navigation module*. System and navigation module*.
settings.
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
The following functions are available: button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu. submenu.
Function Page
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Setting the time (hours) 180
until the message Set clock hours until the message Set clock minutes
Setting the time (minutes) 180 appears in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display.
Setting the date (month) 181 The selection marker is on the hour The selection marker is on the minute
Setting the date (day) 181 setting. setting.
Setting the date (year) 181
i
If your vehicle is equipped with the
Modular COMAND System and naviga-
tion module*, see separate COMAND
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
operating instructions for information
hour. minutes.
on how to set the date and time.
180
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the date (month) Setting the date (day) Setting the date (year)
This function is not available if your vehicle This function is not available if your vehicle This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the Modular COMAND is equipped with the Modular COMAND is equipped with the Modular COMAND
System and navigation module*. System and navigation module*. System and navigation module*.
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu. submenu. submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set date month until the message Set date day until the message Set date year
appears in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the month The selection marker is on the day The selection marker is on the year
setting. setting. setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
month. day. year.
181
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode

(USA only)
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting i
submenu to change the lamp and lighting
This function is not available in
settings on your vehicle.
countries where the daytime running
The following functions are available: lamp mode is mandatory and therefore
in a constant mode.
Function Page manual operation (manual) or daytime
Setting daytime running lamp 182 running lamp mode (constant).
왘 Move the selection marker with
mode (USA only) button æ or ç to the Lighting With daytime running lamp mode activated
Setting locator lighting 183 submenu. and the exterior lamp switch at
position M or U, the low beam
Setting night security 184 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly headlamps are switched on when the
illumination until the message Lamp circuit engine is running.
Setting interior lighting delayed 185 headlamp appears in the multifunction
shut-off display.
setting.
182
Controls in detail
Control system
In low ambient light conditions the Setting locator lighting 왘 Move the selection marker with
following lamps will switch on additionally: button æ or ç to the Lighting
With the locator lighting feature activated,
submenu.
앫 Parking lamps the exterior lamp switch in position U
(컄 page 148) and the interior lighting in 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 Tail lamps
automatic mode (컄 page 155), the follow- until the message Function Surround
앫 License plate lamps ing lamps will switch on during darkness lighting appears in the multifunction
앫 Side marker lamps when the vehicle is unlocked with the display.
SmartKey:
For more information on the daytime The selection marker is on the current
running lamp mode, see “Lighting” 앫 Parking lamps setting.
(컄 page 147). 앫 Tail lamps
i 앫 License plate lamps
For safety reasons, resetting the 앫 Side marker lamps
Lighting submenu to factory settings
앫 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
while driving (컄 page 176) will not
deactivate the daytime running lamp The locator lighting switches off when the 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
mode. driver’s door is opened. the locator lighting function to on.
The following message appears in the If you do not open a door after unlocking 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
multifunction display: the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps position U (컄 page 147) when
Lighting will switch off automatically after approxi- exiting the vehicle.
Cannot be completely reset mately 40 seconds.
to factory settings while driving The locator lighting feature is
activated.
183
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Press button æ or ç to select
(Headlamps delayed shut-off) button æ or ç to the Lighting the desired lamp-on period.
submenu.
Use this function to set whether and for You can select:
how long you would like the exterior lamps 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 0 sec., the delayed shut-off feature
to remain on during darkness after exiting until the message Headlmp. delayed is deactivated.
the vehicle and the doors closed. shut-off appears in the multifunction
display. 앫 15 sec., 30 sec., 45 sec. or
With the delayed shut-off feature activated
60 sec., select the desired lamp-on
and the exterior lamp switch in The selection marker is on the current
period.
position U before the engine is turned setting.
off, the following lamps will switch on 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
when the engine is turned off: position U (컄 page 147) before
turning off the engine.
앫 Parking lamps
The headlamps delayed shut-off
앫 Tail lamps feature is activated.
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Side marker lamps
앫 Front fog lamps*
If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door, the lamps will switch off auto-
matically after 60 seconds.
184
Controls in detail
Control system
You can temporarily deactivate the Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off 왘 Press button æ or ç to select
delayed shut-off feature: the desired lamp-on time period.
Use this function to set whether and for
왘 Before leaving the vehicle, turn the how long you would like the interior You can select:
SmartKey in the starter switch to lighting to remain on after you have re-
앫 0 sec., the interior lighting delayed
position 0. moved the SmartKey from the starter
shut-off feature is deactivated.
switch.
왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back
앫 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec., or
to 0. 왘 Move the selection marker with
20 sec., select the desired lamp-on
The delayed shut-off feature is button æ or ç to the Lighting
period.
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon submenu.
The interior lighting delayed
as you reinsert the SmartKey in the 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
shut-off feature is activated.
starter switch. until the message Int. light.
delayed shut-off appears in the
setting.
185
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu Compass adjustment

Access the Vehicle submenu via the This function is not available if your vehicle
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu is equipped with the Modular COMAND
to make general vehicle settings. system with navigation module*.
The following functions are available: Determine your location on the basis of the
following zone maps.
Function Page
Compass adjustment 186
Compass calibration 187
Setting which display to appear 188
with ignition switched off
Setting automatic locking 188
Limiting opening height of 189
tailgate* Zone map South America
왘 Press button æ or ç to move
the selection marker to the Vehicle
submenu.
Zone map North America
186
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Compass calibration 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly

until the message Compass Adjustment until the message Compass Calibra-
This function is not available if your vehicle
appears in the multifunction display. tion appears in the multifunction
is equipped with the Modular COMAND
display.
The selection marker is on the current system with navigation module*.
setting. In order to calibrate the compass properly, The selection marker is on setting off.
mind the following:
앫 Calibrate the compass in open terrain.
Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines
and large antenna masts, for example,
could impair compass calibration.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 앫 Switch off electrical consumers (e.g. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
respective compass zone. climate control, windshield wipers, or selection marker to Start.
rear window defroster).
For information on how to select the prop- The following message appears in the
er geographic zone, see “Compass” 앫 Close all doors and the tailgate. multifunction display:
(컄 page 327). 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 53). Compass Calibration Active
Please drive in a full circle 컄컄
왘 Press button æ or ç to move
the selection marker to the Vehicle
submenu.
187
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘 Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of Setting which display to appear with Setting automatic locking
between 3 mph and 6 mph (5 km/h ignition switched off
Use this function to activate or deactivate
and 10 km/h).
This function lets you determine which dis- the automatic central locking. With the
When calibration was successful, the play you would like to appear in the multi- automatic central locking system
following message appears in the mul- function display when you switch off the activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
tifunction display: ignition. vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
Compass Calibration (15 km/h).
Completed Successfully
button æ or ç to the Vehicle 왘 Move the selection marker with
i submenu. button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.
If the message Compass Calibration 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Completed Successfully does not ap- until the message Display when 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
pear in the multifunction display, drive ignition is switched off appears in until the message Automatic door
another full circle. the multifunction display. lock appears in the multifunction
display.
If calibration does not succeed within The selection marker is on the current
3 minutes, the message Compass Cal- setting. The selection marker is on the current
ibration appears in the multifunction setting.
display again. Calibrating the compass
has failed due to outside influences.
Repeat compass calibration in a differ-
ent location.

the desired setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
the automatic central locking on or off.
188
Controls in detail
Control system
Limiting opening height of tailgate* Convenience submenu Activating easy-entry/exit feature*

Use this function to activate or deactivate Access the Convenience submenu via the Use this function to activate and
the limiting opening height of the tailgate. Settings menu. Use the Convenience sub- deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
menu to change the settings for a number (컄 page 132).
of convenience features.
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu. The following functions are available: Warning! G
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Function Page You must make sure no one can become
until the message Opening limiter
Activating easy-entry/exit 189 trapped or injured by the moving steering
Tailgate appears in the multifunction
feature* wheel and driver’s seat when the
display.
Setting parking position for 190 easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
exterior rear view mirror* To cancel seat/steering wheel movement,
setting.
Setting fold-in function for 191 do one of the following:
exterior rear view mirrors 앫 Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 43).
앫 Move steering column stalk*
(컄 page 46).
앫 Press memory button* (컄 page 145). 컄컄
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch

the limiting opening height of the
tailgate on or off.
189
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 The following settings are available for the 왘 Move the selection marker with
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
easy-entry/exit feature: button æ or ç to the
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Convenience submenu.
Children could open the driver’s door and off The easy-entry/exit
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature is 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
feature, which could result in an accident deactivated. until the message Mirror adjustment
and/or serious personal injury. parking aid appears in the multifunc-
Steering col. Only the steering
tion display.
column is moved.
왘 Move the selection marker with The selection marker is on the current
button æ or ç to the Steer. col.+seat Both the steering
setting.
Convenience submenu. column and the
driver’s seat are
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly moved.
until the message Func. Easy-entry
feature appears in the multifunction
Setting parking position for exterior rear
display.
view mirror*
Use this function to select whether the
setting. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
the function on or off.
should be turned downward during parking
maneuvers when reverse gear R is
engaged. For additional information, see
“Activating exterior rear view mirror park-
ing position*” (컄 page 210).
왘 Press button æ or ç to change

the easy-entry/exit setting.
190
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear 왘 Move the selection marker with Vehicle configuration
view mirrors* button æ or ç to the
Convenience submenu. In the Vehicle configuration menu you
Using this function, you can set the
can determine whether the tow-away
exterior rear view mirrors to be automati- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
alarm is to be enabled or disabled. With
cally folded in when you lock your vehicle. until the message Fold in mirrors
this function set to on, the tow-away alarm
when locking appears in the multi-
i is armed when you lock your vehicle. With
function display.
this function set to off, the tow-away
With this function set to on and the ex-
The selection marker is on the current alarm is not armed automatically when you
terior rear view mirrors folded in using
setting. lock your vehicle. You will then have to
the button on the door control panel
switch on the tow-away alarm manually
(컄 page 211), the exterior rear view
(컄 page 107).
mirrors will not fold out when you
switch on the ignition. You will then 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
have to fold out the exterior rear view until the Vehicle configuration menu
mirrors using the button on the door appears in the multifunction display.
control panel (컄 page 211).
the function on or off.

the tow-away alarm on or off.
191
Controls in detail
Control system
Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics after start i

왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly All statistics stored since the last
Use the trip computer menu to call up
until the message After start appears engine start will be reset approximately
statistical data on your vehicle.
in the multifunction display. 4 hours after the SmartKey in the start-
The following information is available: er switch is turned to position 0 or re-
moved from the starter switch.
Function Page
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
Fuel consumption statistics after 192
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2
start
within this time period.
Fuel consumption statistics 193
since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics
1 Distance driven since start
Calling up range (distance to 193 2 Time elapsed since start 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
empty) 3 Average speed since start until the message After start appears
4 Average fuel consumption since start in the multifunction display.
i
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
When you enter the trip computer instrument cluster (컄 page 158) until
menu, you will always see the fuel the value is reset to 0.
consumption statistics after start first.
192
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics since last Resetting fuel consumption statistics Calling up range (distance to empty)
reset manually
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the message After start appears
until the message After start appears until the message After start appears in the multifunction display.
in the multifunction display. in the multifunction display.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Range: appears in
until the message After reset appears until the message After reset appears the multifunction display.
in the multifunction display. in the multifunction display. The calculated range based on the
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the current fuel tank level appears in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 158) until multifunction display.
the value is reset to 0.
Resetting fuel consumption statistics

automatically
1 Distance driven since last reset The fuel consumption statistics reset auto-
2 Time elapsed since last reset matically to 0 when either of the following
3 Average speed since last reset values is exceeded:
4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset 앫 distance covered:100000 miles
앫 time elapsed: 10000 hours
193
Controls in detail
Control system
TEL menu* Which messages will appear in the multi-

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
function display depends on whether your
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
telephone is switched on or off:
Warning! G covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second. 앫 If the telephone is off, the message
Never operate radio transmitters equipped PHONE OFF appears in the multifunction
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- display.
your safety and the safety of others, we rec- out being connected to an external antenna) 앫 If the telephone is on:
ommend that you pull over to a safe location from inside the vehicle while the engine is
The telephone will then search for a
and stop before placing or taking a tele- running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
network. During this time the multi-
phone call. If you choose to use the tele- tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
function display is empty.
phone while driving, please use the sibly resulting in an accident and/or
hands-free device and only use the tele- personal injury. As soon as the telephone has found a
phone when weather, road and traffic condi- network, the message READY appears
tions permit. You can use the functions in the TEL menu in the multifunction display.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from to operate your telephone, provided it is
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve- connected to a hands-free system and
hicle. switched on.
왘 Switch on the telephone and Modular
COMAND System.
왘 Press button ÿ or è on the This standby message indicates that your
multifunction steering wheel repeated- telephone is ready for use and you can
ly until the message TEL appears in the operate it using the control system.
194
Controls in detail
Control system
Answering a call Ending a call 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly

until the desired name appears in the
When your telephone is ready to receive 왘 Press button t.
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
You have ended the call. The standby
the multifunction display you will then see The stored names are displayed in
message appears in the multifunction
the message: ascending or descending alphabetical
display.
order.
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘 Press button s. 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly

until the message TEL appears in the 1 Name from the phone book
You have answered the call. The multifunction display.
duration of the call appears in the
왘 Press button j or k. i
If you press and hold j or k for
The control system reads the phone
i book which is stored in the telephone.
longer than 1 second, the system
If you do not wish to accept a call, scrolls rapidly through the list of names
This may take up to 30 seconds. The until you release the button again.
press button t. message Please wait appears in the
multifunction display. Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing button t. 컄컄
When the message Please wait
disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
195
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘 Press button s. Redialing

The system dials the selected phone The control system stores the most
number. recently dialed phone numbers. This
eliminates the need to search through your
앫 If the connection is successful, the
entire phone book.
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
in the multifunction display. until the message TEL appears in the
왘 Press button s.
The first number in the redial memory
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 If no connection is made, the until the desired name appears in the
control system stores the dialed multifunction display.
number in the redial memory. 왘 Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
196
Controls in detail
왔 Automatic transmission
For information on driving with an auto- Gear selector lever Shifting from P to N
matic transmission see “Automatic trans-
mission” (컄 page 53). The gear selector lever is located on the
right of the steering column. Warning! G
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans-
style by continually adjusting the shift mission out of park position P or neutral
points up or down. These shift point adjust- position N if the engine speed is higher than
ments are performed based on current idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
operating and driving conditions. brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
If the operating conditions change, the
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
automatic transmission reacts by
something. Only shift into gear when the
adjusting its shift program.
engine is idling normally and when your right
i Gearshift pattern for automatic
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
During the brief warm-up, transmission transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the P Park position Moving the gear selector lever up or down
catalytic converter to heat up more R Reverse gear shifts the automatic transmission out of
quickly to operating temperature. N Neutral park position P:
D Drive position 왘 Depress the brake pedal and keep it
pressed.
왘 Move gear selector lever up or down to
resistance point to select neutral
position N.
197
Controls in detail
Shifting from N to R or from N to D Shifting from P to R Shifting from P to D

왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. the brake pedal and keep it pressed. the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘 Move gear selector lever up past the 왘 Move gear selector lever up past the 왘 Move gear selector lever down past the
resistance point to select reverse resistance point to select reverse resistance point to select drive
gear R. gear R. position D.
or i i
왘 Move gear selector down up past the The gear selector lever returns to its The gear selector lever returns to its
resistance point to select drive original position. original position.
position D.
왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 56). 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 56).
i
The gear selector lever returns to its 왘 Release the brake pedal. 왘 Release the brake pedal.
original position. 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so. to drive off when it is safe to do so.
왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 56).
왘 Release the brake pedal.
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so.
198
Controls in detail
Shifting from D, R, or N to P Shifting from D or R to N Shifting procedure

If you want to select park position P with If you want to select neutral position N
The automatic transmission selects indi-
the transmission being in drive position D, with the transmission being in drive
vidual gears automatically, depending on:
reverse gear R or neutral position N: position D or reverse gear R:
앫 drive position D (컄 page 200) with
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
gear ranges (컄 page 202)
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
앫 the selected program mode (C/S)
왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal
(컄 page 204)
(컄 page 65). (컄 page 65).
앫 the position of the accelerator pedal
왘 Press button on gear selector lever in i (컄 page 203)
direction of arrow (컄 page 197) to
When the vehicle needs to be moved 앫 the vehicle speed
select park position P.
with the engine switched off and the
왘 Release the brake pedal. transmission set to N (컄 page 200), The current gear range/transmission
e.g. in an automatic car wash, do not position and program mode (C/S) appear
! depress the parking brake pedal. in the multifunction display.
Shift the automatic transmission
directly from position D to R, from R 왘 Move gear selector lever up to resis-
to D or directly to P only when the tance point when in drive position D or
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the down to resistance point when in re-
automatic transmission could be verse gear R to select neutral
damaged. position N.
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in
mud or snow, see “Rocking the vehicle” 왘 Release the brake pedal. 1 Current transmission position
(컄 page 204).
199
Controls in detail
! Transmission positions !
Allow engine to warm up under low SmartKey:
load use. Do not place full load on the Effect If you turn off the engine using the
engine until the operating temperature SmartKey and remove the SmartKey
ì Park position
has been reached. from the starter switch, the transmis-
Shift into park position P only sion will shift to park position P auto-
Shift into reverse gear R or park
when vehicle is stopped. The matically. Keep in mind that turning off
position P only when the vehicle is
park position is not intended to the engine with the SmartKey alone will
stopped.
serve as a brake when the vehi- not automatically shift the transmis-
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an cle is parked. Rather, the driver sion to P. Only when the SmartKey is
extended period when driving off on should always set the parking removed from the starter switch, will
slippery road surfaces. This may cause brake in addition to shifting into the transmission automatically shift
serious damage to the drivetrain which park position P to secure the to P.
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
KEYLESS-GO*:
Limited Warranty.
If the vehicle’s electrical system If you turn off the engine using the
is malfunctioning, the automatic KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
With drive position D selected, you can use transmission could remain open the driver’s door, the transmis-
the steering wheel gearshift control locked in park position P. sion will shift to park position P
buttons (컄 page 206) to influence trans- automatically. Keep in mind that
mission shifting by: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible by an autho- turning off the engine using the
앫 limiting the gear range rized Mercedes-Benz Light KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone
Truck Center. will not automatically shift the trans-
앫 changing gears manually
mission to P. Only when the driver’s
door is opened, will the transmission
automatically shift to P.
200
Controls in detail
Even though this is possible, make it a Effect !

practice to always shift into park Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
position P before turning off the engine
í Reverse gear
other reason in neutral position N can
and remove the SmartKey from the Shift into reverse gear R only result in transmission damage that is
starter switch, or when using when the vehicle is stopped. not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
KEYLESS-GO*, before turning off the ë Neutral Limited Warranty.
engine with the start/stop button and
opening the driver’s door. No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
Warning! G
!
vehicle can be moved freely Getting out of your vehicle without shifting
If you want the gear position to remain (pushed or towed).
in N (for example when the vehicle is into park position P is dangerous. Also, park
pulled through a car wash) To avoid damage to the trans- position P alone is not intended to or capa-
mission, never shift into neutral ble of preventing your vehicle from moving,
앫 do not remove the SmartKey from position N while driving. possibly hitting people or objects.
the starter switch
If the ESP® is deactivated or Always set the parking brake in addition to
or, when using KEYLESS-GO* malfunctioning: shifting to park position P (컄 page 65).
앫 do not turn off the engine using the Shift into neutral position N only When parked on an incline, turn the front
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* if the vehicle is in danger of wheels towards the road curb.
and open the driver’s door skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
Otherwise, the transmission will shift ê Drive bustible materials such as grass, hay or
to P and lock the wheels, preventing The transmission shifts leaves can come into contact with the hot
the vehicle from being pulled through a automatically. All forward gears exhaust system, as these materials could be
car wash. are available. ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
201
Controls in detail
Gear ranges Effect

Warning! G
With the automatic transmission in drive ï The transmission shifts through
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the position D, you can select a gear range for sixth gear only.
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* the automatic transmission to operate î The transmission shifts through
from the starter switch, take it with you, and within. fifth gear only.
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
You can limit the gear range by pressing é The transmission shifts through
the respective downshift button on the fourth gear only.
unlocked vehicle. Children could shift the
steering wheel gearshift control, and è The transmission shifts through
automatic transmission out of park
reverse the gear range limit by pressing third gear only.
position P, which could result in an accident
the respective upshift button on the
and/or serious personal injury. With this selection you can use
steering wheel gearshift control.
the braking effect of the engine.
1 Current gear range

The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 199). If you
press on the accelerator when the engine
has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit
selected.
202
Controls in detail
Effect Driving tips Stopping
ç The transmission shifts through When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
second gear only. Accelerator position 왘 Leave the transmission in gear.
Allows the use of engine’s Your driving style influences the 왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake.
braking power when driving: transmission’s shifting behavior:
When you stop for a longer period of time
앫 on steep downgrades Less throttle Earlier upshifting with the engine idling and/or on a hill:
앫 in mountainous regions More throttle Later upshifting 왘 Set the parking brake.
앫 under extreme operating 왘 Shift into park position P.
Kickdown
conditions
Use kickdown when you want maximum
æ The transmission operates in acceleration.
Maneuvering
first gear only. When you maneuver in tight areas,
왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
For maximum use of engine’s e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
resistance.
braking effect on very steep or 왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually
lengthy downgrades. The transmission shifts into a lower releasing the brakes.
gear.
왘 Accelerate gently.
왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed. 왘 Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
The transmission shifts up again.
203
Controls in detail
Rocking the vehicle Automatic shift program

Rocking the vehicle by shifting between D
Warning! G
The program mode selector switch is
and R can help free a vehicle stuck in mud The hill start assist system is not designed located on the upper part of the center
or snow. The engine control system of this to function as a parking brake and does not console.
vehicle electronically limits shifting prevent the vehicle from moving when
between D and R to very low speeds parked on an incline.
(i.e. approx. 2 mph). To shift between D
and R, move the gear selector lever past Always set the parking brake in addition to
the resistance point up or down. shifting to park position P.
Hill start assist system i

On uphill grades, the hill start assist If the ESP® has switched off due to a
system maintains the pressure in the malfunction, the hill start assist system
brake system for approximately 1 second is also unavailable.
after you have released the brake pedal. Program mode selector switch
Therefore, you can start off smoothly with- Working on the vehicle C Comfort For comfort driving
out the vehicle moving immediately after
releasing the brake pedal. S Sport For standard driving
Warning! G
The hill start assist system is inactive
When working on the vehicle, set the
앫 when driving downhill
parking brake and shift to park position P.
앫 with the transmission in neutral Otherwise the vehicle could roll away.
position N
앫 with the parking brake set
204
Controls in detail
The current gear range/transmission 왘 Press program mode selector switch Steering wheel gearshift control
position (컄 page 199) and the selected repeatedly until the letter of the de-
program mode (C/S) are indicated in the sired program mode appears in the With drive position D selected, you can use
multifunction display. multifunction display. the steering wheel gearshift control but-
tons to manually shift the gears. When
Select C for comfort driving:
doing so, you are also limiting or extending
앫 The vehicle starts out in second the gear range.
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if i
full throttle is applied or gear To avoid overrevving the engine when
range 1 is selected. downshifting with steering wheel
1 Current program mode gearshift buttons, the transmission will
앫 Traction and driving stability are
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
! improved on icy roads.
max. speed would be exceeded.
Never change the program mode when 앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when
the automatic transmission is out of you give more gas. The engine then
park position P. This could result in a operates at lower rpms and the
change of driving characteristics for wheels are less likely to spin.
which you may not be prepared.
i
The last selected program
mode (C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted.
205
Controls in detail
! The steering wheel gearshift buttons are Downshifting

Allow engine to warm up under low located to the left and right of the steering
load use. Do not place full load on the wheel.
Warning! G
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
Shift into reverse gear R or park in order to obtain braking action. This could
position P only when the vehicle is result in drive wheel slip and reduced
stopped. vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
왘 Briefly press the inside 1 of one of the
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
buttons on the steering wheel.
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz 1 Button, inside: downshift The transmission will shift to the next
Limited Warranty. 2 Button, outside: upshift lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously limits
i the gear range of the transmission
You cannot shift with the steering (컄 page 202).
wheel gearshift buttons when the
transmission in position P, N or R. Upshifting
왘 Briefly press the outside 2 of one of
the buttons on the steering wheel.
206
Controls in detail
The transmission will shift to the next Emergency operation (Limp Home
higher gear as permitted by the shift Mode)
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-
transmission. sponsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
Canceling gear range limit likely operating in limp home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
왘 Press and hold the outside 2 of one of
gear and reverse gear can be selected.
the buttons on the steering wheel
until D reappears in the multifunction 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
display. 왘 Shift to park position P.
The transmission will shift from the current 왘 Turn off the engine.
gear range directly to gear range D.
왘 Wait at least 10 seconds before
Shifting into optimal gear range restarting.
왘 Press and hold the inside 1 of one of 왘 Restart the engine.

the buttons on the steering wheel. 왘 Shift to drive position D (for second
The transmission will automatically select gear) or reverse gear R.
the gear range suited for optimal 왘 Have the transmission checked at an
acceleration and deceleration. This will authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
involve shifting down one or more gears. Center as soon as possible.
207
Controls in detail
Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers, i Rear view mirrors

see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 59). The headlamps will automatically be
For more information on setting the rear
cleaned when you have
Headlamp cleaning system* view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 47).
앫 switched on the headlamps
The button is located on the left side of the and Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
dashboard. position
앫 operated the windshield wipers
with windshield washer fluid
fifteen times
When you switch off the ignition, the
counter resets.
For information on filling up the washer

reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system*” (컄 page 352).
1 Headlamp washer button 1 Lever
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). 왘 Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night
position by moving lever 1 towards
왘 Press button 1.
the windshield.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
high-pressure water jet.
208
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors* !

The reflection brightness of the exterior
Warning! G Electrolyte drops coming into contact
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and with the vehicle paint finish can be
The auto-dimming function does not react if
the interior rear view mirror will respond completely removed only while in the
incoming light is not aimed directly at sen-
automatically to glare when liquid state and by applying plenty of
sors in the interior rear view mirror.
water.
앫 the ignition is switched on The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
the sensor in the interior rear view react, for example, when transporting cargo Warning! G
mirror which covers the rear window.
Glare can endanger you and others. Exercise care when using the passen-
The rear view mirror will not react if
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
앫 reverse gear R is engaged surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
앫 the interior light is turned on Warning! G for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may interior rear view mirror or glance over your
escape from the mirror housing if the mirror shoulder before changing lanes.
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
209
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror 왘 If the passenger-side exterior rear view
parking position* mirror is not selected, press button 2.
Follow these steps to activate the exterior The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
rear view mirror parking position, so that previous stored driving position:
the passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
앫 when you switch off the ignition
ror will be turned downward to the stored
position. 앫 10 seconds after you have put the
automatic transmission out of reverse
왘 Make sure that you have stored a park- gear R
ing position for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror (컄 page 146). 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror Approximately 15 seconds later, the
button indicator lamp in button 2 goes out.
왘 Make sure the Mirror adjustment
parking aid function in the 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view 앫 immediately once your vehicle exceeds
Convenience submenu of the control mirror button a speed of approximately
system is set to on (컄 page 190). 왘 Set the automatic transmission in 6 mph (10 km/h)
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 53). reverse gear R. 앫 immediately when you press button 1
The passenger-side exterior rear view for driver’s side exterior rear view
i mirror turns downward to the stored mirror
With the automatic transmission in reposition (컄 page 146) if the passen-
verse gear R, the previously selected i
ger-side exterior rear view mirror is se-
rear view mirror is activated. The indi- lected. With the automatic transmission in re-
cator lamp in the respective button verse gear R, you can deactivate the
comes on. The indicator lamp in button 2 should exterior rear mirror parking position by
come on when you select reverse pressing button 1 or activate it by
gear R. pressing button 2. The indicator lamp
of the selected button is on.
210
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Power folding exterior rear view Synchronizing exterior rear view Folding the exterior rear view mirrors
mirrors* mirrors in and out manually
The power folding rear view mirrors may i
! have to be synchronized after the vehicle
The exterior rear view mirrors can vi-
Before you drive the vehicle through an battery has been disconnected or dis-
brate if they are not folded out com-
automatic car wash, fold the exterior charged. If the exterior rear view mirrors
pletely.
rear view mirrors in. Otherwise they do not fold properly upon locking or un-
may get damaged. locking the vehicle although the corre-
sponding function in the control system is The button is located on the door control
activated (컄 page 191), do the following: panel.
Folding the exterior rear view mirrors
in and out automatically 왘 Fold each exterior rear view mirror in
When the corresponding function in the completely (컄 page 212).
control system is activated (컄 page 191): 왘 Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
앫 The exterior rear view mirrors automat- completely (컄 page 212).
ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is When the exterior rear view mirrors fold
locked from the outside. properly upon locking the vehicle, the exte-
앫 The exterior rear view mirrors automat- rior mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise
ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is repeat the above steps.
unlocked and the driver’s or front pas-
1 Button for folding exterior rear view
senger door are subsequently opened.
mirrors in and out
211
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Folding in ! Sun visors

왘 Briefly press button 1. If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the The sun visors protect you from sun glare
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in. while driving.
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
i from the front) press button 1 to fold
If you are driving at more than approxi-
mirrors in, then press button 1 again Warning! G
to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirrors
mately 30 mph (47 km/h), you will not
by hand as this may damage the adjust- Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
be able to fold the exterior mirrors in.
ment mechanism. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
Folding out The mirror housing is then properly while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
positioned and you can adjust the mir- can endanger you and others.
왘 Briefly press button 1 again. ror in the usual manner.
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
212
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Vanity mirror 왘 Swing sun visor 1 down.

왘 Swing sun visor 1 down. 왘 Disengage sun visor 1 from
mounting 7 (컄 page 213).
왘 Flip up cover 4 to access vanity
mirror 5. 왘 Pivot sun visor 1 to the side.
Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on. !
왘 After using vanity mirror 5, flip down To avoid damage to vanity mirror
cover 4. cover 4 (컄 page 213), make sure it is
왘 Swing sun visor 1 up. closed before pivoting sun visor 1 to
1 Sun visor the side.
2 Additional sun visor* Glare through a side window
3 Mirror lamp 왘 Adjust sun visor 1 by pushing or pull-
4 Vanity mirror cover ing in the direction of the arrows.
5 Vanity mirror 왘 Swing down additional sun visor* 2
6 Holder for gas cards down when you experience additional
7 Mounting glare through the windshield.
Glare through the windshield
왘 Swing sun visor 1 down.
왘 Make sure sun visor 1 is properly en-
gaged in mounting 7.
1 Sun visor
왘 When you do not experience glare any- 2 Additional sun visor*
more, swing sun visor 1 up.
213
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear door window sunshade* ! Third-row sunshade*

Always guide the sunshade. Do not let
it snap back abruptly, as the retractor
could be damaged.
!
With the sunshade raised and the
respective door window open, the sun-
shade could disengage and snap back
when driving at high vehicle speeds,
e.g. on highways, and damage the
1 Holder retractor. You should therefore always 1 Clip
2 Tab either close the door window or lower 2 Mounting
왘 To raise sunshade, pull on tab 2 and the sunshade when driving at high 왘 Insert clips 1 into mountings 2.
engage it in holder 1. speed.
왘 Press on clips 1 to engage in mount-
왘 To lower sunshade, disengage tab 2 ings 2.
from holder 1 and guide retraction.
214
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster Deactivating !

왘 Press button 3 again. If the rear window defroster switches
The rear window defroster uses a large off too soon and the indicator lamp
amount of power. To keep battery drain to The indicator lamp on the button goes
starts flashing, too many electrical con-
a minimum, switch off the defroster as out.
sumers are operating simultaneously
soon as the rear window is clear. The de- and there is insufficient voltage in the
froster is automatically deactivated after
Warning! G battery. The system responds automat-
approximately 6 to 17 minutes of ically by switching the rear window de-
operation depending on the outside tem- Any accumulation of snow and ice should be froster off.
perature. removed from the rear window before driv-
As soon as the battery has sufficient
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
Activating voltage, the rear window defroster
endangering you and others.
switches back on automatically.
왘 Press button 1 on the climate con-
trol panel (컄 page 218) or the automat-
ic climate control* panel (컄 page 232).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
215
Controls in detail
Climate control
216
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Side air vent, adjustable i

2 Thumbwheel for air volume control For draft-free ventilation, move the
for left side and door air vent sliders for the center vents 3 and 4
to the middle position.
3 Left center air vent, adjustable
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
for right center air vent
for right side and door air vent
8 Side air vent, adjustable
9 Door air vent, fixed
a Climate control panel
b Door air vent, fixed
217
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Temperature control, left 9 Air distribution (directs air through

2 Air distribution and air volume center and side air vents)
(automatic, manual) a Air distribution (directs air through
3 Front defroster the footwells and side vents)
b Air volume display
0 USA only
c Decreasing air volume
P Canada only
d Rear window defroster
4 Increasing air volume
1 USA only
5 Air distribution (directs air through
the windshield and side air vents) F Canada only
6 Rear air conditioning on/off e Air recirculation
: USA only f Interior temperature sensor
< Canada only g Climate control on/off
7 Temperature control, right
8 AC cooling on/off (A/C)
Residual heat/ventilation (REST)
218
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenev- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i
er the engine is running. You can operate odors are filtered out before outside air en- Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu-
the climate control system in either the ters the passenger compartment through tion) may require replacement of the fil-
automatic or manual mode. The system the air distribution system. ter before its scheduled interval. A
cools or heats the interior depending on clogged filter will reduce the air volume
The air conditioning will not engage (no
the selected interior temperature and the to the interior.
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
current outside temperature.
(컄 page 227). If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off, see
Warning! G Warning! G “Summer opening feature”
(컄 page 251). The climate control will
When operating the climate control, the air
Follow the recommended settings for heat- then adjust the interior temperature to
that enters the passenger compartment
ing and cooling given on the following pag- the set value much faster.
through the air vents can be very hot or very
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
cold (depending on the set temperature). Keep the air intake grille in front of the
impairing visibility and endangering you and
This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro- windshield free of snow and debris.
others.
tected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between un-
protected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
controls (컄 page 218) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in
the immediate area of unprotected skin.
219
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating the climate control Deactivating rear climate control i

system You can also switch on and off the rear
You can switch on and off the rear climate
control using the climate control panel in climate control by pressing the respec-
Deactivating the front. tive button on the rear climate control
panel (컄 page 229).
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 218).
Deactivating
i 왘 Press button : on the front climate For more information on rear climate con-
When the air conditioning is switched control panel (컄 page 218). trol, see “Rear climate control”
off, the outside air supply and circula- (컄 page 228).
tion are also switched off. Only choose
comes on.
this setting for a short time. Otherwise
the windows could fog up.
Reactivating
Reactivating 왘 Press button : on the front climate

control panel (컄 page 218).
왘 Press button U (컄 page 218).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
i out. The rear climate control is adjust-
You can also press button ´ ed automatically.
(컄 page 218) on the climate control
panel.
If you press button 0 (컄 page 218)
to reactivate the climate control sys-
tem, the defrosting mode is activated.
220
Controls in detail
Climate control
Operating the climate control system Activating Deactivating

in automatic mode
왘 Press button U (컄 page 218) while 왘 Press button or Q
the engine is running. (컄 page 218).
i
The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the U button
When operating the climate control
comes on. The air volume and air distri- goes out. The automatic operation of
system in automatic mode, you will
bution are adjusted automatically. air volume switches off. The selected
only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
blower speed is shown in the air
ture, air volume and air distribution. 왘 Use temperature controls 1 and 7
volume display b (컄 page 218).
(컄 page 218) to separately adjust the
In automatic mode, cooling with dehu-
air temperature on each side of the or
midify is switched on. This function can
passenger compartment.
be switched off if necessary 왘 Press air distribution button 5, 9,
(컄 page 227). The interior air temperature is adjusted or a (컄 page 218).
automatically.
The indicator lamp on the button U
i goes out. The automatic operation of
air distribution switches off.
The settings for the passenger side are
also used for the rear passenger com-
partment.
221
Controls in detail
Climate control
Setting the temperature Adjusting air distribution Adjusting air volume
Use temperature controls 1 and 7 Press air distribution button 5, 9, or a Five blower speeds are available.
(컄 page 218) to separately adjust the air (컄 page 218) to adjust the air distribution.
왘 Press button to decrease or
temperature on each side of the passenger
The following symbols are found on the button Q to increase air volume
compartment. You should raise or lower
buttons: (컄 page 218) to the desired level.
the temperature setting in small incre-
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). Symbol Function The indicator lamp on button U
The climate control will adjust to the set (컄 page 218) goes out. The automatic
a Directs air through the center operation of air volume switches off.
temperature as fast as possible. and side air vents
The selected blower speed is shown in
Increasing Z Directs air to the windshield the air volume display
and side air vents b (컄 page 218).
왘 Turn temperature control 1 and/or
7 (컄 page 218) slightly clockwise.
Y Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents Adjusting air volume for the center and
The climate control system will corre- side air vents
spondingly adjust the interior air tem- 왘 Press the desired air distribution
perature. button 5, 9, or a (컄 page 218). Opening the center air vents
왘 Turn thumbwheels 5 and 6
Decreasing The indicator lamp on the button U
goes out. (컄 page 216) upward.
왘 Turn temperature control 1 and/or
The corresponding center air vents on
7 (컄 page 218) slightly counterclock-
the left and right are open.
wise.
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
222
Controls in detail
Climate control
Closing the center air vents Front defroster The climate control switches to the follow-
ing functions automatically:
You can use this setting to defrost the
(컄 page 216) downward. 앫 maximum blower speed and heating
windshield, for example if it is iced up. You
The corresponding center air vents on power
can also use it to defog the windshield and
the left and right are closed. side windows. 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the
front side windows (side air vents must
Opening the side air vents i be open)
Keep this setting selected only until the
왘 Turn thumbwheels 2 and 7 앫 the air conditioning compressor
windshield or the side windows are
(컄 page 216) upward. switches on at outside temperatures
clear again.
above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
The corresponding side air vents on the
air-drying
left and right are open. Activating
Closing the side air vents 왘 Press button 0 (컄 page 218). Deactivating
The indicator lamp on the button 왘 Press button 0 (컄 page 218) once
comes on. more.
(컄 page 216) downward.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
left and right are closed.
The previous settings are in effect
again. The air conditioning compressor
remains switched on.
i
To switch off, you can also press
button ´ or U (컄 page 218).
223
Controls in detail
Climate control
Windshield fogged on the outside The climate control switches automatically Air recirculation mode
to the following functions:
i Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
앫 maximum blower speed and heating
Keep this setting selected only until the unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
power
windshield is clear again. from the outside (e.g. before driving
앫 air flows onto the windshield and the through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on front side windows (side air vents must intake of outside air and recirculates the
(컄 page 59). be open) air in the passenger compartment.
왘 Press button 0 (컄 page 218). 앫 the air conditioning compressor

switches on at outside temperatures Warning! G
comes on. air-drying Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger-
ing you and others. If the windows begin to
If the automatic air distribution is switched
fog on the inside, switching off the air
off:
recirculation mode immediately should clear
왘 Press air distribution button 9 or a interior window fogging. If interior window
(컄 page 218). fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 226) is activated, or
press button 0.
224
Controls in detail
Climate control
Activating i
왘 Press button : (컄 page 218).
Warning! G If you press and hold button :, the
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
The indicator lamp on the button Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding
or tilt/sliding panel* will close.
comes on. sunroof* or tilt/sliding panel* if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
i opening or closing procedure. i
The air recirculation mode is activated In case the procedure causes potential dan- To cool the interior as fast as possible,
automatically at high outside tempera- ger: the climate control automatically
tures. switches to air recirculation. The indi-
Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding sun-
The indicator lamp on button : is cator lamp on button : is not lit
roof*: The closing of the windows can be im-
not lit when the air recirculation mode when the air recirculation mode has
mediately halted by pressing or pulling the
is switched on automatically. been switched on automatically.
respective window switch. The closing of the
A quantity of outside air is added after tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately
approximately 30 minutes. halted by moving the switch for the tilt/slid-
ing sunroof* in any direction.
If you have turned off the air condition-
ing (컄 page 226) or the outside The closing of the windows and the
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
air recirculation mode will not switch again pressing and holding the : button.
on automatically. Vehicles with panorama roof*: The closing
of the windows and tilt/sliding panel* can
be immediately halted by releasing
the : button.
225
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating button : once the opening proce- Air conditioning

왘 Press button :. dure has begun. The windows and/or
the tilt/sliding sunroof* (or tilt/sliding The air conditioning is operational while
The indicator lamp on the button goes panel*) continue opening until they the engine is running and cools the interior
out. have reached their previous position. air to the temperature set by the operator.
In addition, the air conditioning dehumidi-
i A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof* fies the interior air at outside temperatures
The air recirculation mode is (or tilt/sliding panel*) will only return above 41°F (5° C) and helps prevent
deactivated automatically to its previous position if it has not window fogging.
been moved to another position using
앫 after 5 minutes if the outside the respective window switch or i
temperature is below tilt/sliding sunroof* (or tilt/sliding
approximately 41°F (5°C) Condensation may drip out from under-
panel*) switch after it was closed with neath the vehicle. This is normal and
앫 after 5 minutes if the air condition- button :. not an indication of a malfunction.
ing and air-drying is turned off A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof (or
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside tilt/sliding panel*) that was moved will
temperature is above remain in its current position if Warning! G
approximately 41°F (5°C) button : is used to re-open the re-
maining windows or tilt sliding sun- If you turn off the cooling function, the
roof* (or tilt/sliding panel*). vehicle will not be cooled when weather
i conditions are warm. The windows can fog
Press and hold button : for approx- up more quickly. Window fogging may
imately 2 seconds. The windows, impair visibility and endanger you and
and/or the tilt/sliding sunroof*, (or others.
tilt/sliding panel*) will return to their
previous position. You can release
226
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating Activating Residual heat and ventilation

It is possible to deactivate the air condi- Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
With the engine switched off, it is possible
tioning (cooling) function of the climate dehumidify the air with the air condition-
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
control system. The air in the vehicle will ing.
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 218) again. use of the residual heat produced by the
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 218). The indicator lamp on the button engine.
The indicator lamp on the button goes comes on. i
out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant How long the system will provide heat-
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs ing depends on
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
앫 the coolant temperature
! 앫 the battery voltage
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
Regardless of the temperature and air
on again, this indicates that the air con-
volume set on the climate control
ditioning is losing refrigerant. The com-
panel, an interior temperature is aimed
pressor has turned off.
at by 72°F (22°C) and the blower runs
Have the air conditioning checked at on low speed to protect the vehicle bat-
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz tery.
Light Truck Center.
227
Controls in detail
Climate control
Activating Rear climate control 1 Rear climate control on

왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38). (automatic mode)
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 218). 2 Air distribution (directs air through
the center air vents)
The indicator lamp on button comes
on. 3 Rear air conditioning off
4 Air distribution (directs air through
Deactivating the footwells and side air vents)
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 218) again. 5 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
The indicator lamp on the button goes 6 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
out.
Activating rear climate control
i
The residual heat is automatically i
turned off: The climate control must be switched
앫 when the ignition is switched on on (컄 page 220).
앫 after about 30 minutes 왘 Press button U.

앫 if the coolant temperature is too
low
Rear climate control panel comes on. The air volume and air distri-
앫 if the battery voltage drops bution are adjusted automatically.
228
Controls in detail
Climate control
i Adjusting air distribution Adjusting automatically

The temperature is adjusted according Use the air distribution controls 2 or 4 왘 Press button U.
to the settings for the front passenger to adjust the air distribution for the rear
The indicator lamp in the button comes
side made on the front climate control passenger compartment.
on. The air distribution is adjusted au-
panel (컄 page 222).
The symbols on the controls represent the tomatically.
following functions:
Deactivating rear climate control Adjusting air volume
왘 Press button ´. Symbol Function
The air volume for the rear zone corre-
The indicator lamp on the button goes Z Directs air to the center air sponds to the air volume settings for the
out. vents front passenger side. You can switch off
Y Directs air to the footwells and the air supply for the rear zone.
The cooling function switches off after
a short delay. the side air vents You can switch off the supplied amount of
air volume.
i Adjusting manually
왘 Press button ´.
Switch off the rear automatic climate 왘 Press the desired air distribution
control for improved cooling or heating control 2 or 4.
output in the front passenger compart-
ment. The indicator lamp in the U button
goes out.
You can also switch off the rear auto-
matic climate control from the front
passenger compartment (컄 page 220).
229
Controls in detail
230
Controls in detail
1 Side air vent, adjustable i

2 Thumbwheel for air volume control For draft-free ventilation, move the
for left side air vent sliders for the center air vents 3
and 4 to the middle position.
3 Left center air vent, adjustable
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
for left center air vent
for right center air vent
for right side air vent
8 Side air vent, adjustable
9 Front passenger door air vent, fixed
a Climate control panel
b Driver’s door air vent, fixed
231
Controls in detail
1 Temperature control, driver’s side 9 Temperature control, passenger side

2 Air distribution and air volume a Automatic climate control on/off
(automatic, manual) b Air distribution, passenger side
3 Air distribution, driver’s side c Air distribution, passenger side
4 Front defroster d AC cooling on/off
0 USA only Residual heat/ventilation
P Canada only e Display
5 Increasing air volume f Decreasing air volume
6 Rear window defroster g Air recirculation
1 USA only h Air distribution, driver’s side
F Canada only j Air distribution, driver’s side
7 Air distribution, passenger side k Interior temperature sensor
8 Rear climate control l Adopting driver’s side settings for all

zones
> USA only
™ Canada only
232
Controls in detail
The automatic climate control is a 3-zone With the help of a sun sensor, the climate
Warning! G intelligent climate control system. Your ve- control determines the relation of the sun
hicle interior is divided into 3 zones. to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
When operating the automatic climate con- the inside temperature for each individual
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- zone.
partment through the air vents can be very
hot or very cold (depending on the set tem- The automatic climate control is operation-
perature). This may cause burns or frostbite al whenever the engine is running. It cools
to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the vehicle’s interior according to the an-
the air vents. gle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the out-
side temperature and the selected
Always keep sufficient distance between un- temperature. You can operate the auto-
protected parts of the body and the air matic climate control in either the auto-
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution matic or manual mode.
controls (컄 page 232) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
the immediate area of unprotected skin. odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 242).
233
Controls in detail
Deactivating the climate control Reactivating

Warning! G system
왘 Press button U (컄 page 232).
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
Deactivating i
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
You can also press button ´
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, 왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 232) until
(컄 page 232) on the automatic climate
impairing visibility and endangering you and the display is cleared.
control panel.
others.
If you press button 0 (컄 page 232)
Warning! G to reactivate the automatic climate
i control system, the defrosting mode is
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu- When the automatic climate control is
activated.
tion) may require replacement of the fil- switched off, the outside air supply and cir-
ter before its scheduled interval. A culation are also switched off. Only choose
clogged filter will reduce the air volume this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
to the interior. windows could fog up, impairing visibility
and endangering you and others.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off, see
“Summer opening feature”
(컄 page 251). The automatic climate
control will then adjust the interior
temperature to the set value much fast-
er.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
234
Controls in detail
Deactivating the rear automatic Reactivating Operating the climate control system
climate control in automatic mode
왘 Press button > (컄 page 232).
You can switch on and off the rear auto-
The indicator lamp on button > You can switch the automatic climate con-
matic climate control with the automatic
comes on. trol system on and off separately for each
climate control panel in the front.
In display e (컄 page 232), you will see zone as needed.
Deactivating the > symbol followed by ON and i
MODE. The MODE display is cleared and
왘 Press button > (컄 page 232). the indicator lamp on button >
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
The indicator lamp on the button goes out after approximately
only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
comes on. 3 seconds.
ture, air volume and air distribution.
In display e (컄 page 232), you will see The rear automatic climate control
In automatic mode, cooling with dehu-
the > symbol followed by MODE for switches on.
midify is switched on. This function can
approximately 3 seconds.
i be switched off if necessary.
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 232).
You can switch on and off the rear au-
In display e (컄 page 232), you will see tomatic climate control by pressing the Activating
the > symbol followed by OFF. respective button on the rear climate 왘 Press button U (컄 page 232) while
The rear automatic climate control is control panel (컄 page 244). the engine is running.
switched off. AUTO appears in the display of control
For more information on rear air condition-
panel e (컄 page 232). Air volume and
ing, see “Rear automatic climate control”
air distribution are controlled separate-
(컄 page 244).
ly for each zone. 컄컄
235
Controls in detail
컄컄 왘 Use temperature controls 1 and 9 Setting the temperature Adjusting air distribution
(컄 page 232) to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the Use temperature controls 1 and 9 Use the air distribution buttons 3, h,
passenger compartment. (컄 page 232) to separately adjust the air or j for the driver’s side, or 7, b, or c
temperature on each side of the passenger (컄 page 232) for the passenger side to
The temperature of the interior is ad-
compartment. You should raise or lower separately adjust the air distribution on
justed automatically.
the temperature setting in small incre- each side of the passenger compartment.
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
Deactivating The following symbols are found on the
The automatic climate control will adjust
buttons:
왘 Press one button of the air distribution to the set temperature as fast as possible.
(컄 page 232) or press button Symbol Function
or Q (컄 page 232). Increasing
Driver’s Passen-
The AUTO display disappears in the 왘 Turn temperature control 1 and/or side ger side
display e (컄 page 232). 9 slightly clockwise.
6 Z Directs air to the
Depending on which button you press – The automatic climate control system windshield and
the air distribution button or the air vol- will correspondingly adjust the interior side air vents
ume button or Q – automatic air temperature.
7 a Directs air through
control of either the air distribution or
the center, side
air volume is switched off. Decreasing
and rear passen-
왘 Turn temperature control 1 and/or ger compartment
9 slightly counterclockwise. air vents
The automatic climate control system 8 Y Directs air to the
will correspondingly adjust the interior footwells and side
air temperature. air vents
236
Controls in detail
왘 Press the desired air distribution but- Opening the side air vents Adjusting air volume
ton (컄 page 232).
Five blower speeds are available.
The indicator lamp on the button goes (컄 page 230) downward.
out. 왘 Press button to decrease or
button Q to increase air volume
left and right are open.
Adjusting the air distribution for the (컄 page 232) to the desired level.
center and side air vents The indicator lamp on button U
Closing the side air vents
goes out.
Opening the center air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 2 and 7
(컄 page 230) downward. The AUTO display disappears in the
왘 Turn thumbwheels 5 and 6 display e (컄 page 232) and the auto-
(컄 page 230) upward. The corresponding side air vents on the
matic mode is switched off. The select-
left and right are closed.
The corresponding center air vents on ed blower speed appears in the
the left and right are open. display e (컄 page 232).
Closing the center air vents

(컄 page 230) downward.
The corresponding center air vents on
the left and right are closed.
237
Controls in detail
Front defroster The air conditioning switches to the follow- Windshield fogged on the outside
ing functions automatically:
You can use this setting to defrost the i
앫 maximum blower speed and heating
windshield, such as when it is iced up. You Keep this setting selected only until the
power
can also use it to defog the windshield and windshield is clear again.
side windows. 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the
front side windows (side air vents must 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on
i be open) (컄 page 59).
Keep this setting selected only until the
앫 the air conditioning compressor 왘 Press button U (컄 page 232).
windshield or the side windows are
switches on at outside temperatures
clear again. AUTO appears in the display of control
When the defrost setting has been se- air-drying panel e (컄 page 232). Air volume and
lected, only the rear window defroster air distribution are controlled separate-
can be switched on. No other settings Deactivating ly for each zone.
are possible. If the automatic air distribution and air vol-
왘 Press button 0 (컄 page 232).
ume are switched off:
Activating The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off. 왘 Press buttons 8 and Y
왘 Press button 0 (컄 page 232). (컄 page 232).
The previous settings are once again in
The indicator lamp on the button effect.
comes on.
i
To switch off, you can also press
button ´ or U (컄 page 232).
238
Controls in detail
Maximum cooling MAX COOL Air recirculation mode Activating

왘 Press button : (컄 page 232).
If the air distribution control as well as the Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
airflow volume control are set to U and unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle The indicator lamp on the : button
there is a high need for cooling, the from the outside (e.g. before driving comes on.
MAX COOL function is activated. through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
“MAX COOL” appears in the front and rear intake of outside air and recirculates the i
display. air in the passenger compartment. The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside tempera-
This provides the fastest possible cooling
tures.
of the vehicle interior (when windows and Warning! G
tilt/sliding sunroof* or tilt/sliding panel* The indicator lamp on button : is
are closed). Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger- not lit when the air recirculation mode
ing you and others. If the windows begin to is automatically switched on.
fog on the inside, switching off the air A quantity of outside air is added after
recirculation mode immediately should clear approximately 30 minutes.
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air If you have turned off the air condition-
conditioning (컄 page 241) is activated, or ing (컄 page 241) or the outside
press button 0. temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
239
Controls in detail
i Deactivating
Warning! G If you press and hold button :, the 왘 Press button : (컄 page 232).
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding The indicator lamp on the : button
or tilt/sliding panel* will close.
sunroof* or tilt/sliding panel* if there is the goes out.
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure. i i
In case the procedure causes potential dan- To cool the interior as fast as possible, The air recirculation mode is
ger: the automatic climate control automat- deactivated automatically
ically switches to air recirculation. The 앫 after five minutes if the outside
Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding sun-
indicator lamp on button : is not lit temperature is below
roof*: The closing of the windows can be im-
when the system switches to air recir- approximately 41°F (5°C)
mediately halted by pressing or pulling the
culation automatically.
respective window switch. The closing of the 앫 after five minutes if the air condi-
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately tioning and air-drying is turned off
halted by moving the switch for the tilt/slid-
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside
ing sunroof* in any direction.
temperature is above
The closing of the windows and the approximately 41°F (5°C)
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
again pressing and holding the : button.
Vehicles with panorama roof*: The closing
of the windows and tilt/sliding panel* can
be immediately halted by releasing
the : button.
240
Controls in detail
i A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof (or Air conditioning

Press and hold button : for approx- tilt/sliding panel*) that was moved will
remain in its current position if The cooling function, only operational
imately 2 seconds. The windows,
button : is used to re-open the re- when the engine is running, cools the vehi-
and/or the tilt/sliding sunroof*, (or
maining windows or tilt sliding sun- cle down to the selected interior tempera-
tilt/sliding panel*) will return to their
roof* (or tilt/sliding panel*). ture. The cooling function also
previous position. You can release
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
button : once the opening proce-
At outside temperatures above 79°F thereby preventing the windows from fog-
dure has begun. The windows and/or
(26°C) the system will not automatically ging up.
the tilt/sliding sunroof* (or tilt/sliding
panel*) continue opening until they switch back to outside air. A quantity of
i
have reached their previous position. outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes. Condensation may drip out from under-
A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof* neath the vehicle. This is normal and
(or tilt/sliding panel*) will only return not an indication of a malfunction.
to its previous position if it has not
been moved to another position using
the respective window switch or Warning! G
tilt/sliding sunroof* (or tilt/sliding
panel*) switch after it was closed with If you turn off the cooling function, the
button :. vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
241
Controls in detail
Deactivating Activating Using driver-side settings for all tem-

perature zones
It is possible to deactivate the air condi- Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
tioning (cooling) function of the automatic dehumidify the air with the air condition-
You can use the settings of the driver’s
climate control system. The air in the vehi- ing.
side, such as temperature, air volume and
cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu-
왘 Press button 9 again. air distribution, for all temperature zones.
midified.
The indicator lamp on the button These settings only need to be made once
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 232). comes on. and the climate control system will auto-
The indicator lamp on the button goes matically regulate the settings for all tem-
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant perature zones quickly and comfortably.
out. The cooling function switches off
R-134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
after a short delay.
which are harmful to the ozone layer. Activating
! 왘 Adjust the temperature, air volume and
If the air conditioning cannot be turned air distribution (컄 page 232).
on again, this indicates that the air 왘 Press button ; (컄 page 232).
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned off. The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz The driver-side settings are used for all
Light Truck Center. temperature zones.
242
Controls in detail
Deactivating Residual heat and ventilation Activating

왘 Press button ; (컄 page 232) again. 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38).
With the engine switched off, it is possible
The indicator lamp on the button goes to continue to heat or ventilate the interior 왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 232).
out. for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes The indicator lamp on the button
use of the residual heat produced by the comes on.
i engine.
If you manually set the temperature, air
i Deactivating
volume or air distribution for the pas-
senger side or the rear passenger com- How long the system will provide heat- 왘 Press button 9.
partment when the MONO setting is ing depends on The indicator lamp on the button goes
active, the MONO setting will be out.
앫 the coolant temperature
switched off.
앫 the battery voltage i
Regardless of the temperature and air The residual heat is automatically
volume set on the automatic climate turned off:
control panel, an interior temperature 앫 when the ignition is switched on
is aimed at by 72°F (22°C) and the
blower runs on low speed to protect 앫 after about 30 minutes
the vehicle battery. 앫 if the coolant temperature is too
low
앫 if the battery voltage drops
243
Controls in detail
Rear automatic climate control 1 Increase air volume Activating rear air conditioning
The control panel is located in the rear cen- 2 Air distribution and air volume i
ter console. (automatic, manual) The climate control must be switched
3 Air distribution (directs air through on (컄 page 234).
the side air vents
4 Right rear center air vent, adjustable 왘 Press button U.
5 Air distribution (directs air through The indicator lamp on the button
the footwells and side air vents) comes on. The temperature, air vol-
ume, and air distribution are adjusted
6 Rear automatic climate control
automatically.
on/off
7 Decrease air volume Deactivating rear air conditioning
8 Left rear center air vent, adjustable 왘 Press button ´.
9 Indicator lamps for air volume The indicator lamp on the button goes
settings out.
a Temperature control The cooling function switches off after
a short delay.
Rear automatic climate control panel
244
Controls in detail
i Adjusting manually Setting the temperature

Switch off the rear automatic climate 왘 Press the desired air distribution con- Use temperature control a (컄 page 244)
control for improved cooling or heating trol. to separately adjust the air temperature of
output in the front passenger compart- the rear passenger compartment.
The indicator lamp on button U
ment.
goes out. You should raise or lower the temperature
You can also switch off the rear auto- setting in small increments, preferably
matic climate control from the front Adjusting automatically starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic cli-
passenger compartment (컄 page 235). mate control will adjust to the set temper-
왘 Press button U.
ature as fast as possible.
Adjusting air distribution The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air distribution is adjust- i
Use the air distribution controls 3 or 5 ed automatically. The rear automatic climate control will
to adjust the air distribution for the rear
not cool the air when the air condition-
passenger compartment.
ing is switched off (컄 page 242).
The symbols on the controls represent the
following functions:
Symbol Function
Z Directs air to the center air
vents
Y Directs air to the footwells and
the side air vents
245
Controls in detail
Increasing the temperature Setting the temperature from the front i

automatic climate control panel You can also press the > button
왘 Turn temperature control a
(컄 page 244) slightly clockwise. You can adjust the temperature for the once more to switch back to the stan-
rear automatic climate control from the dard display.
The rear automatic climate control will
front panel.
correspondingly adjust the interior air
temperature for the rear passenger 왘 Make sure the front automatic climate Adjusting air volume
compartment. control is switched on (컄 page 234).
Adjusting manually
왘 Press button > (컄 page 232).
Decreasing the temperature Five blower speeds are available.
The indicator lamp on button >
왘 Turn temperature control a 왘 Press button to decrease or
comes on.
(컄 page 244) slightly counterclock- button Q to increase air volume to
wise. In display e (컄 page 232), you will see the desired level.
the > symbol followed by MODE.
The rear automatic climate control will The indicator lamp on the U button
correspondingly adjust the interior air 왘 Set the desired temperature for the goes out. The selected blower speed is
temperature for the rear passenger rear passenger compartment using shown by the indicator lamps for air
compartment. temperature control 9 (컄 page 232). volume settings 9 (컄 page 244).
After approximately 3 seconds after
the last adjustment, the display switch- Adjusting automatically
es back to its standard display and the 왘 Press button U.
indicator lamp on button > goes
out. The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume is adjusted
automatically.
246
Controls in detail
B-pillar air vents Adjusting air distribution Adjusting air volume

Air vents are located in both B-pillars. 왘 Move air vent slider 1 to the left, right, 왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 downwards to in-
up, or down to direct the air in the decrease the air volume.
sired direction. or
Air vents in third-row side trim 왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 upwards to de-
crease the air volume.
Air vents are located in the left and right
side trim below the hinged quarter win-
Adjusting air distribution
dows.
왘 Move air vent slider 2 to the left, right,
up, or down
The air is directed in the desired direc-
1 Air vent, adjustable
tion.
Adjusting air volume

왘 Turn thumbwheel 2 to the left to in-
crease the air volume.
or
1 Defrost air vent for hinged quarter
왘 Turn thumbwheel 2 to the right to de- window, fixed
crease the air volume. 2 Air vent, adjustable
247
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing

Warning! G
The door windows and the hinged quarter
windows are opened and closed electrical- When closing the windows, make sure that
ly. The switches for all door windows and there is no danger of anyone being harmed
the hinge quarter windows are located on by the closing procedure.
the driver’s door control panel Activate the override switch (컄 page 93)
(컄 page 34). The switches for the respec- when children are riding in the back seats of
tive door windows are located on the con- the vehicle. The children may otherwise in-
trol panels of the front passenger door and jure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped
the rear doors. The hinged quarter win- 1 Left front door window in the window opening.
dows can be operated from the driver’s 2 Right front door window
The closing of a door window can be imme-
seat only. 3 Right rear door window
diately halted by releasing the switch or, if
4 Hinged quarter windows
switch was pulled past the resistance point
5 Override switch (컄 page 93)
and released, by either pressing or pulling
6 Left rear door window
the respective switch.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the door win-
dow, the automatic reversal function will
stop the door window and open it slightly.
248
Controls in detail
Power windows
If a door window encounters an obstruction i Opening the door windows

that blocks its path in a circumstance where You can also open or close the win- 왘 Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 6
you are closing a door window by pulling and dows using the SmartKey, see “Sum- (컄 page 248) to the resistance point.
holding the switch, or by pressing and hold- mer opening feature” (컄 page 251)
The corresponding door window moves
ing button ‹ on the SmartKey, by press- and “Convenience closing feature”
downwards until you release the
ing and holding the lock button (vehicles (컄 page 252).
switch.
with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, the Depending on the current position, the
automatic reversal function will not operate. power windows may also open or close Closing the door windows
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the when the air recirculation button Ä
왘 Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 6
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* on the control panel of the climate con-
(컄 page 248) to the resistance point.
from starter switch, take it with you, and trol (컄 page 218) or automatic climate
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- control (컄 page 232) is pressed and The corresponding door window moves
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an held. upwards until you release the switch.
cle equipment can cause an accident i Warning! G
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-
switch, the windows can be operated ing the door window, and upward movement
of the door window is blocked by some ob-
앫 until you open the driver’s or front struction including but not limited to arms,
passenger door hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal
앫 for at least 5 minutes will not operate.
249
Controls in detail
Power windows
Fully opening the door windows If the upward movement of a door window Hinged quarter windows
(Express-open) is blocked during the closing procedure,
The switches for opening and closing the
the door window will stop and open slight-
왘 Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 6 hinged quarter windows are located on the
ly.
(컄 page 248) past the resistance point door control panel of the driver’s door
and release. 왘 Remove the obstruction. (컄 page 34).
The corresponding door window opens 왘 Pull the respective power window
completely. switch past the resistance point again
and release.
Fully closing the door windows
(Express-close) i
If the door window still does not close
왘 Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 6
when there is no obstruction, pull and
(컄 page 248) past the resistance point
hold the respective power window
and release.
switch. The door window will then close
The corresponding door window closes without the obstruction sensor
completely. function. 1 Hinged quarter windows: opening
2 Hinged quarter windows: closing
Warning! G Stopping door windows during
Opening
Express-operation
Driver’s door only: 왘 Press and release switch 1.
왘 Press or pull the respective door win-
If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled dow switch again. To stop the hinged quarter window:
past the resistance point and released, the
automatic reversal will not function. 왘 Press and release switch 1 once
more.
250
Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing Synchronizing the door windows Summer opening feature

왘 Press and release switch 2.
The door windows must be resynchronized If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
To stop the hinged quarter window: the vehicle before driving off by simulta-
앫 after the battery was disconnected
왘 Press and release switch 2 once neously
앫 if the door windows cannot be fully
more. 앫 opening the door windows
opened (Express-open) or closed
i (Express-close) 앫 opening the hinged quarter windows
When the obstruction sensor detects 앫 opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*
i
the hinged quarter window is blocked (or tilt/sliding panel*)
Each door window must be resynchro-
during the closing process, it will stop
nized separately.
and open slightly.
왘 Close all doors.
왘 Pull and hold door window switch 1,
2, 3, or 6 (컄 page 248).
Once a door window is closed com-
pletely, hold the respective switch for
approximately 3 seconds. 왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
The door window is synchronized. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle.
The SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim-
ity to the driver’s outside door handle.
251
Controls in detail
Power windows
Vehicles without tilt/sliding panel 왘 With the windows and roller sunblinds Convenience closing feature
fully opened, press and hold
왘 Press and hold button Œ on the
button Œ on the SmartKey or When locking the vehicle, you can close
SmartKey or SmartKey with
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* once the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and
more. (or tilt/sliding panel*) simultaneously.
the tilt/sliding sunroof* have reached
the desired position. The tilt/sliding panel opens.
왘 Release button Œ on the SmartKey 왘 Release button Œ on the SmartKey
Warning! G
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to in- or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to in-
When closing the windows and the
terrupt the opening procedure. terrupt the opening procedure.
tilt/sliding sunroof* (or tilt/sliding panel*),
make sure that there is no danger of anyone
Vehicles with tilt/sliding panel* If roller sunblinds are open: being harmed by the closing procedure.
왘 Press and hold button Œ on the
If roller sunblinds are closed: If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
SmartKey or SmartKey with lows:
왘 Press and hold button Œ on the KEYLESS-GO*.
SmartKey or SmartKey with 앫 Release button ‹ to stop the closing
The windows and the tilt/sliding panel procedure. To open, press and hold but-
KEYLESS-GO*.
begin to open after approximately ton Œ. To continue the closing proce-
The windows and roller sunblinds begin 1 second. dure after making sure that there is no
to open after approximately 1 second. danger of anyone being harmed by the
왘 Release button Œ on the SmartKey
closing procedure, press and hold but-
왘 Release button Œ on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to in- ton ‹.
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to terrupt the opening procedure.
interrupt the opening procedure.
252
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘 Press and hold button ‹ on the Vehicles with tilt/sliding panel*

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
앫 Release the lock button (컄 page 68) on KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and If tilt/sliding panel is closed:
the driver’s outside door handle to stop the tilt/sliding sunroof* are completely
the closing procedure. 왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
closed.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
앫 Pull on the driver’s outside door handle
왘 Release button ‹ on the SmartKey driver’s outside door handle
and hold firmly. The windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (or tilt/sliding pan- or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to in- (컄 page 251).
el*) will open for as long as the door terrupt the closing procedure.
The SmartKey or SmartKey with
handle is held but the door not opened. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim-
ity to the driver’s door handle.
왘 Press and hold the lock button on an
Vehicles without tilt/sliding panel
outside door handle (컄 page 68) until 왘 Press and hold button ‹ on the
왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or the windows and the tilt/sliding sun- SmartKey or SmartKey with
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the roof* are completely closed. KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and
driver’s outside door handle the roller sunblinds are completely
왘 Release the lock button on the outside
(컄 page 251). closed.
door handle to interrupt the closing
The SmartKey or SmartKey with procedure. 왘 Release button ‹ on the SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim- or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to in-
ity to the driver’s door handle. terrupt the closing procedure. 컄컄
253
Controls in detail
Power windows
컄컄 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If tilt/sliding panel is open: Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

왘 Press and hold the lock button on an 왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or 왘 Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (컄 page 68) until SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the outside door handle (컄 page 68) until
the windows and the roller sunblinds driver’s outside door handle the windows and the tilt/sliding panel*
are completely closed. (컄 page 251). are completely closed.
왘 Release the lock button on the outside The SmartKey or SmartKey with 왘 Release the lock button on the outside
door handle to interrupt the closing KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim- door handle to interrupt the closing
procedure. ity to the driver’s door handle. procedure.
왘 Press and hold button ‹ on the 왘 With the windows and the tilt/sliding
SmartKey or SmartKey with panel completely closed, press and
KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and hold the lock button on an outside door
the tilt/sliding panel* are completely handle (컄 page 68) once more.
closed.
The roller sunblinds close.
왘 Release button ‹ on the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to in-
terrupt the closing procedure.
왘 With the windows and the tilt/sliding
panel completely closed, press and
hold button ‹ on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* once
more.
The roller sunblinds close.
254
Controls in detail
왔 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Opening and closing With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and guard against sun rays. When sliding the
closed electrically. The switch for the sunroof open, the screen will also retract.
tilt/sliding sunroof is located on the over-
head control panel.
Sunroof switch
1 Push back to slide sunroof open
2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
4 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
255
Controls in detail
!
Warning! G The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may To avoid damaging the seals, do not
shatter. This may result in an opening in the transport any objects with sharp edges
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
roof. which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
sure that there is no danger of anyone being
sunroof.
harmed by the closing procedure. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an ob- their seat belts or not wearing them properly Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if
struction that blocks its path in a circum- may be thrown out of the opening. Such an there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
stance where you are closing the tilt/sliding opening also presents a potential for injury could result in malfunctions.
sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof for occupants wearing their seat belts prop- The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened
switch past the resistance point, or by erly as entire body parts or portions of them or closed manually should an electrical
pressing and holding button ‹ on the may protrude from the passenger compart- malfunction occur (컄 page 462).
SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock ment.
button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i
door handle, the automatic reversal function SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
You can also open or close the tilt/slid-
will not operate. from the starter switch, take it with you, and
ing sunroof using the SmartKey or the
The opening/closing procedure of the lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
KEYLESS-GO* function, see “Summer
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt- attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
opening feature” (컄 page 251) and
ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
“Convenience closing feature”
was moved past the resistance point and re- cle equipment can cause an accident
(컄 page 252).
leased, by moving the switch in any direc- and/or serious personal injury.
tion.
256
Controls in detail
i Fully opening (Express-open) and clos-

Depending on the current position, the ing (Express-close) Warning! G
tilt/sliding sunroofs may also open or 왘 To fully open or close the tilt/sliding If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an ob-
close when the air recirculation sunroof, move the switch past the re- struction that blocks its path in a circum-
button Ä on the control panel of the sistance point in the required stance where you are closing the tilt/sliding
climate control (컄 page 218) or auto- direction 1 or 2 (컄 page 255) and sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof
matic climate control (컄 page 232) is release. switch past the resistance point, or by
pressed and held.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes pressing and holding button ‹ on the
completely. SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof door handle, the automatic reversal function
Opening and closing during Express-open will not operate.
왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the 왘 Move the sunroof switch in any direc- The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof tion. tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-
switch to the resistance point in the ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch
required direction of arrows 1 to 4 The movement of the tilt/sliding sun-
was moved past the resistance point and re-
(컄 page 255). roof stops.
leased, by moving the switch in any direc-
왘 Release the sunroof switch when the i tion.
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the de- If the movement of the tilt/sliding sun-
sired position. roof is blocked during the closing pro-
cedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will
stop and reopen slightly.
257
Controls in detail
Synchronizing 왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main box.

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
synchronized 왘 Press and hold the sunroof switch in
the direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 255)
앫 after the battery has been
until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
disconnected or discharged
raised at the rear.
앫 after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
왘 Hold the sunroof switch in the direction
closed manually (컄 page 462)
of arrow 3 for approximately
앫 after a malfunction 1 second.
앫 if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open 왘 Open the tilt/sliding sunroof using the
smoothly Express-open feature (컄 page 257).
왘 Remove the fuse securing the If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens com-
tilt/sliding sunroof from the fuse box pletely, it is synchronized.
(컄 page 503).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
i completely:
For information on which fuse box con- 왘 Repeat the above steps.
tains the fuse for the power tilt/sliding
sunroof, see the fuse chart provided
with the vehicle tool kit (컄 page 455).
258
Controls in detail
왔 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Roller sunblinds for the panorama roof 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). Fully opening the roller sunblinds (Ex-
with power tilt/sliding panel press-open)
왘 To open or close the roller sunblinds,
move the roof panel switch to the resis- 왘 Move the roof panel switch past the re-
The tilt/sliding panel and the front and
tance point in the required direction of sistance point in direction of arrow 1
rear roller sunblinds are opened and
arrow 1 or 2. and release.
closed electrically. The switch for the
tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds is Release the roof panel switch when the The roller sunblinds opens completely.
located on the overhead control panel. roller sunblinds have reached the de-
sired position. Stopping the roller sunblinds during
The roller sunblinds only operate with the
Express-operation
tilt/sliding panel closed. The front and rear
roller sunblind cannot be operated individ- Warning! G 왘 Move the roof panel switch in any
ually. direction.
When closing the roller sunblinds, make
sure that no one is in danger of being injured
by the closing procedure. The closing of the
roller sunblinds can be immediately halted
by releasing the switch.
Roof panel switch

1 Open roller sunblinds
2 Close roller sunblinds
259
Controls in detail
Opening and closing the panorama roof

with power tilt/sliding panel Warning! G
The tilt/sliding panel is opened and closed When opening or closing the tilt/sliding pan-
electrically. The switch for the tilt/sliding el, make sure that there is no danger of any-
panel is on the overhead control panel. one being harmed by the opening or closing
procedure.
The tilt/sliding panel only operates with
the roller sunblinds opened. The opening procedure of the tilt/sliding
panel can be immediately halted by releas-
ing the switch or, if the switch was moved
past the resistance point and released, by
moving the switch in any direction.
The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
panel can be immediately halted by releas-
ing the switch.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is made out of glass. In the event of an
accident, the glass may shatter. This may re-
sult in an opening in the roof.
Roof panel switch
1 Push back to slide roof panel open
2 Push forward to slide roof panel closed
3 Push up to raise roof panel
4 Pull down to lower roof panel
260
Controls in detail
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing ! i

their seat belts or not wearing them properly To avoid damaging the seals, do not The tilt/sliding panel may also open
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an transport any objects with sharp edges when using the air recirculation
opening also presents a potential for injury which can stick out of the tilt/sliding button Ä on the control panel of the
for occupants wearing their seat belts prop- panel. climate control (컄 page 218) or auto-
erly as entire body parts or portions of them Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if matic climate control (컄 page 232).
may protrude from the passenger compart- there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
ment. could result in malfunctions. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
SmartKey or the SmartKey with Opening
i
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take 왘 Pull and hold the roof panel switch to
You can also open or close the tilt/slid-
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not resistance point in direction of
ing panel using the SmartKey or the
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or arrow 1 (컄 page 260).
KEYLESS-GO* function, see “Summer
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
opening feature” (컄 page 251) and Release the roof panel switch when the
pervised use of vehicle equipment can
“Convenience closing feature” tilt/sliding panel has reached the de-
cause an accident and/or serious personal
(컄 page 252). sired position.
injury.
Closing
왘 Press and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 260).
Release the roof panel switch when the
tilt/sliding panel has reached the de-
sired position.
261
Controls in detail
Raising Fully opening (Express-open) the pan- Synchronizing the panorama roof with
orama roof with tilt/sliding panel power tilt/sliding panel
You can raise the tilt/sliding panel at the
rear for better ventilation of the vehicle in- 왘 Pull the roof panel switch past the
The tilt/sliding panel and its roller sun-
terior. resistance point in direction of
blinds must be synchronized
arrow 1 (컄 page 260) and release.
왘 Press and hold the roof panel switch in
앫 after the battery has been
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 260). The tilt/sliding panel opens complete-
disconnected or discharged
ly.
Release the roof panel switch when the
앫 after a malfunction
tilt/sliding panel has reached the de-
Stopping the panorama roof with 앫 if the tilt/sliding panel does not open
sired position.
tilt/sliding panel during Express-open smoothly
Lowering 왘 Move the roof panel switch in any di-
rection. !
왘 Pull and hold the roof panel switch in Do not attempt to open or close the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 260) un- The tilt/sliding panel will stop in its cur- tilt/sliding panel before the tilt/sliding
til the tilt/sliding panel has lowered rent position. panel is properly synchronized. The
and closed completely. tilt/sliding panel could otherwise
lock-up in the open position.
If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be
closed or synchronized, see an autho-
Center or call Roadside Assistance
(컄 page 315).
262
Controls in detail
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38) and 왘 Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box. 왘 Push and hold the roof panel switch in
remove the SmartKey from the starter direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 260) un-
switch. til the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
왘 Push and hold the roof panel switch in
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 260) un-
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 260) for
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39). til the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
approximately 1 second.
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the 왘 Keep holding the roof panel switch in
왘 Open the tilt/sliding panel using the
starter switch in position 0, same as direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 260) for
with the SmartKey removed from the Express-open feature (컄 page 262).
approximately 1 second.
starter switch). The driver’s door then If the tilt/sliding panel opens com-
왘 Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
can be closed again. pletely, the roof is synchronized.
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 260) un-
왘 Remove the fuse securing the til the roller sunblinds are fully opened. If the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
tilt/sliding panel from the fuse box completely:
왘 Keep holding the roof panel switch in
(컄 page 504).
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 260) for 왘 Repeat the above steps.
i approximately 1 second.
For information on which fuse box con- 왘 Press and hold the roof panel switch in
tains the fuse for the power tilt/sliding direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 260) un-
panel, see the fuse chart provided with til the tilt/sliding panel is fully raised at
the vehicle tool kit (컄 page 455). the rear.
263
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de- Cruise control

scribed on the following pages: Warning! G
The cruise control automatically maintains
앫 Cruise control, with which the vehicle
the speed you set for your vehicle. The cruise control is a convenience system
can maintain a preset speed. designed to assist the driver during vehicle
The use of cruise control is recommended
앫 Airmatic* adjusts the vehicle suspen- operation. The driver is and must always
for driving at a constant speed for extend-
sion characteristics automatically and remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
ed periods of time. You can set or resume
controls the vehicle level. and for safe brake operation.
cruise control at any speed above 20 mph
앫 Parktronic*, which serves as a parking (30 km/h). Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic
assistant. and weather conditions make it advisable to
The cruise control function is operated by travel at a steady speed.
For information on the BAS, ABS, EBP, means of the cruise control lever.
4-ETS and ESP® driving systems, see “Driv- 앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
The cruise control lever is the uppermost ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
ing safety systems” (컄 page 97).
lever on the left-hand side of the steering because conditions do not allow safe
column (컄 page 22). driving at a steady speed.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫 Deactivate the cruise control when driv-
ing in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
264
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting current speed

Warning! G 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
The cruise control brakes automatically so speed.
that the set speed is not exceeded. The 왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
brake pedal is depressed automatically to control lever.
do this.
The current speed is set.
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a con-
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
venience system designed to assist the driv-
pedal.
er during vehicle operation. The driver is and
must always remain responsible for the ve- 1 Setting current or higher speed The cruise control is activated.
hicle’s speed and for safe brake operation. Adjustment in 1 mph or 5 mph
The last set speed appears in the multi-
increments (Canada: 1 km/h or
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in- function display for approximately
10 km/h)
cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob- 5 seconds.
2 Setting current or lower speed
jects stored in this area may impair pedal
Adjustment in 1 mph or 5 mph i
movement which could interfere with the
increments (Canada: 1 km/h or
braking ability of the cruise control system. On uphill grades, the cruise control
10 km/h)
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal may not be able to maintain the set
3 Canceling cruise control
- your foot could become caught. speed. Once the grade eases, the set
4 Resuming to last set speed
speed will be resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed with active
braking action. In addition, on longer
downhill grades the automatic trans-
mission will automatically downshift.
265
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Canceling cruise control i !

There are several ways to cancel the cruise The cruise control switches off auto- Setting the automatic transmission
control: matically when to N while driving cancels the cruise
control. However, the automatic trans-
왘 Step on the brake pedal. 앫 you step on the brake pedal
mission should not be set to N while
The cruise control is canceled. The last 앫 you depress the parking brake driving except to coast when the vehi-
speed set is stored for later use. pedal cle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy
or The cruise control also switches off au- roads).
tomatically when
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 265). 앫 the vehicle speed is below 20 mph i
(30 km/h) Depressing the accelerator pedal does
The cruise control is canceled. The last not deactivate the cruise control. After
speed set is stored for later use. 앫 the ESP® is in operation or switched brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the
off with the ESP® switch cruise control will resume the last
i (컄 page 101) speed set.
The last stored speed is canceled when
앫 you set the automatic transmission
you turn off the engine.
to N while driving
An acoustic warning sounds and the
message Cruise control off appears
in the multifunction display.
266
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed Adjustment in 5 mph 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever past
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments the resistance point in direction of
You can increase the speed in two stages.
arrow 1 (컄 page 265).
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) Warning! G The vehicle speed increases in incre-
increments ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
You can increase the vehicle speed in 5 mph
i (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When using i
The set value is increased in 1 mph this feature, keep in mind that it may take a The new speed is set and the vehicle
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each brief moment until the vehicle has reached will accelerate. Keep in mind that it
time you lift the cruise control lever to the set speed. may take a brief moment until the vehi-
the resistance point. Increase the vehicle speed to a value that cle has reached the set speed.
the prevailing road conditions permit. Other-
왘 Lift the cruise control lever to the resis- wise, sudden and unexpected acceleration Setting a lower speed
tance point in direction of arrow 1 of the vehicle could cause an accident You can reduce the speed in two stages.
(컄 page 265) and hold it up until the and/or serious injury to you and others.
desired speed is reached. i
왘 Release the cruise control lever. i When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the brake system will au-
The new speed is set. The set value is increased in 5 mph
tomatically brake the vehicle if the en-
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each
gine’s braking power does not brake
time you lift the cruise control lever
the vehicle sufficiently.
past the resistance point.
267
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) Adjustment in 5 mph 왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
increments (Canada: 10 km/h) increments down past the resistance point in direc-
tion of arrow 2.
i
The set value is decreased in 1 mph
Warning! G The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
You can decrease the vehicle speed in
time you press the cruise control lever i
5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When
down to the resistance point.
using this feature, keep in mind that it may The new speed is set and the vehicle
take a brief moment until the vehicle has will decelerate. Keep in mind that it
왘 Press the cruise control lever down to reached the set speed. may take a brief moment until the vehi-
the resistance point in direction of cle has reached the set speed.
Decelerate the vehicle speed to a value that
arrow 2 (컄 page 265) and hold it
the prevailing road conditions permit. Other-
down until the desired speed is
wise, sudden and unexpected deceleration
reached.
of the vehicle could cause an accident
왘 Release the cruise control lever. and/or serious injury to you and others.
The new speed is set.
i
The set value is decreased in 5 mph
time you press the cruise control lever
down past the resistance point.
268
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed AIRMATIC* Adaptive Damping System (ADS)*

(“Resume” function)
The fine tuning of the damping is depen-
AIRMATIC lets you set a suspension tuning
dent on:
and automatically optimizes your vehicle’s
Warning! G damping behavior and regulates the 앫 road surface conditions
vehicle level. The system consists of two 앫 your driving style
The speed stored in memory should only be
components:
set again if prevailing road conditions per- 앫 your personal settings
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration 앫 Suspension tuning:
differences arising from returning to the pre- Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* The ADS switch is located on the upper
set speed could cause an accident and/or (컄 page 269) part of the center console.
serious injury to you and others. 앫 Vehicle level control* (컄 page 270)
왘 Briefly pull the cruise control lever in di-

rection of arrow 4 (컄 page 265).
The cruise control resumes the last set
speed.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The last set speed appears in the multi- 1 ADS switch
function display for approximately 2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting
5 seconds. 3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting
269
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following settings are available: Vehicle level control*

앫 AUTO (for normal driving situations) The vehicle level control automatically
Warning! G
Indicator lamps 2 and 3 are off. regulates the ride height to Make sure that no one is near the wheel
앫 SPORT (for sporty driving) 앫 reduce fuel consumption housing or under the vehicle when you lower
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. the vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs
앫 improve driving safety
could become wedged into or under the
앫 COMF (for comfort driving)
Indicator lamp 3 comes on. i vehicle.
Changes to the vehicle level should be For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 53).
made while the vehicle is moving. The lowered with all doors and the tailgate
왘 Press ADS switch 1 repeatedly until vehicle will then reach the set level as closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door or
the desired suspension tuning is fast as possible. the tailgate is opened and will continue after
reached. the door is closed again.
The vehicle begins adjusting to the set
i
vehicle level as soon as the doors or tail-
The setting is stored when you turn off gate are Warning! G
the engine.
앫 unlocked
Adapt your speed and driving to possible
or changed driving behavior of the vehicle after
changing the vehicle level. The ESP® cannot
앫 opened or closed with the vehicle
prevent accidents, including those resulting
unlocked
from excessive speed. The ESP® cannot pre-
For major changes in vehicle level, the vent the natural laws of physics from acting
engine must be running. on the vehicle.
270
Controls in detail
Driving systems
! i Compared to the highway level, the vehicle

Keep in mind that in rough or uneven The activation threshold is defined by level changes by
roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower the set suspension tuning 앫 + 1.97 in (+ 50 mm) in raised level
level may cause the vehicle underbody (컄 page 269).
앫 +/- 0 in (+ 0 mm) in highway level
to come in contact with the road and
result in damage to the vehicle under- 앫 - 0.78 in (- 20 mm) in highspeed level
i
body. Always make sure the vehicle The vehicle lowers to highspeed level auto-
The high-speed level is not available
has sufficient ground clearance before matically when
when towing a trailer.
adjusting it to a lower level.
앫 the vehicles speed exceeds
Basic settings 70 mph (112 km/h)
!
Before jacking up the vehicle with There are two setting from which to 앫 the vehicles speed is between
equipment that lifts one or more of the choose: 60 mph (96 km/h) and
wheels completely off the ground, 앫 Raised level, for driving on rough roads 70 mph (112 km/h) for longer than 20
remove the SmartKey from the starter seconds
앫 Highway level, for driving on paved
switch.
roads in fair or better condition i
Obey local speed limits. Use prudent
! i driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
Please also note the information in the The third available level is the ing conditions.
section on towing (컄 page 499). highspeed level that is set automatical-
ly.
271
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Raised level The switch is located on the upper part of

the center console.
Only choose the raised level when the road
conditions permit. Otherwise:
앫 Fuel consumption may increase.
앫 Handling characteristics of the vehicle
may be unfavorable. When the raised level is reached, indicator
lamp 2 comes on continuously and the
i following message appears in the multi-
You can select the raised level at vehi- function display:
cle speeds of up to 25 mph (40 km/h).
At a higher vehicle speed, the message
n Level selection not permitted 1 Vehicle level control switch
appears in the multifunction display. 2 Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp 2 is off:
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 53).
왘 Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle i
adjusts to the raised level. The messages can be cleared by
The following message appears in the pressing button æ or ç on the
multifunction display while the level is multifunction steering wheel.
being set:
272
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Highway level ! When the highway level is reached, indica-

Keep in mind that in rough or uneven tor lamp 2 goes out and the following
왘 Close all doors and the tailgate.
roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower message appears in the multifunction dis-
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 53). play:
level may cause the vehicle underbody
The switch is located on the upper part of to come in contact with the road and
the center console. result in damage to the vehicle under-
body. Always make sure the vehicle
has sufficient ground clearance before
adjusting it to a lower level.
If indicator lamp 2 is on: i

왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 272). The messages can be cleared by
Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle pressing button æ or ç on the
adjusts to the highway level. multifunction steering wheel.
The following message appears in the

1 Vehicle level control switch multifunction display while the level is i
2 Indicator lamp being set: The vehicle level is set to highway level
automatically when the vehicle speed
is exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h).
273
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic* (Parking assist) The Parktronic system also deactivates

Warning! G when you set the automatic transmission
to position P or depress the parking brake
Warning! G Make sure no persons or animals are in the pedal.
area in which you are maneuvering. Other-
wise you run the risk of causing injury. The Parktronic system monitors the sur-
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
need for extreme care. The responsibility The Parktronic system is an electronic aid rear bumper.
during parking and other critical maneuvers designed to assist the driver during
always rests with the driver. parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly
Special attention must be paid to objects indicates the relative distance between the
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes vehicle and an obstacle.
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road The Parktronic system is automatically
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by activated when you switch on the ignition,
the system and can damage the vehicle. release the parking brake, and set the
The operational function of the Parktronic automatic transmission to position D, R,
system can be affected by dirty sensors, or N.
especially at times of snow and ice. See
The Parktronic system deactivates at
“Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors”
vehicle speeds exceeding approximately 1 Sensors in the front bumper
(컄 page 399).
11 mph (18 km/h). At lower vehicle
Interference caused by other ultrasonic speeds, the Parktronic system turns on
signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car again.
wash, or the air brakes of trucks) can cause
the system to send erratic indications, and
should be taken into consideration.
274
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors !

To function properly, the sensors must be During parking maneuvers, pay special
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the attention to objects located above or
sensors regularly, being careful not to below the height of the sensors
scratch or damaging the sensors, see (e.g. planters or trailer hitches).
“Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors” The Parktronic system will not detect
(컄 page 399). such objects at close range and dam-
age to your vehicle or the object may
result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside
Front sensors sources (e.g. working jackhammers,
car wash or the air brakes of trucks)
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) may impair the operation of the
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) Parktronic system.
Rear sensors
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)

Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
275
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Minimum distance Warning indicators Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic
ative distance between the sensors and an
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) system is ready when the yellow readiness
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
indicators 3 are illuminated.
front area is located above the center air
If the system detects an obstacle in this vents in the dashboard. The warning indi- The current transmission position deter-
range, all the distance warning segments cator for the rear area is located in the rear mines which warning indicator will be
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If passenger compartment under the roof. activated.
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance may no Transmission Warning indicator
longer be indicated by the system. position
D Front area activated
R or N Front and rear area
activated
P Neither activated
Front area warning indicator

1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
3 Readiness indicators
276
Controls in detail
Driving systems
As your vehicle approaches an object, one Switching the Parktronic system Switching off the Parktronic system
or more distance segments will illuminate, on/off
왘 Press Parktronic switch 1.
depending on the distance. When the
You can switch off the Parktronic system
seventh distance segment illuminates, you Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
manually.
have reached the minimum distance.
The Parktronic switch is located in the Switching on the Parktronic system
앫 Front area: An intermittent acoustic upper part of the center console.
warning will sound as the first red 왘 Press Parktronic switch 1 once more.
distance segment illuminates and a Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for i
the second red distance segment. The The Parktronic system switches on
signal is canceled when the automatic automatically when you switch on the
transmission is set to position P or the ignition (컄 page 38).
parking brake is set.
앫 Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red
distance segment illuminates and a 1 Parktronic switch
constant acoustic warning lasting a 2 Indicator lamp
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is set to position D, P, or
the parking brake is set.
277
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system malfunction 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38).

If only the red distance segments illumi- 왘 Clean the Parktronic system sensors
nate and an acoustic warning sounds, (컄 page 399).
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will auto-
matically switch off after 20 seconds and or
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch 왘 Check the Parktronic system operation
comes on. at another location to rule out interfer-
왘 Have the Parktronic system checked ence from outside radio or ultrasonic
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light signals.
Truck Center as soon as possible.
If only the red distance segments illumi-
nate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g.
slush, snow or ice) or there is an interfer-
ence from other radio or ultrasonic signals
(e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or
the air brakes of trucks). The Parktronic
system will automatically switch off after
20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the
Parktronic switch comes on.
278
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Roof rack* !
Use only those roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Warning! G Follow manufacturer’s installation in-
structions. The vehicle could otherwise
Only use the roof rack when the basic carri-
be damaged.
er bars have been completely mounted. The
left and right rails are only stabilized by When loading the roof rack, make sure
means of the basic carriers being mounted. 앫 the tilt/sliding sunroof* (or
Follow the manufacturer’s installation tilt/sliding panel*) can be com-
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly pletely raised at the rear 1 Trim cover
attached roof rack system or its load could 왘 Flip roof trim covers 1 open.
앫 the tilt/sliding panel and the tail-
become detached from the vehicle.
gate can be completely opened 왘 Attach the roof rack to the attachment
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
points under roof trim covers 1.
220 lb (100 kg).
Follow roof rack manufacturer’s instal-
Take into consideration that when the roof
lation instructions.
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the For further information, inquire at your
vehicles without the roof rack loaded. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
279
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions The gross vehicle weight which is the

weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools,
spare wheel, installed accessories, pas-
Warning! G sengers, and luggage/cargo must never
exceed the load limit and the Gross Vehicle
Always fasten items being carried as secure- Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle as
ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and specified on the placard(s) located on the
fastening materials appropriate for the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 510). In addi-
weight and size of the load. tion, the load must be distributed in such a
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- way so that the weight on each axle never
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating
around inside the vehicle, and can cause in- (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items GVWR and GAWR for your vehicle are indi-
are securely fastened in the vehicle. cated on the certification label which can
be found on the driver’s door B-pillar
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
(컄 page 510).
sion or sudden maneuver, always use parti-
tion net when transporting cargo. For more information, see “Tire and Load-
Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open.
ing Information” (컄 page 357).
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may The handling characteristics of a fully load-
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon- ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
sciousness and death. tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
280
Controls in detail
Loading
Please pay attention to and comply with Cargo tie-down rings Cargo compartment
the following instructions when loading the
Four cargo tie-down rings are located in
vehicle and transporting cargo: Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo
the cargo compartment.
tie-down rings.
앫 Always place items being carried
against front or rear seat backrests, Carefully secure cargo by applying even
and fasten them as securely as possi- load on all rings with rope of sufficient
ble. strength to hold down the cargo.
앫 The heaviest portion of the cargo i
should always be kept as low as possi- While the partition net* (컄 page 290)
ble against front or rear seat backrests. will help protect you from smaller ob-
i jects, it cannot prevent the movement
of large, heavier objects into the pas-
The cargo compartment is the pre-
senger compartment in an accident. 1 Cargo tie-down ring
ferred place to carry objects. The
Such items must be properly secured
expanded cargo compartment
using the cargo tie-down rings in the
(컄 page 283) should only be used for
cargo compartment floor.
items which do not fit in the cargo com-
partment alone.
281
Controls in detail
Loading
Second seat-row Third seat-row Hooks

Two cargo tie-down rings are located in the Two cargo tie-down rings are located in the
Two hooks are located on the rear com-
footwell behind the driver’s and passenger footwell behind the second-row seats.
partment trim panels, one on each side.
seat.
1 Cargo tie-down ring

1 Hook
1 Cargo tie-down ring
Use the hooks to secure light weight items
only. The maximum permissible weight per
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg).
282
Controls in detail
Loading
Expanding cargo compartment Expanding cargo compartment in part

Warning! G
You can separately fold each seat of the Folding third-row seats
rear passenger compartment to expand Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open.
왘 Push in the head restraints of the
the cargo compartment. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon- third-row seats all the way
(컄 page 139).
G
sciousness and death.
Warning!
When expanding the cargo compartment, !

always fully fold the corresponding seats When the second-row seats are folded
and always use the partition net forward, the front seats may not be
(컄 page 290) when transporting cargo. moved to the rearmost position. Other-
Unless you are transporting cargo, the back- wise you could damage the front and
rests must remain properly locked in the up- second-row seats.
right position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
1 Seat belt holder
around inside the vehicle, and can cause
2 Release handle
injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
3 Seat backrest
are securely fastened in the vehicle. 왘 Remove cargo compartment cover
Always use the cargo tie down rings blind* (컄 page 288), if so equipped.
(컄 page 281). 왘 Place seat belt in seat belt holder 1. 컄컄
283
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄 왘 Pull release handle 2 on seat backrest Expanding cargo compartment fully

Do not fold the second-row seats and allow
3 in direction of arrow.
third-row seat occupants to use folded
Seat backrest 3 is released. Warning G second-row seats as a table while driving.
Objects placed on folded second-row seats
왘 Move seat backrest 3 slightly for-
Folded second-row seats are intended to may come loose during braking, vehicle ma-
ward.
serve as cargo compartment expansion in neuvers, or an accident and be thrown
Seat cushion 4 is released and folds conjunction with folded third-row seats around in the vehicle interior. Objects
forward automatically. only. Do not fold the second-row seats and thrown around in the vehicle interior may
allow third-row seat occupants to use folded cause an accident and/or serious personal
second-row seats as a footrest while driving. injury.
Third-row seat occupants must, like all vehi-
cle occupants, keep both feet on the floor in
i
front of their seat. Otherwise, occupants
When folding the seats, it is important
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
that you fold the second-row seats
If occupants slide under it, the belt would
first, and then fold the third-row seats.
apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
3 Seat backrest
4 Seat cushion
왘 Fold seat backrest 3 to a horizontal
position.
284
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding second-row seats
!
When the second-row seats are folded
forward, the front seats may not be
moved to the rearmost position. Other-
wise you could damage the front and
second-row seats.
왘 Move the seat to be folded to its rear-

most position (컄 page 137). 왘 Place the head restraint on the seat 1 Seat backrest
cushion. 2 Seat cushion
왘 Remove the rear center console*, if so
3 Release lever
equipped (컄 page 308). The guide bars must be facing forward.
왘 Push the head restraint against the !
i
seat backrest in direction of the arrow. Make sure to remove the head restraint
The rear center console* can remain
from the seat backrest and place it on
installed, if installed in the most for-
the seat cushion as described before
ward position (컄 page 309). However,
folding the seat. Otherwise, the seat or
the cargo compartment floor will then
head restraint may be damaged. 컄컄
not be an even plane.
왘 Remove the head restraint from the

second-row seat (컄 page 140).
285
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄 왘 Pull release lever 3 past the resis- Folding third-row seats 왘 Remove cargo compartment cover
tance point in direction of arrow as far blind* (컄 page 288), if so equipped.
왘 Push in the head restraints of the
as it will go.
third-row seats all the way 왘 Pull release handle 1 on seat backrest
Seat backrest 1 is released. (컄 page 139). 2 in direction of arrow.
왘 Fold seat backrest 1 forward until it Seat backrest 2 is released.
fully rests on seat cushion 2 in a hori-
왘 Slowly move seat backrest 2 forward.
zontal position.
Seat cushion 7 is released and folds
왘 Push down on folded seat backrest 1
forward automatically.
until it engages in position.
1 Seat belt holder

2 Release handle
3 Seat backrest
왘 Place seat belt in seat belt holder 1.
3 Seat backrest (third-row seat)

4 Recess (on second-row seat)
5 Guide pin
6 Seat backrest (second-row seat)
7 Seat cushion (third-row seat)
286
Controls in detail
Loading
왘 Fold seat cushion 7 to a horizontal po-

sition. Warning G
Guide pin 5 must engage in recess 4 Make sure all seats are properly locked in
of seat backrest 6. position before driving off. Do not drive with
seats not properly locked.
i
The second-row seats must be in their Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
rearmost position (컄 page 137). not properly locked as this can be danger-
ous. The seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. You could slide un-
왘 Fold seat backrest 3 to a horizontal
der the seat belt during braking, vehicle ma- 왘 When the red marking on a seat base is
position.
neuvers, or in an accident. If you slide under visible, push seat backrest back until
it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen the seat audibly engages.
Returning seats to their original position
or neck. That could cause serious or even fa- With the seat properly locked in posi-
왘 Carry out the steps described on tal injuries. tion, you will not see the red marking
(컄 page 283) to (컄 page 286) in
The seat backrest and seat belt provide the on the seat base.
reverse order.
best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly
왘 Make sure all seats are properly locked upright position and the belt is properly po-
in position. sitioned on the body.
The second-row seats have red markings

on the seat base that indicate when a
second-row seat is not properly locked.
287
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo compartment cover blind* Removing blind
The cargo compartment cover blind can be

installed behind the third-row seats or the
second-row seats.
!
With the cargo compartment cover
blind installed, do not pile luggage high-
er than the lower edges of the rear side
windows. Blind installed behind third-row seats
1 Handle Blind installed behind second-row seats
i 2 Mount 1 Release button
The cargo compartment cover blind 2 Blind
has two extensions which are connect- Rolling out blind
왘 Roll the blind up.
ed to the cargo compartment cover
왘 Pull blind on handle 1 across the car-
blind by cords. 왘 Push release button 1.
go compartment.
The cargo compartment cover blind 왘 Pull blind 2 to the left against the
왘 Guide blind into mounts 2 and re-
must be extended for installation be- spring pressure until the spring in the
lease.
hind the second-row seats blind audibly engages.
(컄 page 288). 왘 Remove the blind.
Rolling up blind
왘 Disengage blind and guide retraction
by its handle 1.
288
Controls in detail
Loading
Installing blind Extending blind 왘 Position extension 2 over blind 1.

왘 For installation behind second-row i Guide pins 4 must point directly at
seats, install the blind extensions guidings 3.
The cargo compartment cover blind
(컄 page 289).
has two extensions which are connect- 왘 Turn extension 2 and blind 1 in op-
! ed to the cargo compartment cover posite directions as indicated by the ar-
blind by cords. rows.
For installation behind third-row seats,
the blind extensions must not be in- The cargo compartment cover blind Guide pins 4 must engage in
stalled. Otherwise, the blind could be must be extended for installation be- guidings 3.
damaged. hind the second-row seats. When not in use, you can attach the cover
blind extensions to the cover blind.
왘 Remove the covers from the mounts in
side rim.
왘 Place left side of blind 2 in left mount.
왘 Position right side of blind 2 over right
mount.
왘 Press release button 1 and guide
blind 2 into mount.
1 Blind 5 Extension guide rail

2 Extension 6 Mounting 컄컄
3 Guidings
4 Guide pins
289
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄 왘 With the cargo compartment cover Partition net* Use of the partition net is a particularly im-
installed behind third-row seats, insert portant safety factor when the vehicle is
extension guide rail 5 into loaded higher than the top of the seat
mounting 6. Warning! G backrests with smaller objects.
왘 Push extension into mounting 6 as far The partition net can be installed in two lo-
Make sure the partition net is properly en-
as it will go. gaged top and bottom position and the tight-
cations:
ening belts are securely fastened.
Never use a damaged partition net.
To help avoid personal injury from smaller
objects being thrown around in the occu-
pant compartment during a collision or sud-
den maneuver, always use partition net
when transporting cargo.
The partition net cannot prevent the move-
ment of large, heavier objects into the pas-
senger compartment in an accident. Such 1 Holder in B-pillar
items must be properly secured using the 2 Holder in C-pillar
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compart- 앫 With the cargo compartment expanded
ment floor (컄 page 281). in part (컄 page 283), use holders
Passenger use of seats behind installed par- above C-pillars 2 and the cargo
tition net is restricted because of the foot- tie-down rings in the third-row footwell
well being taken up by the net. (컄 page 282).
290
Controls in detail
Loading
앫 With the cargo compartment fully ex- Engaging partition net Tightening partition net in second row
panded (컄 page 284), use holders
above B-pillars 1 and the cargo
tie-down rings in the second-row foot-
well (컄 page 282).
왘 Open the zipper on the partition net
package.
왘 Roll out the partition net.
왘 Unfold the partition net.
The partition net bar must audibly en-
1 Holder 1 Tensioner
gage.
2 Mounting hook 2 Hook
3 Tie-down ring
왘 One after the other, engage mounting
hooks 2 in holder 1. 왘 Guide hook 2 towards tie-down
ring 3.
왘 Push mounting hooks 2 forward into
holder 1. 왘 Pull tensioner 1 down in direction of
arrow towards tie-down ring 3.
왘 Insert hook 2 in tie-down ring 3.
왘 Release tensioner 1.
291
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing partition net Tightening partition net in third row

왘 Release tensioning of the strap by pull-
ing tensioner 1 down.
왘 Disengage hook 2 from tie-down
ring 3.
왘 Remove mounting hooks 2 from
holder 1, see “Engaging partition net”
(컄 page 291).
왘 Roll up the partition net. 3 Partition net ring
왘 Press the red button on the partition 1 Hook 4 Tensioner hook
net bar. 2 Tie-down ring 5 Tensioner
왘 Fold partition net bar. 왘 Insert hook 1 in tie-down ring 2. 왘 Pull tensioner 5 up in direction of ar-
row towards partition net ring 3.
왘 Roll up the partition net.
왘 Insert tensioner hook 4 in partition
왘 Close zipper on partition net package.
net ring 3 located at lower edge of the
partition net.
왘 Release tensioner 1.
292
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing partition net

왘 Release tensioning of the strap by pull-
ing tensioner 5 up.
왘 Disengage tensioner hook 4 from
partition net ring 3.
왘 Disengage hook 1 from tie-down
ring 2.
왘 Remove mounting hooks 2 from
holder 1, see “Engaging partition net”
(컄 page 291).
왘 Press the red button on the partition
net bar.
왘 Fold partition net bar.
왘 Close zipper on partition net package.
293
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box/CD-changer* Closing the glove box
i 왘 Push glove box lid up to close.

Warning! G Depending on vehicle equipment, a
Releasing CD-changer*
CD-changer* and an AUX-socket are
To help avoid personal injury during a colli- located in the glove box.
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs.
Always use partition net* when transporting
cargo. Partition net* cannot secure hard or
heavy objects.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob- 1 Release button
jects. 2 CD-changer
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help 3 AUX-socket
1 Glove box lid release
to prevent stored objects from being thrown 2 Glove box lid 왘 Open the glove box.
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
왘 Press release button 1.
앫 braking Opening the glove box
CD-changer 2 is released and swings
앫 vehicle maneuvers 왘 Pull lid release 1 in direction of arrow. down automatically.
앫 an accident Glove box lid 2 opens downward. For information on CD-changer operation,
see separate Modular COMAND System
operating instructions.
294
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing CD-changer* Locking and unlocking the glove box 왘 Insert mechanical key into glove box
separately lock.
You can lock the glove box separately, e.g. 왘 Turn mechanical key to position 2.
when the vehicle is in the shop for service.
왘 Turn mechanical key to position 1 to
왘 Take the mechanical key out of the unlock the glove box.
KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 459). i
The separate locking status of the
glove box can be canceled by means of
the mechanical key only.
1 CD-changer
왘 Gently push CD-changer 1 up in direc-
tion of arrow until it engages.
For information on CD-changer operation,
see separate Modular COMAND System
operating instructions.
1 Unlocking glove box
2 Locking glove box
295
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in front center Additional storage compartment in i

console front center console If your vehicle is equipped with a
A storage compartment is located in front smoking package*, the storage
of the armrest in the front center console. compartment contains an ashtray with
The storage compartment also contains a cigarette lighter (컄 page 303) instead.
power outlet (컄 page 306).
Front armrest storage compartments
Two storage compartments are located be-
low the armrest. Both can be opened sep-
arately.
1 Cover
2 Chrome label
왘 Tab lightly on chrome label 2 of
cover 1.
Cover 1 swings open. 1 Cover
2 Chrome label
왘 Tab lightly on chrome label 2 of
cover 1.
Cover 1 swings open. 1 Button to open storage tray
2 Button to open storage compartment
296
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear armrest storage compartment* Rear storage compartment

A storage compartment is located in the A storage compartment is located in front
armrest of the rear center console* be- of the second-row seats.
tween the second-row seats.
3 Storage tray
4 Coinholders
Opening the storage tray

1 Storage compartment cover
왘 Press button 1 and lift up armrest. 왘 Press button under armrest and lift up 2 Release button
Two coin holders 4 are located in armrest.
왘 Press release button 1 on storage
front of storage tray 3. compartment cover 2.
Opening the storage compartment The storage compartment cover opens

automatically.
왘 Press button 2 and lift up armrest.
i
If your vehicle is equipped with a
smoking package*, the storage
compartment contains an ashtray
(컄 page 304).
297
Controls in detail
Useful features
Third-row storage compartment Parcel nets Parcel net in front passenger footwell
Storage compartments are located on the
side trims of the third-row seats.
Warning! G
Do not place objects with a combined
weight of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the
parcel net on the back of the front passen-
ger seat. Otherwise, the Occupant Classifi-
cation System OCS (컄 page 85) may not be
able to properly approximate the occupant
weight category. 1 Parcel net
Parcel nets are intended for storing
1 Storage compartment light-weight items only. Parcel nets on front seat backrests
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
i fragile objects may not be transported in the
If your vehicle is equipped with a parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
3-zone automatic climate control*, the braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
storage compartment is replaced by be thrown around inside the vehicle and
adjustable air vents (컄 page 247). cause injury to vehicle occupants.
Parcel nets cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
1 Parcel net
298
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in cargo compartment Cup holders

Keep in mind that objects placed in a cup
holder may come loose during braking,
Warning! G vehicle maneuvers, or an accident and be

thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi-
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
or may cause an accident and/or serious
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
personal injury.
ment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the Cup holders in front center console
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill A cupholder and a card/ticket holder with
1 Parcel net during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an bottle opener are located in the front cen-
2 Clips accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occu- ter console.
3 Mounting openings pants may cause serious personal injury.
4 Mounting lug Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
5 Rail cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘 Take parcel net 1 out of lower
clips 2. When not in use, keep cup holders closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
왘 Push rails 5 up slightly in direction of or others when contacted during braking,
arrows. vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
왘 Pull mounting lugs 4 out of mounting
openings 3.
1 Cup holders
왘 Install parcel net 1 in reverse order.
299
Controls in detail
Useful features
Card/ticket holder with bottle opener The bottle opener is located underneath Reinserting
the card/ticket holder and has openers for
A card/ticket holder and a bottle opener
crown caps and screw caps.
are located in the cup holder of the front
center console.
Cards and tickets can be inserted into the
slot in the middle. The card/ticket holder
is removable and has a bottle opener un-
derneath.
Removing
1 Tabs
2 Card/ticket holder
2 Opener for screw caps
왘 Guide tabs 1 into openings.
3 Opener for crown caps
왘 Guide rear of card/ticket holder 2
i into the cupholder.
With the card/ticket holder, you can
also take the rubber inlet from the cup-
holder for cleaning.
1 Card/ticket holder with bottle opener

왘 Lift card/ticket holder 1 at the rear
and take it out.
300
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in front of second-row seats 왘 Press release button 2 on storage Closing cup holder
compartment cover 1.
A cupholder is located in front of the 왘 Push cup holder in until it engages.
second-row seats. Storage compartment cover 1 opens
왘 Close storage compartment cover.
automatically.
i !
왘 Press storage compartment cover 2
Vehicles with rear center console* Close the cup holder when not in use
down in direction of arrow as far as it
(컄 page 308) are not equipped with and before folding the second-row
will go.
cupholders in front of the second-row seats.
seats.
Opening cup holder
3 Cup holder
왘 Pull out cup holder 3 in direction of ar-
row as far as it will go.
1 Storage compartment cover
2 Release button
301
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cupholders in rear center console* Cupholders in third-row side trim Ashtrays*

Cupholders are located on the rear center Cupholders are located in the side trims of
Your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray
console* between the second-row seats. the third-row seats.
and a cigarette lighter (컄 page 305) locat-
ed in the front center console and an ash-
tray located in front of the second-row
seats (컄 page 304).
i
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
smoking package*, it has a storage
compartment (컄 page 296) with a
power outlet (컄 page 306) instead.
1 Cup holders 1 Cup holder
302
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtray in the front center console Removing ashtray insert
Opening the ashtray

Warning! G
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
from movement. Set automatic transmis-
sion to P. With the automatic transmission
set to P, turn off the engine.
1 Cover plate
2 Ashtray insert
왘 Grip ashtray insert 2 on the sides and
1 Cover
pull it out upwards.
2 Chrome label
왘 Tab lightly on chrome label 2 of Reinstalling ashtray insert
cover 1.
왘 Insert ashtray insert 2 and push down
Cover 1 swings open. until the ball catch engages.
왘 Close ashtray cover plate 1.
303
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear seat ashtray (second row) 왘 Press release button 1 on ashtray

cover 2.
i
The ashtray cover opens automatically.
Vehicles with rear center console*
(컄 page 308) are not equipped with an
Removing ashtray insert
ashtray in front of the second-row
seats.
!
Close the ashtray when not in use and
before folding the second-row seats. 1 Ashtray cover
2 Ashtray insert
Opening the ashtray 왘 Push on ashtray insert 2 and pull it
out upwards.
1 Ashtray cover Reinstalling ashtray insert

2 Ashtray insert
왘 Insert ashtray insert 2 into opening.
왘 Open ashtray cover 1.
왘 Push down ashtray insert 2 until it
왘 Press ashtray cover 2 down in direc- engages.
tion of arrow as far as it will go.
왘 Close ashtray cover 1.
1 Ashtray cover
2 Release button
304
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter* !
The lighter socket can accommodate
12V DC electrical accessories (up to a
Warning! G maximum of 85 W) designed for use
with the standard “cigarette lighter”
Never touch the heating element or sides of
plug type. Keep in mind, however, that
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
connecting accessories to the lighter
Hold the knob only.
socket (for example extensive connect-
When leaving the vehicle always remove the ing and disconnecting, or using plugs
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* that do not fit properly) can damage the
from the starter switch, take it with you, and 1 Cover plate lighter socket. With the socket dam-
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- 2 Cigarette lighter aged, the lighter may no longer be able
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an 왘 Open cover plate 1 (컄 page 302). to be placed in the heating (pushed-in)
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- position, or the lighter may pop out too
cle equipment may cause an accident 왘 Push in cigarette lighter 2 early with the lighter not hot enough.
and/or serious personal injury. (컄 page 303).
To help avoid damaging the cigarette
The cigarette lighter will pop out auto- lighter socket, we recommend con-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). matically when hot. necting 12V DC electrical accessories
designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type to the
12V power outlets (컄 page 306) in
your vehicle whenever possible.
305
Controls in detail
Useful features
! i Power outlet in front center console

The cigarette lighter is not designed for The power outlets can be used to
use with the electric air pump accommodate electrical consumers
(컄 page 483). Use a power outlet (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a
(컄 page 306) for electric air pump maximum of 240 W.
operation.
If the engine is off, and the outlets are
being used extensively, the vehicle
i battery may become discharged.
If the engine is off, and the cigarette
lighter is being used extensively, the Power outlets are located
vehicle battery may become dis- 1 Cover plate
앫 in the additional storage compartment
charged. 2 Power outlet cover
in front center console (컄 page 306)
앫 in the front passenger footwell 왘 Open cover plate 1 (컄 page 296).
Power outlets
(컄 page 307) 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
! 앫 in the second-row footwell 왘 Pull out cover 2 and insert electrical
If you use all power outlets in the vehi- (컄 page 307) plug (cigarette lighter type).
cle, make sure that the maximum cur- 앫 on the right-hand side of the cargo
rent drawn does not exceed 55 A. compartment (컄 page 307)
i
If your vehicle is equipped with a
smoking package*, the storage
compartment contains an ashtray with
cigarette lighter (컄 page 303) instead.
306
Controls in detail
Useful features
Power outlet in front passenger Power outlets in second-row footwell Power outlet in cargo compartment
footwell
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). 왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug 왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type). (cigarette lighter type).
(cigarette lighter type).
307
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear center console* Removing i

Remove all items from the storage
The rear center console is located between
the second-row seats. Warning! G compartment (컄 page 297) of the rear
center console to reduce the weight of
The rear center console contains: Remove all containers that may be stored in the rear center console.
앫 Storage compartment (컄 page 297) the cupholders of the rear center console.
Otherwise liquids could spill on vehicle
앫 Cupholder (컄 page 302) occupants and/or vehicle equipment. Hot
앫 DVD-player* (see separate COMAND liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may
operating instructions) cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
i damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
When fully expanding the cargo com- Limited Warranty.
partment, the rear center console has
to be removed from the vehicle in order !
for the cargo compartment floor to be
To prevent damage to the rear center
an even plane (컄 page 284). 1 Rear center console
console and/or its components, make
sure the storage compartment 2 Release handle
(컄 page 297) and the DVD-console lid* 3 Rear center console base
(see separate COMAND operating 4 Folding back
instructions) are closed before remov- 5 Handle
ing the rear center console. 6 Anchorage points
308
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 Pull release handle 2. Installing You can install the rear center console in
two different positions. In the most for-
The front part of center console 1 is
released from base 3. Warning! G ward position (position 1) you can expand
the cargo compartment fully (컄 page 284)
왘 Lift center console 1 in direction of without removing the rear center console.
The rear center console must be properly in-
arrow 4 and hold it there. However, for the storage compartment
stalled on the center console base. Driving
왘 While holding center console 1 up, with the rear center console not properly in- and the cupholders in the rear center con-
grip handle 5. stalled on the rear center console base may sole to be illuminated, the rear center con-
cause the rear center console to come loose sole must be installed in the most rearward
왘 Lift center console 1 at rear position (position 0).
handle 5 to release the center con- and be thrown around in the vehicle interior,
sole from anchorage points 6. causing injury to vehicle occupants during
앫 braking
왘 Take center console 1 out of the vehi-
cle. 앫 vehicle maneuvers
앫 an accident
i
Rear center console base 3 cannot be
removed.
1 Latch (position 1)
2 Latch (position 0)
3 Rear center console base
4 Anchorage point (position 1)
5 Anchorage point (position 0) 컄컄
309
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 Telephone*
Warning! G
Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
Never operate radio transmitters equipped attention to the road must always be
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- his /her primary focus when driving. For
out being connected to an external antenna) your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
from inside the vehicle while the engine is ommend that you pull over to a safe location
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele-
3 Rear center console base tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- phone call.
6 Rear center console sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious If you choose to use the telephone1 while
personal injury. driving, please use the hands-free device
왘 Position center console 6 above
base 3. and only use the telephone when road,
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
왘 Insert the tabs at rear of center phone or a citizens band unit, should only jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
console 6 into anchorage points 4 be used inside the vehicle if they are con- cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
or 5 on base 3. nected to an antenna that is installed on Only operate the Modular COMAND
왘 Guide front of center console 6 down the outside of the vehicle. System1 if road, weather and traffic condi-
towards base 3. The external antenna must be approved by tions permit.
Center console 6 must rest on Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho- Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
base 3. rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
for information on the installation of an ap- covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
왘 Press down on front of center
proved external antenna. Refer to the radio ly 14 m) every second.
console 6 until it audibly engages in
transmitter operation instructions regard-
latch 1 or 2. 1 Observe all legal requirements
ing use of an external antenna.
310
Controls in detail
Useful features
You can take and place telephone calls us- Tele Aid* The Tele Aid system
ing the s and t buttons on the
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
steering wheel. To carry out other tele- ! Demand)
phone functions, use the control system The initial activation of the Tele Aid
(컄 page 194). The Tele Aid system consists of three
system may only be performed by
types of response:
See separate instruction manual for infor- completing the subscriber agreement
mation on how to operate the telephone. and placing an acquaintance call using 앫 automatic and manual emergency
the ¡ button. Failure to complete 앫 roadside assistance
either of these steps will result in a
system that is not activated. 앫 information
If you have any questions regarding The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
activation, please call the Response ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) properly connected, not damaged and cel-
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). lular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
Shortly after the completion of your Tele be adjusted when using the volume control
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a on the Modular COMAND System or on the
user ID and password. By visiting multifunction steering wheel. To raise, turn
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” the rotary volume control on Modular
(USA only), you will have access to account COMAND System clockwise or press
information, remote door unlock and button æ on the multifunction steering
more. wheel. To lower, turn the rotary volume
control on Modular COMAND System con-
311
Controls in detail
Useful features
trol counterclockwise or press i System self-check

button ç on the multifunction steering When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, Initially, after switching on the ignition,
wheel. the Modular COMAND System audio is malfunctions are detected and indicated
왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the muted and the selected mode (radio, (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or CD etc.) pauses. The optional cellular Roadside Assistance button • and the
the Information button ¡, depend- phone (if installed) inserted in cradle Information button ¡ stay on longer
ing on the type of response required. switches off. If you must use this than 10 seconds or do not come on). The
phone, we recommend that you use it message Malfunction. Drive to work-
i only with the vehicle at a standstill in a shop appears in the multifunction display.
The SOS button is located in the over- safe location. Remove the phone from
head control panel. the cradle and place the call. The navi-
gation* system (if engaged) will contin-
The Roadside Assistance button •
ue to run. The display in the instrument
and the Information button ¡ are
cluster is available for use, and spoken
located below the center armrest
commands are only available by press-
cover.
ing the RPT button on the Modular
COMAND System. A pop-up window
! will appear in the Modular COMAND
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular System display to indicate that a Tele
network for communication and the Aid call is in progress. After the Tele Aid
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel- call has ended, the optional cellular
lites for vehicle location. If either of phone inserted in the cradle switches
these signals are unavailable, the on again. A PIN entry might be neces-
Tele Aid system may not function and if sary.
this occurs, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
312
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls Once the emergency call is in progress, the

Warning! G An emergency call is initiated automatical-
indicator lamp on the SOS button will
begin to flash. The message
If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on ly following an accident in which the emer-
Connecting Call appears in the multifunc-
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
tion display. When the connection is estab-
the Information button remain illuminated air bags deploy.
lished, the message Call connected
continuously in red and/or the message An emergency call can also be initiated appears in the multifunction display. All in-
Malfunction. Drive to workshop is manually by opening the cover next to the formation relevant to the emergency, such
displayed in the multifunction display after interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then as the location of the vehicle (determined
the system self-check, a malfunction in the briefly pressing the button located under by the GPS satellite location system), vehi-
system has been detected. the cover. See (컄 page 314) for cle model, identification number and color
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined instructions on initiating an emergency call are generated.
above, the system may not operate as manually.
A voice connection between the Response
expected. Have the system checked at the Center and the occupants of the vehicle
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be established automatically soon af-
as soon as possible. ter the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to
determine more precisely the nature of the
accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
313
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system is available if Initiating an emergency call manually

앫 it has been activated and is operation-
Warning! G
al. Activation requires a subscription If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
for monitoring services, connection flashing continuously and there was no
and cellular air time voice connection to the Response Center
앫 vehicle battery power is available established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
앫 the relevant cellular phone network
vant cellular phone network is not available).
and GPS signals are available and pass
The message Call failed appears in the
the information on to the response cen-
multifunction display for approximately
ter
10 seconds. 1 Cover
i Should this occur, assistance must be sum- 2 SOS button
Location of the vehicle on a map is only moned by other means.
왘 Briefly press on cover 1.
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network The cover opens.
and pass the information on to the 왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly.
Response Center.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
314
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button • When the connection is established, the

Warning! G The Roadside Assistance button • is
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the located below the center armrest cover.
will transmit data generating the vehicle
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, identification number, model, color and
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please location (subject to availability of cellular
do not wait for voice contact after you have and GPS signals).
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca- i
tion. The Response Center will automatically While the call is connected you can
contact local emergency officials with the change to the navigation menu by
vehicle’s approximate location if they re- pressing NAV button on the Modular
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot COMAND System unit.
make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
pants. 1 Roadside Assistance button •
A voice connection between the Roadside
왘 Open the storage tray (컄 page 296). Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
왘 Press and hold button 1 (for longer of the vehicle will be established.
than 2 seconds). 왘 Describe the nature of the need for as-
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside sistance.
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting call will appear in the
315
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance i If the indicator lamp on the Roadside

dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • is flashing
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to Assistance button • remains illumi- continuously and there was no voice
tow your vehicle to the nearest nated in red for approximately connection to the Response Center
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For 10 seconds during the system established, then the Tele Aid system
services such as labor and/or towing, self-check after switching on the igni- could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside tion (together with the SOS button and tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
Assistance Manual for more information. the Information button ¡). phone network was not available). The
These programs are only available in the message Call failed appears in the
See system self-check (컄 page 312) if
USA: multifunction display.
the indicator lamp does not come on in
앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such red or stays on longer than Roadside Assistance calls can be
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or approximately 10 seconds. terminated using the t button on
the replacement of a flat tire with the the multifunction steering wheel or the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable. END Button on the Modular COMAND
System.
316
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡ When the connection is established, the i

message Call connected appears in the The indicator lamp in the Information
The Information button ¡ is located
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system button ¡ remains illuminated in red
below the center armrest cover.
will transmit data generating the vehicle for approximately 10 seconds during
identification number, model, color and lo- the system self-check after switching
cation (subject to availability of cellular on the ignition (together with the
and GPS signals). SOS button and the Roadside
Assistance button •).
i
While the call is connected, you can See system self-check (컄 page 312) if
change to the navigation menu by the indicator lamp does not come on in
pressing NAV button on the Modular red or stays on longer than
COMAND System. approximately 10 seconds.
1 Information button ¡ If the indicator lamp in the Information

A voice connection between the Customer button ¡ is flashing continuously
왘 Open the storage tray (컄 page 296). Assistance Center representative and the and there was no voice connection to
왘 Press and hold button 1 (for longer occupants of the vehicle will be estab- the Response Center established, then
than 2 seconds). lished. Information regarding the operation the Tele Aid system could not initiate
of your vehicle, the nearest an Information call (e.g. the relevant
A call to the Customer Assistance Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or cellular phone network is not avail-
Center will be initiated. The button will Mercedes-Benz USA products and servic- able). The message Call failed ap-
flash while the call is in progress. The es is available to you. pears in the multifunction display.
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display. For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
arately) to learn more (USA only).
317
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information calls can be terminated Call priority !

using the t button on the multi- If other service calls such as a Roadside If the indicator lamp continues to flash
function steering wheel or the END But- Assistance call or Information call are or the system does not reset, contact
ton on the Modular COMAND System. active, an Emergency call is still possible. the Response Center at
In this case, the Emergency call will take 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
! priority and override all other active calls. 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
If the indicator lamps do not start flash- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
ing after pressing one of the buttons or i at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
remain illuminated (in red) at any time, The indicator lamp in the respective (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
the Tele Aid system has detected a button flashes until the call is conclud- Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
malfunction or the service is not ed. Emergency calls can only be termi- in Canada.
currently active, and may not initiate a nated by a Response Center or
call. Visit your authorized Customer Assistance Center represen-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center and tative, whereas Roadside Assistance
have the system checked or contact and Information calls can also be termi-
the Response Center at nated by pressing button t on the
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or multifunction steering wheel or using
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon the END button on the Modular
as possible. COMAND System.
318
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock The Response Center will then unlock your Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
In case you have locked your vehicle unin- In the event your vehicle was stolen:
feature.
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
왘 Report the incident to the police.
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: i The police will issue a numbered
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response The remote door unlock feature is incident report.
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) available if the relevant cellular phone
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). network is available. 왘 Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
You will be asked to provide your pass- The SOS button will flash and the with your password issued to you when
word which you provided when you message Connecting call will appear you subscribed to the service.
completed the subscriber agreement. in the multifunction display to indicate
receipt of the door unlock command. The Response Center will then attempt
왘 Then return to your vehicle at the time to covertly contact the vehicle’s
arranged with the Response Center Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
and pull the tailgate recessed handle Response Center specialist may located, the Response Center will
for minimum of 20 seconds until the attempt to establish voice contact with contact the local law enforcement and
SOS button is flashing. the vehicle occupants. you. The vehicle’s location will only be
The message Connecting call ap- If the tailgate recessed handle was provided to law enforcement.
pears in the multifunction display. pulled for more than 20 seconds
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi- before door unlock authorization was
cle via Internet using the ID and password received by the Response Center, you
sent to you shortly after the completion of must wait 15 minutes before pulling
your acquaintance call. the tailgate recessed handle again.
319
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Garage door opener*

When the anti-theft alarm or the
The integrated remote control is capable of
tow-away alarm stays on for more than
operating up to three separately controlled
30 seconds, a call is initiated automat-
devices. It provides a convenient way to
ically to the Response Center. See
replace up to three hand-held remote
anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 104)
controls used to operate devices such as
and tow-away alarm (컄 page 106).
garage door openers, gate openers, or
other devices compatible with HomeLink®
or some other systems.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated
Before the integrated remote control can remote control
be used, it must be programmed to the
1 Indicator lamp
garage door opener, gate operator or other
device you wish to operate. See the follow- 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
ing instructions for programming informa- Needed for programming (not part of vehi-
tion. cle equipment):
5 Hand-held remote control of ga-
rage door opener, gate operator
or other device
6 Hand-held remote control but-
ton
320
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 2:
Warning! G When programming a garage door opener, it
is advised to park outside the garage. 왘 If you have previously programmed an
Before programming the integrated remote Do not run the engine while programming signal transmitter button and wish to
control to a garage door opener or gate the integrated remote control. Inhalation of retain its programming, proceed to
operator, make sure people and objects are exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All step 3.
out of the way of the device to prevent po- exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and If you are programming the integrated
tential harm or damage. When programming inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and remote control for the first time, press
a garage door opener, the door moves up or possible death. and hold the two outer signal transmit-
down. When programming a gate operator, ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
the gate opens or closes. Programming the integrated remote them only when the indicator lamp 1
Do not use the integrated remote control control begins to flash after approximately
with any garage door opener that lacks 20 seconds (do not hold the button for
Step 1:
safety stop and reverse features as required longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). dure erases any previous settings for
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model all three channels and initializes the
manufactured before April 1, 1982). memory.
A garage door that cannot detect an object If you later wish to program a second
– signaling the door to stop and reverse – and/or third hand-held transmitter to
does not meet current U.S. federal safety the remaining two signal transmitter
standards. buttons, do not repeat this step and be-
gin directly with step 3. 컄컄
321
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 Step 3: i If the indicator lamp 1 stays on

The indicator lamp 1 flashes immedi- constantly, programming is complete
왘 Hold the end of the hand-held remote
ately the first time the signal transmit- and your device should activate when
control 5 of the device you wish to
ter button is programmed. If this button the respective signal transmitter
train approximately 2 to 5 in
has already been programmed, the in- button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re-
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal trans-
dicator lamp will only start flashing af- leased.
mitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be pro-
grammed, while keeping the indicator ter 20 seconds.
i
lamp 1 in view.
If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly
Step 4: Step 5:
for about 2 seconds and then turns to a
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously 왘 After the indicator lamp 1 changes constant light, continue with
press the hand-held remote control from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, programming steps 8 through 12 as
button 6 and the desired signal trans- release the hand-held remote control your garage door opener may be
mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not button and the signal transmitter but- equipped with the “rolling code”
release the buttons until step 5 is com- ton. feature.
pleted. Step 6:
Step 7:
The indicator lamp 1 will flash, first 왘 Press and hold the just-trained signal
slowly and then rapidly. transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and 왘 To program the remaining two signal
observe the indicator lamp 1. transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
322
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming Step 9: i

To train a garage door opener (or other 왘 Press the “training” button on the ga- Some garage door openers (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code rage door opener motor head unit. rolling code equipped devices) may
feature, follow these instructions after require you to press, hold for 2 seconds
The “training light” is activated.
completing the “Programming” portion and release the same signal transmit-
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow- ter button a third time to complete the
person may make the following training ing two steps. training process.
procedures quicker and easier.) Step 10:
Step 8: Step 12:
왘 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
왘 Locate “training” button on the garage hold for 2 seconds and release the pro- 왘 Confirm the garage door operation by
door opener motor head unit. grammed signal transmitter button pressing the programmed signal trans-
(2, 3 or 4). mitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand. Step 11: Step 13:
Depending on manufacturer, the 왘 Press, hold for 2 seconds and release 왘 To program the remaining two signal
“training” button may also be referred same signal transmitter button a sec- transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there ond time to complete the training pro- above starting with step 3.
is difficulty locating the transmitting cess.
button, refer to the garage door opener
operator’s manual.
323
Controls in detail
Useful features
Gate operator/Canadian programming 왘 While still holding down the signal i

transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), Upon completion of programming the
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
“cycle” your hand-held remote control integrated remote control, make sure
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
button 6 as follows: Press and hold you retain the hand-held remote con-
after several seconds of transmission
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release trol that came with the garage door
which may not be long enough for the
it for 2 seconds, and again press and opener, gate operator or other device.
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se- You may need it for use in other vehi-
signal during programming. Similar to this
quence on the hand-held remote con- cles, for future programming of an
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
trol until the frequency signal has been integrated remote control, or simply for
are designed to “time-out” in the same
learned. Upon successful training, the continued use as a hand-held remote
manner.
indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and control to operate the respective
If you live in Canada or if you are having then rapidly after several seconds. device in other situations.
difficulties programming a gate operator
왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4 step 6 to complete.
with the following:
Step 4:
왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successful-
ly trained.
324
Controls in detail
Useful features
Reprogramming a single signal trans- Operation of integrated remote control Erasing the integrated remote control
mitter button memory
To program a device using a signal trans- 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘 Select and press the appropriate inte-
mitter button previously trained, follow
grated signal transmitter button (2, 왘 Simultaneously press and hold down
these steps:
3 or 4) to activate the remote con- the outer signal transmitter buttons 2
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). trolled device. and 4, for approximately 20 seconds,
until the indicator lamp 1 flashes rap-
왘 Press and hold the desired signal The integrated remote control trans-
idly. Do not hold for longer than
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). mitter continues to send the signal as
30 seconds.
Do not release the button. long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds. The codes of all three channels are
왘 The indicator lamp 1 will begin to
erased.
flash after 20 seconds. Without releas-
ing the signal transmitter button, pro- i
ceed with programming starting with
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
step 3.
of all three channels.
325
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming tips 앫 If another hand-held remote control is i

available for the same device, try the USA only:
If you are having difficulty programming
programming steps again using that This device complies with Part 15 of
the integrated remote control, here are
other hand-held remote control. Make the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
some helpful tips:
sure new batteries are in the hand-held the following two conditions:
앫 Check the frequency of the hand-held remote control before beginning the
remote control 5 (typically located on procedure. (1) This device may not cause harmful
the reverse side of the remote). The in- interference, and
앫 Straighten the antenna wire from the
tegrated remote control is compatible (2) this device must accept any
with radio-frequency devices operating garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/or interference received, including
between 288-399 MHz. interference that may cause
receiving signals.
앫 Put a new battery in the hand-held re- undesired operation.
mote control 5. This will increase the i Any unauthorized modification to this
likelihood of the hand-held remote con- Certain types of garage door openers device could void the user’s authority
trol sending a faster and more accurate are incompatible with the integrated to operate the equipment.
signal to the integrated remote control. remote control. If you should experi-
앫 While performing step 3, hold the ence further difficulties with program-
hand-held remote control 5 at differ- ming the integrated remote control,
ent lengths and angles from the signal contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you Light Truck Center, or call
are programming. Attempt varying an- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches Center (in the USA only) at
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
varying distances. Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
326
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Compass i
Canada only: The presence of buildings, bridges,
This device complies with RSS-210 of Calling up the compass power lines and large antenna masts
Industry Canada. Operation is subject can influence the displayed values.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
to the following two conditions: Metallic or magnetic objects in or on
until the AIRMATIC/Compass menu
the vehicle can influence the accuracy
(1) This device may not cause interfer- appears in the multifunction display.
of the compass.
ence, and
The compass displays the direction
(2) this device must accept any inter- into which the vehicle is currently trav- To make sure the display is correct, the
ference received, including interfer- eling: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW. compass must be set to the proper geo-
ence that may cause undesired graphic zone (컄 page 186). It may also be
operation of the device. necessary to calibrate the compass
Any unauthorized modification to this (컄 page 187).
to operate the equipment. i
If the compass is not calibrated or its
Example for compass display on vehicles
function is impaired by outside influ-
equipped with AIRMATIC* ences, the message Compass - - -
i
If your vehicle is not equipped with
AIRMATIC*, the multifunction display
will show the compass only.
327
Controls in detail
Useful features
Floormats* Infrared reflecting windshield*
Warning! G
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fas-
tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1.
1 Retainer pin
Before driving off, check that the floormats
2 Eyelet
are securely in place and adjust them if nec- 1 Infrared transparent areas
essary. A loose floormat could slip and
Removing Your vehicle is equipped with infrared re-
hinder proper function of the pedals.
왘 Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1. flecting glass, which reduces the amount
of radiated heat entering the vehicle interi-
i 왘 Remove the floormat. or through the windows.
To install or remove the floormats more The infrared reflecting glass also prevents
easily, move the driver’s seat or front Installing
the transmission of signals through the
passenger seat as far to the rear as 왘 Lay down the floormat in the respective glass by in-vehicle electronic devices (e.g.
possible (컄 page 43). footwell. electronic toll collection devices).
왘 Press floormat eyelets 2 onto retainer To allow the use of these devices in the ve-
pins 1. hicle, infrared transparent areas are
placed in the windshield.
328
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
329
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
detailed information on operating, main- during the break-in period, the more satis- gradually increase vehicle and engine
taining and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum.
on.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first to your vehicle type, also apply when the
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the en-
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. gine, the transfer case, the front differen-
tial or the rear differential has been
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads
replaced.
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of i
maximum rpm in each gear).
Always obey applicable speed limits.
앫 Shift gears in a timely manner.
앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫 Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1
(컄 page 202) only when driving at
moderate speeds (for hill driving).
앫 Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄 page 204) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
330
Operation
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Fuel consumption is also increased by Pedals
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
depends on driving habits and operating Warning! G
conditions. Drinking and driving
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
To save fuel you should:
jects stored in this area may impair pedal
앫 Keep tires at the recommended infla- Warning! G movement.
tion pressures.
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Power assistance
and driving are a very dangerous combina-
앫 Remove roof rack when not in use. tion. Even a small amount of alcohol or
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions Warning! G
load use. and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal With the engine not running, there is no
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
accident are greatly increased when you power assistance for the brake and steering
eration.
drink or take drugs and drive. systems. In this case, it is important to keep
앫 Have all maintenance work performed in mind that a considerably higher degree of
at the intervals specified in the Mainte- Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
nance Booklet and as required by the anyone to drive who has been drinking or
hicle.
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or taking drugs.
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
331
Operation
Brakes To help prevent brake disk corrosion after If the parking brake is released and the
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly brake warning lamp in the instrument clus-
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the ter stays on and there is no audible warn-
Warning! G vehicle with considerable force prior to ing (EBP), the brake fluid level in the
parking. The heat generated serves to dry reservoir is too low.
After driving in heavy rain for some time the brakes.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
without applying the brakes or through wa-
If your brake system is normally only sub- be the reason for low brake fluid in the
ter deep enough to wet brake components,
jected to moderate loads, you should occa- reservoir.
the first braking action may be somewhat
sionally test the effectiveness of the
reduced and increased pedal pressure may Have the brake system inspected immedi-
brakes by applying above-normal braking
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef- ately. Contact an authorized
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
in front.
All checks and service work on the brake
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will system should be carried out by qualified
cause excessive and premature wear of the Warning! G technicians only. Contact an authorized
brake pads. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Make sure not to endanger any other road
It can also result in the brakes overheating, users when carrying out these braking Only install brake pads and brake fluid
thereby significantly reducing their effec- maneuvers. recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
dent.
System (BAS) (컄 page 99).
332
Operation
! Driving off
Warning! G When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
If other than recommended brake pads are driving off. Perform this procedure only
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
installed, or other than recommended brake when the road is clear of other traffic.
engine’s braking power. This helps
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
prevent overheating of the brakes and Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
reduces brake pad wear. place full load on the engine until the oper-
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
When using the engine’s braking pow- ating temperature has been reached.
could result in an accident.
er, a drive wheel may not spin for an ex- When starting off on a slippery surface, do
tended period of time, e.g. on slippery not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
road surfaces. This may cause serious extended period with the ESP® switched
damage to the drivetrain which is not off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Warranty. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive

!
on for some time, rather than immediately Simultaneously depressing the
park, so that the air stream will cool down accelerator pedal and applying the
the brakes faster. brake reduces engine performance and
causes premature brake and drivetrain
wear.
333
Operation
Parking Tires
앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
!
Set the parking brake whenever park-
앫 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch Warning! G
position 0 and remove, or press
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition, KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehi-
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
set the automatic transmission to cles with KEYLESS-GO*).
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
position P. 앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
When parking on hills, always turn front KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
wheels towards the curb. when leaving.
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Warning! G Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
damage to the vehicle powertrain, as a
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
result of vehicle movement, before turning
Center or tire dealer for repairs.
off the engine and leaving the vehicle al-
ways:
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
law. These indicators are located in six
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. places on the tread circumference and
앫 Set the automatic transmission to become visible at a tread depth of
position P. approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
334
Operation
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid Tire traction

band across the tread. Warning! G
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
Warning! G the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
You should pay particular attention to the
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Although the applicable federal motor condition of the road whenever the outside
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be temperatures are close to the freezing
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) point.
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
Hydroplaning Warning! G
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even will be substantially reduced. Under such
sharply reduced. weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
Depending upon the weather and/or road vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the with extreme caution.
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies road and apply brakes cautiously in the
widely. rain.
Specified tire pressures must be main-

tained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
atures).
335
Operation
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires Tire speed rating R 350, R 500

(컄 page 390) with a minimum tread depth
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
wheels for the winter season to ensure speed limits should be obeyed. Use
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
normal balanced handling characteristics. prudent driving speeds appropriate to pre-
On packed snow, they can reduce your vailing conditions. An electronic speed limiter prevents your
stopping distance compared to summer vehicle from exceeding a speed of
tires. Warning! G 130 mph (210 km/h).
Stopping distance, however, is still consid- R 350, R 500 (with Sport Package*)
erably greater than when the road is not Even when permitted by law, never operate
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appro- a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi- Your vehicle is factory equipped with
priate caution. mum speed rating of the tires. “W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
Exceeding the maximum speed for which of 168 mph (270 km/h).
!
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire An electronic speed limiter prevents your
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This failure, causing loss of vehicle control and vehicle from exceeding a speed of
may cause serious damage to the possibly resulting in an accident and/or 130 mph (210 km/h).
drivetrain which is not covered by the serious injury and possible death, for you
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. and for others. i
For information on speed ratings for
winter tires, see “Winter tires”
(컄 page 390).
For additional general information on
tire speed markings on the tire side-
wall, see “Tire speed rating”
(컄 page 388).
336
Operation
Winter driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Warning! G
The most important rule for slippery or icy force may become necessary to produce
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid the normal brake effect. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
Depressing the brake pedal periodically pipe and from around the vehicle with the
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
when traveling at length on salt-strewn engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
system under such conditions.
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, efficiency back to normal. terior resulting in unconsciousness and
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
If the vehicle is parked after being driven death.
to keep the vehicle under control by
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien- To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
corrective steering action.
cy should be tested as soon as possible af- open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
i ter driving is resumed. hicle not facing the wind.
For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains” Warning! G
(컄 page 391). Warning! G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking The outside temperature indicator is not de-
Warning! G maneuvers. signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift dicated temperatures just above the freez-
in order to obtain braking action. This could ing point do not guarantee that the road
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- surface is free of ice.
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of control loss. For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 390).
337
Operation
Standing water ! Passenger compartment

Do not drive through flooded areas or
To prevent water from entering the pas- water of unknown depth. Before driving
senger compartment or the engine com- through water, determine its depth. Warning! G
partment if you must drive through Never accelerate before driving into
standing water, keep in mind that Always fasten items being carried as secure-
water. The bow wave could force water
ly as possible.
앫 the maximum depth of the water may into the engine and auxiliary equip-
not exceed 10 in (25 cm) ment, thus damaging them. In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
앫 you must drive slowly If you must drive through standing wa-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
i to vehicle occupants unless the items are
entering the passenger compartment
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Vehicles with AIRMATIC*: If you have or the engine compartment. Water in
selected the raised level (컄 page 272) these areas could cause damage to The rear cargo compartment is the preferred
before driving through standing water, electrical components or wiring of the place to carry objects. Always use the parti-
the maximum water depth is engine or transmission, or could result tion net when transporting cargo. Partition
12 in (30 cm). in water being ingested by the engine net cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Al-
through the air intake, causing severe ways fasten items being carried as securely
internal engine damage. Any such dam- as possible using the cargo tie-down rings in
age is not covered by the the cargo floor area and fastening materials.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
338
Operation
Driving abroad Control and operation of radio Telephones and two-way radios
transmitters
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Warning! G
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas Modular COMAND System, radio and
telephone* Never operate radio transmitters equipped
which are not listed in the index of your
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center directo-
ry, you should request pertinent informa- Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
tion from an authorized Mercedes-Benz
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
Light Truck Center. Do not forget that your primary responsibili-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
ty is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
Modular COMAND System, radio or tele-
personal injury.
phone1 if road, weather and traffic condi-
tions permit.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
telephone or a citizens band unit should
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
connected to an antenna that is installed
ly 14 m) every second.
on the outside of the vehicle.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
339
Operation
Catalytic converter Engine adjustments should not be altered

Warning! G in any way. Moreover, the specified service
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with jobs must be carried out regularly accord-
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- ing to Mercedes-Benz servicing require-
important element in conjunction with the erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- ments. For details refer to the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con- ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves Maintenance Booklet.
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis- can come into contact with the hot exhaust
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
operating condition by following our rec- and cause a vehicle fire. Warning! G
ommended maintenance instructions as
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. Emission control your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
! monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
Certain engine systems serve to keep the sciousness and possible death.
To prevent damage to the catalytic con- toxic components of the exhaust gases
verters, use only premium unleaded within permissible legal limits. Do not run the engine in confined areas
gasoline in this vehicle. (such as a garage) which are not properly
These systems, of course, will function ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
Any noticeable irregularities in engine properly only when maintained strictly ac- fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
operation should be repaired promptly. cording to factory specifications. Any ad- have the cause determined and corrected
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel justments on the engine should, therefore, immediately. If you must drive under these
may reach the catalytic converter, be carried out only by qualified conditions, drive only with at least one win-
causing it to overheat and potentially Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center autho- dow fully open at all times.
start a fire. rized technicians.
340
Operation
Coolant temperature
Warning! G
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem- 앫 Driving when your engine is badly over-
perature may rise to approx. 248°F heated can cause some fluids which
(120°C). may have leaked into the engine com-
partment to catch fire. You could be se-
The engine should not be operated with riously burned.
the coolant temperature in the red zone. 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
Doing so may cause serious engine dam- cause serious burns and can occur just
age which is not covered by the by opening the engine hood. Stay away
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
341
Operation
At the gas station
Refueling !
The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
Warning! G damage the vehicle paint finish.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish !
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
To prevent damaging the lens of the
flame or smoking materials near gasoline! 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter plastic tail lamp, make certain that no
switch. gasoline comes into contact with it.
The fuel filler flap is located on the 왘 Push on fuel filler flap at the position in-
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the dicated the arrow and open fuel filler
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with flap. Warning! G
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap. 왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
to it until possible pressure is released. sure in the system which could cause a gas
왘 Take off the fuel cap. discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
zle, which could cause personal injury.
342
Operation
At the gas station
왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it clock- i Check regularly and before a long trip
wise until it audibly engages. Leaving the engine running and the fuel
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 345).
왘 Close the fuel filler flap. cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and
i the ? malfunction indicator lamp
Only use premium unleaded gasoline (USA only) or the ± malfunction in-
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating dicator lamp (Canada only) comes on.
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). For more information, see “Practical
Information on gasoline quality can hints” (컄 page 408).
normally be found on the fuel pump.
For more information on gasoline, see
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet. 1 Coolant level
2 Brake fluid
3 Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Engine oil level

For more information on engine oil, see
“Engine oil” (컄 page 346).
343
Operation
At the gas station
Coolant Windshield/rear window washer

system and headlamp cleaning
For normal replenishing, use water (pota-
system*
ble water quality). For more information,
see “Coolant level” (컄 page 351) and For more information on refilling the reser-
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” voir, see “Windshield/rear window washer
(컄 page 521). system and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 352).
Brake fluid
Vehicle lighting
!
Check function and cleanliness. For infor-
If you find that the brake fluid in the
mation on replacing light bulbs, see “Re-
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
placing bulbs” (컄 page 465).
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad For more information, see “Exterior lamp
thickness and leaks immediately. Noti- switch” (컄 page 147).
fy an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center immediately. Do not add Tire inflation pressure
brake fluid as this will not solve the For more information, see “Checking tire
problem. For more information, see inflation pressure” (컄 page 365).
“Brake fluid” (컄 page 523).
344
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood 왘 Pull release lever 1 downwards. 왘 Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood is unlocked. Handle 2 pro- The hood will be automatically held
Warning! G trudes slightly from the radiator grille.
If not, lift the hood slightly.
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- !
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
To avoid damage to the windshield wip- Warning! G
be forced open by passing air flow.
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
wiper arms are folded forward away
Opening moving parts when the hood is open and the
from the windshield.
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades. 컄컄
1 Hood lock release lever

2 Handle for opening the hood
왘 Press and hold handle 2 in direction
of arrow.
The hood is unlocked.
345
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄 Closing Engine oil

Warning! G
The amount of oil your engine needs will
If you see flames or smoke coming from the Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- driving style. Increased oil consumption
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is can occur when
anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
앫 the vehicle is new
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, 왘 Let the hood drop from a height of 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at
call the fire department. approximately 1 ft (30 cm). higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G 왘 Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed. i
The engine is equipped with a transistorized If you can raise the hood at a point Do not use any special lubricant addi-
ignition system. Because of the high voltage above the headlamps, then it is not tives, as these may damage the drive
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig- properly closed. Open it again and let it assemblies. Using special additives not
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic drop with somewhat greater force. approved by Mercedes-Benz may
socket) of the ignition system cause damage not covered by the
! Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫 with the engine running
Do not push the hood closed manually,
앫 while starting the engine More information on this subject is
as this could damage it.
앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
turned manually Truck Center.
346
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the 왘 Press button k or j on the i

control system (R 500 only) steering wheel until the following If you want to interrupt the checking
message appears in the multifunction procedure, press the k or j
When checking the oil level
display: button on the multifunction steering
앫 the vehicle must be parked on level
wheel.
ground
앫 with the engine at operating tempera- 왘 If necessary, add engine oil.
ture, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 5 minutes with For adding engine oil, see (컄 page 523).
the engine turned off For more information on engine oil, see the
앫 with the engine not at operating tem- One of the following messages will “Technical data” section (컄 page 521) and
perature yet, the vehicle must have subsequently appear in the indicator: (컄 page 523).
been stationary for at least 30 minutes 앫 Engine oil level ok
with the engine turned off Other display messages
앫 Add 1.0 qt. to reach max. oil
To check the engine oil level via the If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2
level
multifunction display, do the following: in the starter switch, the following
(Canada: 1.0 liter) message will appear:
앫 Add 1.5 qts. to reach max. oil Switch ignition on
The standard display (컄 page 168) should level to check engine oil level
appear in the multifunction display.
(Canada: 1.5 liters) 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
앫 Add 2.0 qts. to reach max. oil
level
(Canada: 2.0 liters)
347
Operation
Engine compartment
If you see the message: If there is excess engine oil with the engine Checking engine oil level with the oil
at operating temperature, the following dipstick (R 350 only)
Observe waiting period
message will appear:
When checking the oil level
왘 If engine is at operating temperature,
Engine oil level
wait 5 minutes before repeating check 앫 the vehicle must be parked on level
Reduce oil level
procedure. ground
왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained
왘 If engine is not at operating tempera- 앫 with the engine at operating tempera-
off. Contact an authorized
ture, wait 30 minutes before repeating ture, the vehicle must have been
check procedure. stationary for at least 5 minutes with
! the engine turned off
If you see the message:
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained 앫 with the engine not at operating tem-
Engine oil level
Not when engine on off. It could cause damage to the perature yet, the vehicle also must
engine and catalytic converter not have been stationary for at least
왘 Turn off the engine. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited 5 minutes with the engine turned off
왘 If the engine is at operating tempera- Warranty.
ture, wait 5 minutes before checking
oil. For more information on messages in the
display concerning engine oil, see the
왘 If the engine is not at operating temper-
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 437).
ature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
before checking oil.
348
Operation
Engine compartment
To check the engine oil level with the oil The oil level is correct when it is between Adding engine oil
dipstick, do the following: lower mark 3 (min.) and upper mark 2
(max.) mark of the oil dipstick. !
Only use approved engine oils and oil
i filters required for vehicles with Main-
The filling quantity between the upper tenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
and lower marks on the oil dipstick is FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). For a list-
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). ing of approved engine oils and oil fil-
ters, refer to the Factory Approved
왘 If necessary, add engine oil. Service Products pamphlet in your ve-
hicle literature portfolio, or contact an
For more information on engine oil, see authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
“Technical data” section (컄 page 521) and Center.
(컄 page 523).
1 Oil dipstick Using engine oils and oil filters of spec-
See the “Practical hints” section ification other than those expressly re-
2 Upper mark (컄 page 437) if the low engine oil level
3 Lower mark quired for the Maintenance System
warning lamp in the instrument cluster (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1. flashes. vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
왘 Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean. at change intervals longer than those
called for by the Maintenance System
왘 Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
dipstick guide tube.
vehicles) will result in engine damage
왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
approximately 3 seconds to obtain Limited Warranty.
accurate reading.
349
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. Transmission fluid level

왘 Add engine oil as required. Never over-
The transmission fluid level does not need
fill with oil.
to be checked. If you notice transmission
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
entering the ground or water. Truck Center check the automatic trans-
mission.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
R 350 off. It will cause damage to the engine
and catalytic converter not covered by
1 Filler cap the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.

For more information on engine oil, see
“Technical data” section (컄 page 521) and
(컄 page 523).
R 500
1 Filler cap
350
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant level 왘 Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly approx-

앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres- imately one half turn counterclockwise
The engine coolant is a mixture of water sure. If opened immediately, scalding to release any excess pressure.
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check hot fluid and steam will be blown out un- 왘 Continue turning cap 1 counterclock-
the coolant level, the vehicle must be der pressure. wise and remove it.
parked on level ground and the engine
앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
must be cool. Coolant level 4 is correct if the level:
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con- 앫 for cold coolant: reaches the top of
Warning! G tact with hot engine parts. indicator wall 3 visible through the
filling opening
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫 for warm coolant: is approximately
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
hood if there are any signs of steam or
왘 Add coolant as required.
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi- 왘 Replace and tighten cap 1.
cates that the coolant is overheated.
For more information on coolant, see the
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
“Technical data” section (컄 page 525).
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and 1 Cap
is under pressure. 2 Coolant expansion tank
3 Indicator wall
4 Coolant level
351
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield/rear window washer During all seasons, add MB Windshield !

system and headlamp cleaning Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix Only use washer fluid which is suitable
system* the windshield washer fluid in a suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer
container. fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
The windshield washer reservoir is located the headlamps.
in the engine compartment.
Warning! G
For more information, see “Windshield and
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio”
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze (컄 page 528).
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
왘 Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards.

왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or
1 Cap commercially available premixed wind-
2 Windshield washer reservoir shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-
Fluid for the windshield washer system and pending on ambient temperatures).
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
from the windshield washer reservoir. It where temperatures may fall below
has a capacity of 8.0 US qt (7.6 l). freezing point. Failure to do so could
result in damage to the washer
system/reservoir.
352
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Important guidelines
Truck Center for information on tested and Warning! G
recommended rims and tires for summer 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
and winter operation. They can also offer Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
advice concerning tire service and tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
purchase. sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
speeds.
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
original part. See an authorized damage. Dented or bent rims can
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for fur- Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- cause tire inflation pressure loss and
ther information. If incorrectly sized rims mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage to the tire beads.
and tires are mounted: damage cannot always be recognized on 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension retreads. The operating safety of the inflation pressure and correct as
components can be damaged. vehicle cannot be assured when such tires required.
are used.
앫 The operating clearance of the wheels 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
and the tires may no longer be correct. too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
353
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance Tire inspection Life of tire

Every time you check your tire inflation The service life of a tire is dependent upon
Warning! G pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫 Driving style
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam- 앫 excessive treadwear (컄 page 355)
앫 Tire inflation pressure
aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
앫 cord or fabric showing through the
loss. As a result, you could lose control of 앫 Distance driven
tire’s rubber
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
앫 bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Warning! G
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them. Replace the tire if you find any of the above Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
conditions. 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
at least once a month. For more informa- periodically for condition and inflation.
tion on checking tire inflation pressure, Spare tires will age and become worn over
see “Recommended tire inflation pres- time even if never used, and thus should be
sure” (컄 page 363). inspected and replaced when necessary.
354
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth Storing tires

to wear down to that level. As tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion !
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are properties on a wet road are sharply re-
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
sharply reduced at tread depths under duced.
1 place with as little exposure to light as
/8 in (3 mm). Depending upon the weather and/or road possible. Protect tires from contact
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by surface (conditions), the tire traction varies with oil, grease and gasoline.
law. These indicators are located in six widely.
places on the tread circumference and Cleaning tires
become visible at a tread depth of approx-
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point !
the tire is considered worn and should be Never use a round nozzle to power
replaced. wash tires. The intense jet of water can
Recommended minimum tire tread depth: result in damage to the tire.
앫 Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm) Always replace a damaged tire.
앫 Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning! G 1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)

Although the applicable federal motor safety The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
laws consider a tire to be worn when the band across the tread.
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recom-
mend that you do not allow your tires
355
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle 앫 The Certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
Unidirectional tires offer added advan- Two labels on your vehicle show how much the gross weight capacity of your vehi-
tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor- weight it may properly carry. cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
mance. To benefit, however, you must Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
앫 The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire
specified. fuel and cargo. The Certification label
Information placard (Example B) can be
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This also tells you about the front and rear
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of placard tells you important information axle weight capacity, called the Gross
the tire. about the number of people that can be Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
in the vehicle and the total weight that is the total allowable weight that can be
i can be carried in the vehicle. It also carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Spare wheels may be mounted against contains information on the proper size Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
the direction of rotation (spinning) even and recommended tire inflation either the front axle or rear axle.
with a unidirectional tire for temporary pressures for the original equipment
use only until the regular drive wheel tires on your vehicle.
has been repaired or replaced. Always
observe and follow applicable tempo-
rary use restrictions and speed limita-
tions indicated on the spare wheel.
356
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information i

Data shown on placard examples are
Warning! G for illustration purposes only. Load lim-
it data are specific to each vehicle and
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the may vary from data shown in the illus-
specified load limit as indicated on the plac- trations below. Refer to placard on ve-
ard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading hicle for actual data specific to your
the tires can overheat them, possibly caus- vehicle.
ing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or Placard (Example A)
brake failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with either the

Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B).
1 Driver’s door B-pillar

Following is a discussion on how to work 1 Load limit information on the Tire and
with the information contained on the two Loading Information placard
placards with regards to loading your vehi-
cle.
357
Operation
Tires and wheels
The placard showing the load limit informa- The placard showing the load limit informa- Never let more people ride in the vehicle
tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. than there are designated seating posi-
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle tions and seat belts available. Be sure
Loading Information placard (Example A), Tire Information placard (Example B), everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
locate the statement “The combined locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity restrained with a separate seat belt.
weight of occupants and cargo should Weight” on this placard. The combined
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage i
on this placard. The combined weight of all and trailer tongue (if applicable) should Data shown on placard examples are
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer never exceed the weight listed next to for illustration purposes only. Seating
tongue load (if applicable) should never vehicle capacity weight. data are specific to each vehicle and
exceed the weight referenced in that may vary from data shown in the illus-
statement. Seating capacity tration below. Refer to placard on vehi-
cle for actual data specific to your
The seating capacity gives you important
Placard (Example B) vehicle.
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. Depending on
production date, your vehicle may be
equipped with placard Example A or plac-
ard Example B.
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
placard A nor other placard posting the
seating capacity. If this is the case, legal
requirements at time of production of your
1 Load limit information on the Vehicle vehicle did not require manufacturers to
Tire Information placard post the seating capacity.
358
Operation
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining correct load limit Step 3

The following steps have been developed 왘 Subtract the combined weight of
as required of all manufacturers under Title the driver and passengers from
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Step 4
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
왘 The resulting figure equals the avail-
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
able amount of cargo and luggage load
Example A)
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
왘 Locate the statement “The combined amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
Placard (Example A) weight of occupants and cargo should be five 150 lbs. passengers in your
1 Seating capacity never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on vehicle, the amount of available cargo
your vehicle’s placard. and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example B) Step 5
왘 Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity 왘 Determine the combined weight of
Weight” on your vehicle’s placard. luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
Step 2
exceed the available cargo and luggage
왘 Determine the combined weight of the load capacity calculated in step 4. 컄컄
driver and passengers that will be
Placard (Example B) riding in your vehicle.
1 Seating capacity
359
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 Step 6 (if applicable)

왘 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 362).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 357).
360
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined Number of Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight limit occupants configura- weight of all tongue weight (total load limit from
of occu- (driver and tion occupants placard minus combined weight of
pants and passengers) all occupants)
cargo from
placard
1 1500 lbs 5 front: 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2 1500 lbs 3 front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs 540 lbs 1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3 1500 lbs 1 front:1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 362).
361
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The Trailer tongue load
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
Even after careful determination of the The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
combined weight of all occupants, cargo tant weight to measure because it affects
(컄 page 362) must never exceed the
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
GVWR.
(컄 page 362) as to not exceed the permis- trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
sible load limit, you must make sure that Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to- added to the weight of all occupants riding
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi- tal allowable weight that can be carried by and any cargo you are carrying in the
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross a single axle (front or rear). vehicle. The tongue load typically is
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
between 10% and 15% of the trailer weight
front or rear axle. You can obtain the ceed the maximum permissible weight
and everything loaded in it.
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification la- limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
bel. The Certification Label can be found axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap-
data” (컄 page 510). plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
362
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure Your vehicle is equipped with either the i
Tire and Loading Information placard (Ex- Data shown on placard examples are
ample A) or the Vehicle Tire Information for illustration purposes only. Tire data
Warning! G Placard (Example B) located on the driver's are specific to each vehicle and may
door B-pillar (컄 page 357). vary from data shown in the illustra-
Follow recommended tire inflation
The tire inflation pressure should be tions below. Refer to placard on vehicle
pressures.
checked regularly and should only be ad- for actual data specific to your vehicle.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-
wear excessively and/or unevenly, sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked Placard (Example A)
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, for at least 3 hours or driven less than
and are more likely to fail from being over- 1 mile (1.6 km).
heated.
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires pressures listed on placard.
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping Keeping the tires properly inflated
distance, and result in sudden deflation provides the best handling, tread life and
(blowout) because they are more likely to riding comfort.
become punctured or damaged by road In addition to the tire placard on the
debris, potholes etc. driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel
filler flap for any additional information 1 Tire and Loading Information placard
pertaining to special driving situations. For with recommended cold tire inflation
more information, see “Important notes on pressures
tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 364).
363
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example A) lists the recommend- Important notes on tire inflation Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi- pressure pressure for normal driving speeds. You
mum loaded vehicle weight. The tire should wait until the tires are cold before
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.
Warning! G adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeated- inflation pressure information for vehicle
Placard (Example B) ly: loads less than the maximum loaded vehi-
앫 Check the tires for punctures from cle condition. If such information is provid-
foreign objects. ed, it can be found on the placard located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim. Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi-
mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure air temperature change. Keep this in mind
are also increased while driving, depending when checking tire inflation pressure
on the driving speed and the tire load. where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
recommended tire inflation pressures where it is legal and conditions allow,
Placard (Example B) lists the recommend- consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi- filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire in-
mum loaded vehicle weight. The tire flation pressure. If you do not adjust the
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
installed as original equipment. build up and result in sudden tire failure.
364
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure Checking tire inflation pressure

Warning! G manually
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
Follow recommended tire inflation Follow the steps below to achieve correct
at least once a month.
pressures. tire inflation pressure:
Check and adjust the tire inflation
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires 왘 Remove the cap from the valve on one
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, tire.
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or driven adversely affect handling and fuel economy, 왘 Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
less than 1 mile (1.6 km). and are more likely to fail from being over- valve.
heated.
If you check the tire inflation pressure 왘 Read tire inflation pressure on tire
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires gauge and check against the recom-
been driven for several miles or sitting less can adversely affect handling and ride mended tire inflation pressure on the
than 3 hours), the reading will be comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than distance, and result in sudden deflation (컄 page 357) or, if available, the inside
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let (blowout) because they are more likely to of the fuel filler flap. If necessary, add
air out to match the specified cold tire become punctured or damaged by road air to achieve the recommended tire in-
inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will debris, potholes etc. flation pressure. 컄컄
be underinflated. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the plac-
ard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading
the tires can overheat them, possibly caus-
ing a blowout.
365
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 i Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)

If you have overfilled the tire, release While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Warning! G
tire inflation pressure by pushing the Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation When the multifunction display shows the
metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota- message Tire pressure Check tires,
a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation tional speed. This allows the system to de- one or more of your tires is significantly un-
pressure with the tire gauge. tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. der-inflated. You should stop and check
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
왘 Install the valve cap. to falling tire inflation pressure, you will them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
see a corresponding warning message in indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire.
the multifunction display. placard. Driving on a significantly under-in-
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a re- flated tire causes the tire to overheat and
stricted manner or with a delay if: can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
앫 snow chains are mounted to the
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
vehicle
stopping ability. Each tire, including the
앫 winter road conditions prevail spare, should be checked monthly when
앫 you are driving on a loose surface (e.g. cold and set to the recommended tire infla-
sand or gravel) tion pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and owner’s manual.
앫 you are driving in a very sporty manner
(involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)
366
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator

The recommended tire inflation pres-
Warning! G The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
sures for your vehicle can be found on reactivated in the following situations:
The Run Flat Indicator does not indicate a
the tire placard located on the driver’s
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation 앫 If you have changed the tire inflation
door B-pillar (컄 page 357). The tire in-
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres- pressure
flation pressures are not listed in the
sure according to the placard on the driver’s
owner’s manual. 앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires
door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
앫 If you have installed new wheels or
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace reg-
tires
ular checks of the tire inflation pressures
since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires 왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s
cannot be detected by the Run Flat door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
Indicator. of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a inflation pressure of all four tires is cor-
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of rect.
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case Warning! G
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-
ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in
maneuvers. a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
set, the system will monitor the pressure ac-
cording to the incorrect value.
367
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). If you wish to confirm activation: Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Make sure the standard display menu 왘 Press button æ.
System (TPMS), (USA only)
appears in the multifunction display
The following message will appear in
(컄 page 168). i
the multifunction display:
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Run Flat Indicator The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
until the following message appears in reactivated (TPMS) is equipped with a combination
the multifunction display: low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure telltale in the instrument cluster
values for all four tires. (컄 page 24). Depending on how the
telltale illuminates, it indicates a low
If you wish to cancel activation: tire pressure condition or a malfunction
왘 Press button ç. in the TPMS system itself:
or 앫 If the telltale illuminates continu-
왘 Press button æ. ously, one or more of your tires is
왘 Wait until the message
The following message will appear in significantly underinflated. There is
Tire pressure now OK?
the multifunction display: no malfunction in the TPMS.
disappears.
Tire pressure now OK? 앫 If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds
and then stays illuminated, the
TPMS system itself is not operating
properly.
368
Operation
Tires and wheels
The TPMS only functions on wheels that

are equipped with the proper electronic Warning! G Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
sure, as selected by the driver, in all four
should be checked monthly when cold and note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- proper tire maintenance, and it is the
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tires.
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure tire pressure, even if underinflation has not
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different reached the level to trigger illumination of
Warning! G size than the size indicated on the vehicle the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
placard or the tire inflation pressure label, Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
you should determine the proper tire infla- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
tion pressure for those tires). when the system is not operating properly.
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
available, the supplemental tire pressure in-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire When the system detects a malfunction, the
formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
pressure telltale when one or more of your telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due tires is significantly underinflated. Accord- and then remain continuously illuminated.
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- This sequence will continue upon subse-
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In minates, you should stop and check your quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care- tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to function exists. When the malfunction
fully applying the brakes and avoiding the proper pressure. Driving on a significant- indicator is illuminated, the system may not
abrupt steering maneuvers. ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over- be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
heat and can lead to tire failure. as intended. 컄컄
369
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 i Reactivating the TPMS

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of in- If a condition causing the TPMS to mal- The TPMS must be reactivated when you
compatible replacement or alternate tires or function develops, it may take up to have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS 10 minutes for the system to signal a a new level (e.g. because of different load
from functioning properly. Always check the malfunction using the TPMS telltale or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing flashing and illumination sequence. recalibrated to the current tire inflation
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle The telltale extinguishes after a few pressures.
to ensure that the replacement or alternate minutes driving if the malfunction has
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
been corrected. Warning! G
i It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla-
Operating radio transmission equip-
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
radios) in or near the vehicle could
might lose control over the vehicle.
cause the TPMS to malfunction.
왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s

door B-pillar (컄 page 357) or, if avail-
able, the supplemental tire pressure
information on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (컄 page 342), make sure the
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
370
Operation
Tires and wheels
i 왘 Press the j or k button repeat- Checking tire pressure electronically

Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting edly until you see the following with the Advanced Tire Pressure Moni-
the tire inflation pressure to the infla- message: toring System* (Advanced TPMS*),
tion pressure recommended for the Tire pressure monitor (Canada only)
vehicle operating condition. Tire pres- active
Reactivation possible: i
sure should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Observe the recommended tire R-button The Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
inflation pressure on the placard on the System* (Advanced TPMS*) is
왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 158).
driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 357). equipped with a combination low tire
The following message will appear in pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in
Some vehicles may have supplemental
the multifunction display: the instrument cluster (컄 page 24). De-
tire pressure information for driving at
Check current pending on how the telltale illuminates,
high speeds (컄 page 364) or for vehicle
tire pressure? it indicates a low tire pressure condi-
loads less than the maximum loaded
왘 Press the æ button. tion or a malfunction in the TPMS sys-
vehicle condition (컄 page 364). If such
tem itself:
information is provided, it can be found The following message will appear in
on the inside of the fuel filler flap. 앫 If the telltale illuminates continu-
Tire pressure monitor ously, one or more of your tires is
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- reactivated significantly underinflated. There is
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly no malfunction in the TPMS.
until the standard display menu The TPMS will now monitor the tire in-
앫 If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds
appears in the multifunction display flation pressure values of all four tires.
and then stays illuminated, the
(컄 page 168). If you wish to cancel activation: TPMS system itself is not operating
왘 Press the ç button. properly.
371
Operation
Tires and wheels
The TPMS only functions on wheels that i

are equipped with the proper electronic With a spare wheel without wheel sen-
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressor mounted, the system may still indi-
sure, as selected by the driver, in all four cate the tire inflation pressure of the
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a removed wheel for some minutes. If
decrease in pressure in one or more of the this happens, keep in mind that the in-
tires. dicated value where the spare wheel is
i
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the mounted does not reflect the actual
When the message Tire pressure spare tire inflation pressure.
multifunction display. The present inflation
displayed only after driving a few
pressures are displayed only after a few
minutes appears in the multifunction
minutes’ travel time.
display, the individual inflation pres- Warning! G
i sure values are matched with the tires.
Possible differences between the read- The individual values are displayed af- The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
ings of a tire pressure gauge of an air ter a few minutes driving. wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the vehicle’s control system can occur. the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
Usually the readings issued by the con- Warning! G available, the supplemental tire pressure in-
trol system are more precise. formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
왘 Press the j or k button until ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
the current inflation pressures for each might lose control over the vehicle. this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care-
tire appear in the multifunction display. fully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
372
Operation
Tires and wheels
i
Warning! G Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may effect the vehi- If a condition causing the TPMS to mal-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please function develops, it may take up to
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for 10 minutes for the system to signal a
should be checked monthly when cold and
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- malfunction using the TPMS telltale
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire flashing and illumination sequence.
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure pressure, even if underinflation has not The telltale extinguishes after a few
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different reached the level to trigger illumination of minutes driving if the malfunction has
size than the size indicated on the vehicle the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. been corrected.
placard or the tire inflation pressure label, Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
you should determine the proper tire infla- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate i
Operating radio transmission equip-
ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the TPMS to malfunction.
tires are significantly underinflated. Accord- and then remain continuously illuminated.
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- This sequence will continue upon subse-
minates, you should stop and check your quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
tires as soon as possible. Driving on a signif- function exists. When the malfunction
icantly underinflated tire causes the tire to indicator is illuminated, the system may not
overheat and can lead to tire failure. be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
373
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating Advanced TPMS* i 왘 Press the j or k button repeat-

Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting edly until you see the current inflation
The TPMS must be reactivated when you
the tire inflation pressure to the infla- pressures for each tire appear in the
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
tion pressure recommended for the display or the following message
a new level (e.g. because of different load
vehicle operating condition. Tire pres- appears in the multifunction display:
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
sure should only be adjusted on cold Tire pressure displayed
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
tires. Observe the recommended tire only after driving
pressures.
inflation pressure on the placard on the a few minutes
driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 357).
Warning! G Some vehicles may have supplemental
왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 158).
The following message will appear in
tire pressure information for driving at
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate the multifunction display:
high speeds (컄 page 364) or for vehicle
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- Check current
loads less than the maximum loaded
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the tire pressure?
vehicle condition (컄 page 364). If such
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
information is provided, it can be found 왘 Press the æ button.
might lose control over the vehicle.
on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The following message will appear in
왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- Tire pressure monitor
door B-pillar (컄 page 357) or, if avail- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly reactivated
able, the supplemental tire pressure until the standard display menu
information on the inside of the fuel appears in the multifunction display The TPMS will now monitor the tire in-
filler flap (컄 page 342), make sure the (컄 page 168). flation pressure values of all four tires.
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is If you wish to cancel activation:
correct.
왘 Press the ç button.
374
Operation
Tires and wheels
Potential problems associated with Overinflated tire inflation pressure Tire labeling
underinflated and overinflated tires
Overinflated tires can:
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
Underinflated tire inflation pressure 앫 adversely affect handling manufacturer name, a number of markings
characteristics can be found on a tire.
Underinflated tires can
앫 cause uneven tire wear Following are some explanations for the
앫 cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫 be more prone to damage from road markings on your vehicle’s tires:
앫 adversely affect fuel economy
hazards
앫 lead to tire failure from being
앫 adversely affect ride comfort
overheated
앫 increase stopping distance
앫 adversely affect handling
characteristics
Warning! G
Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
distance, and result in sudden deflation
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
(blowout) because they are more likely to
and are more likely to fail from being
become punctured or damaged by road
overheated.
debris, potholes etc.
375
Operation
Tires and wheels
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards Tire size designation, load and speed General:
(컄 page 383) rating
Depending on the design standards used,
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
(컄 page 380)
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 382)
size designation.
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 382) No letter preceding the size designation
5 Manufacturer (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 385) based on European design standards.
7 Tire size designation, load and speed Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
rating (컄 page 376) Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
8 Load identification (컄 page 380) standards.
9 Tire name 1 Tire width
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
2 Aspect ratio in %
i 3 Radial tire code
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
For illustration purposes only. Actual standards.
4 Rim diameter
data on tires are specific to each vehi- 5 Tire load rating Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
cle and may vary from data shown in 6 Tire speed rating Temporary spare tires which are high
above illustration. pressure compact spares designed for
For more information, see “Rims and
i temporary emergency use only.
tires” (컄 page 514). For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi- Tire width
cle and may vary from data shown in
The tire width 1 (컄 page 376) indicates
above illustration.
the nominal tire width in mm.
376
Operation
Tires and wheels
Aspect ratio Rim diameter

The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 376) is the The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 376) is the
Warning! G
dimensional relationship between tire diameter of the bead seat, not the The tire load rating must always be at least
section height and section width and is diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is half of the GAWR (컄 page 386) of your vehi-
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio indicated in inches (in). cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
is arrived at by dividing section height by which may cause an accident and/or seri-
section width. Tire load rating ous personal injury to you or others.
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 376) is a Always replace rims and tires with the same
Tire code
numerical code associated with the designation, manufacturer and type as
The tire code 3 (컄 page 376) indicates maximum load a tire can support. shown on the original part.
the tire construction type. The “R” stands For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag- sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
onal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support. Warning! G
See also “Maximum tire load”
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire (컄 page 382) where the maximum load as- Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
with a speed capability above 149 mph sociated with the load index is indicated in specified load limit as indicated on the plac-
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size kilograms and lbs. ard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). Overloading the tires can overheat them,
For additional information, see “Tire speed possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
rating” (컄 page 378). tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
377
Operation
Tires and wheels
For additional information on tire load Tire speed rating Summer tires
rating, see “Load identification”
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 376) Index Speed rating
(컄 page 380).
indicates the approved maximum speed
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
i for the tire.
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 376) and
tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 376) are Warning! G S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
also referred to as “service descrip- T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
tion”. Even when permitted by law, never operate
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires. V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Exceeding the maximum speed for which W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
(Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
and for others.
앫 At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
i 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 376) and “ZR” in the size designation (for exam-
tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 376) are ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
also referred to as “service descrip- maximum speed capability of the tire,
tion”. the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
378
Operation
Tires and wheels
is comprised of the tire load rating 5 앫 Any tire with a speed capability above All-season and winter tires
(컄 page 376) and the tire speed 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
rating 6 (컄 page 376). “ZR” in the size designation AND the Index Speed rating
1
service description must be placed in Q M+S up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
designation and no service
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren-
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 376) is H M+S 1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
thesis designates the maximum speed
given, the tire manufacturer must be 1
capability of the tire as being above V M+S up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
consulted for the maximum speed ca-
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire 1 or M+S . for winter tires
pability.
manufacturer for the actual maximum
If a service description 5 and 6 permissible speed of the tire.
(컄 page 376) is given, the speed capa- i
bility is limited by the speed symbol in Not all M+S rated radial-ply tires pro-
the service description. vide special winter performance. Make
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. sure the tires you use show M+S and
In this example, “97Y” is the service the mountain/snowflake
description. The letter “Y” designates marking .on the tire sidewall.
the speed rating and the speed capabil- These tires meet specific snow traction
ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph performance requirements of the Rub-
(300 km/h). ber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
(RAC) and have been designed specifi-
cally for use in snow conditions.
379
Operation
Tires and wheels
Load identification In addition to tire load rating, special load DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 380). manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
No specification given: absence of any text
produced.
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire. The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load
purchasers in recall situations or other
(or reinforced) tire.
safety matters concerning tires and gives
Light Load: designates a light load tire. purchasers the means to easily identify
1 Load identification C, D, E: designates load range associated such tires.
with the maximum load a tire can carry at The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
i a specified pressure. identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
For illustration purposes only. Actual code” and “Date of manufacture”.
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
above illustration.
380
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation) Tire type code

A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 381) The code 4 (컄 page 381) may, at the
which denotes the tire meets require- option of the manufacturer, be used as a
ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor- descriptive code for identifying significant
tation. characteristics of the tire.
Manufacturer’s identification mark Date of manufacture

The manufacturer’s identification mark 2 The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 381)
(컄 page 381) denotes the tire identifies the week and year of manufac-
1 DOT manufacturer. ture.
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark New tires have a mark with two symbols. The first two figures identify the week,
3 Tire size starting with “01” to represent the first full
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
week of the calendar year. The second two
manufacturer) bols. For more information on retreaded
figures represent the year.
5 Date of manufacture tires, see (컄 page 353).
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
i Tire size week of 2002.
For illustration purposes only. Actual The code 3 (컄 page 381) indicates the
data on tires are specific to each vehi- tire size.
above illustration.
381
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire load Maximum tire inflation pressure

Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the plac-
ard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
For more information on tire load rating

1 Maximum tire load rating 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
(컄 page 377).
pressure
i For information on calculating total and
For illustration purposes only. Actual cargo load capacities (컄 page 359). i
data on tires are specific to each vehi- For illustration purposes only. Actual
cle and may vary from data shown in data on tires are specific to each vehi-
above illustration. cle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support. This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
382
Operation
Tires and wheels
Always follow the recommended tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Quality grades can be found, where appli-
inflation pressure (컄 page 363) for proper (U.S. vehicles) cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
tire inflation. shoulder and maximum section width. For
Tire manufacturers are required to grade example:
tires based on three performance
Warning! G factors: treadwear, traction and Treadwear Traction Temperature
temperature resistance. 200 AA A
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures. All passenger car tires must conform to
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires federal safety requirements in addition to
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse- these grades.
ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride com-
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-
tance, and result in sudden deflation 1 Treadwear
(blowout) because they are more likely to 2 Traction
become punctured or damaged by road de- 3 Temperature resistance
bris, potholes etc.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
above illustration.
383
Operation
Tires and wheels
Treadwear Traction Temperature

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- The traction grades, from highest to low- The temperature grades are A (the high-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep- est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tested under controlled conditions on a resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet tance to the generation of heat and its
specified government test course. For ex- pavement as measured under controlled ability to dissipate heat when tested under
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one conditions on specified government test controlled conditions on a specified indoor
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
government course as a tire graded 100. marked C may have poor traction perfor- perature can cause the material of the tire
The relative performance of tires depends mance. to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
upon the actual conditions of their use, cessive temperature can lead to sudden
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
Warning! G tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
habits, service practices and differences in The traction grade assigned to this tire is car tires must meet under the Federal
road characteristics and climate. based on straight-ahead braking traction Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
tests, and does not include acceleration, Grades B and A represent higher levels of
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction performance on the laboratory test wheel
characteristics. than the minimum required by law.
384
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply material Tire and loading terminology

Warning! G
The temperature grade for this tire is estab- Accessory weight
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and The combined weight (in excess of those
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin- standard items which may be replaced) of
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa- automatic transmission, power steering,
rately or in combination, can cause power brakes, power windows, power
excessive heat build-up and possible tire seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
failure. these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread Air pressure
i The amount of air inside the tire pressing
For illustration purposes only. Actual outward on each square inch of the tire.
data on tires are specific to each vehi- Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
cle and may vary from data shown in square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
above illustration. bars.
This marking tells you about the type of Aspect ratio

cord and number of plies in the sidewall Dimensional relationship between tire
and under the tread. section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
385
Operation
Tires and wheels
Bar DOT (Department of Transportation) GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

Another metric unit for air pressure. There A tire branding symbol which denotes the The GVW comprises the weight of the
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) tire meets requirements of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) U.S. Department of Transportation. installed accessories, passengers and
to 1 bar. cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) load. The GWV must never exceed the
Bead GWVR indicated on the Certification label
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
rim. the front and rear axle indicated on the
Certification label located on the driver’s This is the maximum permissible vehicle
Cold tire inflation pressure door B-pillar. weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle the vehicle including all options, passen-
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus
Certification label located on the driver’s
the weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage
Curb weight door B-pillar.
etc. loaded on the trailer.
The weight of a motor vehicle with stan- Kilopascal (kPa)
dard equipment including the maximum
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
equipped, air conditioning and additional
pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals
optional equipment, but without passen-
(kPa) to 1 bar.
gers and cargo.
386
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum load rating Production options weight Rim

The maximum load in kilograms and The combined weight of those installed A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
pounds that can be carried by the tire. regular production options weighing over assembly upon which the tire beads are
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those seated.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or Sidewall
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
accessory weight, including heavy duty
vehicle capacity weight and production The portion of a tire between the tread and
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
options weight. the bead.
battery, and special trim.
Maximum tire inflation pressure TIN (Tire Identification Number)
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This number is the greatest amount of air Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
pressure that should ever be put in the tire A standard unit of measure for air pressure by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
under normal driving conditions. -> bar, kilopascal (kPa). in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
Normal occupant weight Recommended tire inflation pressure means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
Recommended tire inflation pressure is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica-
The number of occupants the vehicle is
listed on placard located on driver’s door tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
designed to seat, multiplied by
B-pillar for normal driving conditions. and “Date of manufacture”.
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort. Tire load rating
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle Numerical code associated with the
at their designated seating positions. maximum load a tire can support.
387
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply composition and material used Treadwear indicators Vehicle maximum load on the tire
This indicates the number of plies or the Narrow bands, sometimes called Load on an individual tire that is
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in “wear bars” that show across the tread of determined by distributing to each axle its
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac- a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread share of the maximum loaded vehicle
turers also must indicate the ply materials remains. weight and dividing it by two.
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others. TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) Rotating tires
Maximum permissible weight on trailer
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
tongue.
Warning! G
speed range for which a tire is approved. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
A tire information system that provides are of the same dimension.
Traction
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road temperature and treadwear. Ratings are tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
via the tires. The amount of grip provided. determined by tire manufacturers using rear), tire rotation is not possible.
government testing procedures. The
Tread ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
The portion of a tire that comes into with tires of the same dimension all
contact with the road. around. If your vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle capacity weight
tires of the same dimension all around,
Rated cargo and luggage load plus tires can be rotated, observing a a
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
designated seating capacity. maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 356).
388
Operation
Tires and wheels
In some cases, such as when your vehicle

is equipped with mixed-size tires (different Warning! G
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible. Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
If applicable to your vehicle's tire configu- loose if not tightened with a torque of
ration, tires can be rotated according to 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
the tire manufacturer’s recommended in-
tervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles For information on wheel change, see “Flat
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces- tire” (컄 page 478).
sary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 356).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
389
Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehi- Winter tires

cle winterized at an authorized Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This Always use winter tires at temperatures
service includes: below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no long-
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
radial-ply tires provide special winter per- er suitable for winter operation.
concentration.
formance. Make sure the tires you use
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the show M+S and the mountain/snowflake Always observe the speed rating of the
water of the windshield and headlamp marking.on the tire sidewall. These winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate tires meet specific snow traction perfor- maximum speed for which your tires are
“S” to a premixed windshield washer mance requirements of the Rubber Manu- rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated facturers Association (RMA) and the hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
for temperatures below freezing point Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
(컄 page 528). have been designed specifically for use in tices are available at your tire dealer or any
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
with decreasing ambient temperature. only way to achieve the maximum effec- Center.
A well charged battery helps to make tiveness of the ABS, ESP®, 4-ETS, and EBP
sure that the engine can be started in winter operation.
even at low ambient temperatures. For safe handling, make sure all winter
앫 Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom- tires mounted are of the same make and
mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a have the same tread design.
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
390
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains Please observe the following guidelines

Warning! G when using snow chains:
Snow chains should only be driven on
앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible
If you use your spare tire when winter tires snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex-
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that with all wheel/tire combinations.
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
the difference in tire characteristics may as soon as possible when driving on roads 앫 Snow chains should only be used on all
very well impair turning stability and that without snow. four wheels. With only two chains avail-
overall driving stability may be reduced. able, they should be mounted on the
Adapt your driving style accordingly. ! rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive, mounting instructions.
tire at the nearest authorized use snow chains on rear tires only.
앫 Only use snow chains that are ap-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Some tire sizes do not leave adequate proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
clearance for snow chains. To help rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Block heater (Canada only) avoid serious damage to your vehicle or Center will be glad to advise you on this
tires, use of snow chains is not permis- subject.
The engine is equipped with a block sible with the spare wheel.
앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
heater. depending on location. Always check
The electrical cable may be installed at an i local and state laws before installing
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck When driving with snow chains, you snow chains.
Center. may wish to deactivate the ESP®
(컄 page 101) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the
vehicle’s traction.
391
Operation
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have Starting approximately 1 month before

your vehicle serviced by an authorized maintenance service is due, one of the fol-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in lowing messages will appear in the multi-
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet function display while you are driving or
at the times called for by the maintenance when you switch on the ignition (example
service indicator display. service A):
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Service A in XXXXX miles (km) Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet Service A in XXX days of maintenance services and intervals they
and maintenance service indicator at the Service A in X day need to be performed at.
designated times/mileage will result in ve- Carry out Service A
hicle damage not covered by the i
The maintenance services will be indicated
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS
by showing a service type A through type H
(Flexible Service System PLUS) only
The maintenance service indicator will no- in the multifunction display. Types A
(Canada vehicles): The interval be-
tify you when your next maintenance ser- through H are classified based on estimat-
tween maintenance services depends
vice is due. ed time needed to perform the mainte-
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
nance service, ranging:
style, moderate engine speeds and the
from Service A avoidance of short-distance trips will
(approx. 1 hour) lengthen the interval between services.
to Service H
(approx. 8 hours)
392
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service Maintenance service term exceeded Calling up the maintenance service
indicator indicator
If you have exceeded the suggested main-
The maintenance service indicator is auto- tenance service term, you will see the fol- 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
matically cleared after 10 seconds when lowing message in the multifunction
The standard display of the control sys-
you switch on the ignition or when reach- display:
tem appears (컄 page 168).
ing the service threshold while driving. You
Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)
can also clear it yourself. 왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
Service A exceeded by XXX days
tifunction steering wheel until the
왘 Press reset button on the instrument Service A exceeded by X day
maintenance service indicator with the
cluster (컄 page 158). service symbol 9 and the service
In addition, a signal sounds when the mes-
sage appears. deadline appears in the multifunction
display.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will reset the maintenance service i
indicator following a completed mainte-
If the battery is disconnected, the days
nance service.
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the maintenance
service indicator. To arrive at the true
maintenance service deadline, you will
need to subtract these days from the
days shown in the maintenance service
indicator.
Do not confuse the maintenance ser-
vice indicator with the engine oil level
indicator N.
393
Operation
Maintenance
Resetting the maintenance service i

indicator If the maintenance service indicator
was inadvertently reset, have an autho-
In the event that the maintenance service
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
ter correct it.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center, you can have the maintenance Only reset if the proper maintenance
service indicator reset. The automotive service has been performed. Resetting
maintenance facility carrying out the main- the system without performing the
tenance service will find the information proper service as called for by the
for resetting the maintenance service indi- maintenance service indicator will
cator in the maintenance-relevant informa- result in engine damage and/or other
tion for your vehicle. Such information is vehicle damage not covered by the
available either from either an authorized Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or
directly from Mercedes-Benz.
394
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle Such damage is caused not only by ex- More frequent washings are necessary to
treme and varying climatic conditions, but deal with unfavorable conditions:
also by:
앫
Warning! G 앫 Air pollution
near the ocean
앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. 앫 Road salt emissions)
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
앫 Tar 앫 during winter operation
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s 앫 Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. time for stone chipping or other damage.
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- diately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
signed for cleaning your vehicle. 앫 Grease and oil
Always lock away cleaning products and
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
앫 Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
keep them out of reach of children.
앫 Coolant ough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
While in operation, even while parked, your 앫 Brake fluid aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- 앫 Bird droppings
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at- Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
tack the paintwork as well as the 앫 Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
underbody and cause lasting damage. cavities which will last for the lifetime of
앫 Tree resins, etc.
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by
nates the aggressiveness and potency of Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
the above adverse influences. of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
395
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and Power washer i

compiled recommendations which are Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
specially matched to our vehicles and !
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
which always reflect the latest technology. Follow the instructions provided by the
water, and a SmartKey with
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved power washer manufacturer on main-
KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
car-care products at an authorized taining a distance between the vehicle
within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. and the nozzle of the power washer.
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or Never use a round nozzle to inadvertently locked or unlocked.
damage due to negligent or incorrect care power-wash tires. The intense jet of
cannot always be removed or repaired with water can result in damage to the tire. Tar stains
the car-care products recommended here. Always replace a damaged tire. Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
Always keep the jet of water moving and become more difficult to remove. A tar
across the surface. Do not aim directly remover is recommended.
Center.
at electrical parts, electrical connec-
The following topics deal with the cleaning tors, seals, or other rubber parts.
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
396
Operation
Vehicle care
Paintwork, painted body components Engine cleaning Vehicle washing
! Prior to cleaning the engine compartment In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
make sure to protect electrical compo- of road salt as soon as possible.
Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or sim-
nents and connectors from the intrusion of When washing the underbody, do not for-
ilar materials to painted body compo-
water and cleaning agents. get to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
nents may damage the paintwork.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care rosion Wax, should be applied to the en- i
should be applied when water drops on the gine compartment after every engine Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should cleaning. Before applying, all control link- If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
normally be done every 3 to 5 months, de- age bushings and joints should be lubricat- water, and a SmartKey with
pending on the climate and washing deter- ed. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
gent used. be protected from any wax. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner inadvertently locked or unlocked.
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
왘 Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
397
Operation
Vehicle care
Hand-wash Automatic car wash !

Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle You can have your car washed in an auto- Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
in direct sunlight. matic car wash from the start. Automatic exterior rear view mirrors prior to run-
car washes without brushes are prefera- ning the vehicle through an automatic
왘 Only use a mild car wash detergent,
ble. car wash to prevent damage to the
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
mirrors.
Shampoo. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it be-
fore running it through the automatic car Make sure that the windshield wiper
왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
wash. switch is set to 0 (컄 page 59). Other-
fused jet of water.
wise, the rain sensor could activate and
Direct only a very weak spray towards ! cause the wipers to move unintention-
the ventilation intake. If you want the gear position to remain ally. This may lead to vehicle damage.
왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the in N (for example when the vehicle is
sponge and chamois frequently. pulled through a car wash) i
앫 do not remove the SmartKey from After running the vehicle through an au-
왘 Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
dry with a chamois. the starter switch tomatic car wash, wipe any wax off of
or, when using KEYLESS-GO* the windshield (컄 page 400). This will
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on prevent smears and reduce wiping
the finish. 앫 do not turn off the engine using the noise which can be caused by residual
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* wax on the windshield.
and open the driver’s door
When leaving the car wash, make sure
Otherwise, the transmission will shift that the mirrors are folded out. Other-
to P and lock the wheels, preventing wise they may vibrate.
the vehicle from being pulled through a
car wash.
398
Operation
Vehicle care
Ornamental moldings Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers, Cleaning the Parktronic* system
turn signal lenses sensors
For regular cleaning and care of ornamen-
tal moldings, use a use damp cloth. 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
! poo, with plenty of water.
Do not use chrome cleaner on orna-
mental moldings. Although ornamental !
moldings may have chrome appear- Only use window cleaning solutions
ance, they could be made of anodized that are suitable for plastic lamp lens-
aluminum that will be damaged when es. Window cleaning solutions which
cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, are not suitable may damage the plas-
use damp cloth to clean those orna- tic lamp lenses of the headlamps.
mental moldings. Therefore, do not use abrasives, sol- 1 Parktronic* system sensors in front
vents or cleaners that contain solvents. bumper
Very dirty ornamental moldings of
which you are sure are chrome-plated, Never apply strong force and only use a 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
use a chrome cleaner. If in doubt soft, non-scratching cloth when clean- Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
whether an ornamental molding is ing the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe poo, with plenty of water and a soft,
chrome-plated, contact an authorized dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge. non-scratching cloth to clean
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. sensors 1 on the bumpers.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage
the lens surface.
399
Operation
Vehicle care
! Cleaning the windows and the wiper !

Do not apply strong pressure to the blades Fold the windshield wiper arms back
sensor covers. Applying strong pres- onto the windshield before turning the
sure may damage the sensor covers. Warning! G SmartKey in the starter switch or
Follow the instructions provided by the pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
power washer manufacturer on main- For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
taining a distance between the vehicle move SmartKey from starter switch Hold on to the wiper when folding the
and the nozzle of the power washer. (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the wiper arm back. If released, the force
vehicle’s on-board electronics have of the impact from the tensioning
status 0) before cleaning the windshield spring could crack the windshield.
! and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
To prevent scratches, never apply wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
strong force and only use a soft, cause injury. !
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the To clean the window interior, do not
sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or
왘 Fold wiper arms forward until they snap
sensors with a dry cloth or sponge. cleaners containing solvents. Do not
into place.
touch the inside of the front, rear or
왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a side windows with hard objects such as
clean cloth and detergent solution. an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win- damage the windows.
dow cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
mended.
400
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the panorama roof with Light alloy wheels When applying Mercedes-Benz ap-
tilt/sliding panel* proved Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel* has approved Wheel Care products, take
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
a protective layer on the inside. care not to spray them on the brake
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong disks.
왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win- spray of water for cleaning the light al-
dow cleaning solution. loy wheels. Plastic and rubber parts
An automotive glass cleaner is recom- ! 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mended. mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
! Acid may cause corrosion or damage washing solution.
the clear coat.
Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, sol- !
vents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Do not touch the protective layer with !
hard objects such as an ice scraper or The vehicle should not be parked for an
Instrument cluster and cup holders
ring. Never apply strong force and only extended period of time immediately
use a soft, non-scratching cloth when after it has been cleaned, especially not 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
cleaning the rear part of the tilt/sliding after the wheel rims have been cleaned mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
panel*. with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim washing solution.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage cleaners can lead to increased corro- 왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke-
the protective layer. sion of the brake disks and brake pads. warm solution.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it !
is parked after cleaning. To do so, To prevent scratches, do not use scour-
please drive your vehicle for several ing agents.
minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
401
Operation
Vehicle care
Hard plastic trim items Headliner and rear window shelf Wood trims
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior 왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham- 왘 Dampen cloth using water and use
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
with light pressure. vehicle.
Seat belts
! !
왘 Only use clear, lukewarm water and
To prevent scratches, do not use scour- Do not use solvents like tar remover or
soap.
ing agents. wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
! these may be abrasive.
Steering wheel The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry Wood trims
왘 Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor-
oughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz the webbing at temperatures above Dampen cloth using water and use damp
approved Leather Care. 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
Carpets wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
Warning! G these may be abrasive.
and Fabric Care for cleaning the car- Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
pets. severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
402
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
403
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: bulb self-check when switching on the
If any of the following lamps in the instru- ignition, have the respective bulb checked
ment cluster fails to come on during the and replaced if necessary.
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS indicator lamp ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
comes on while the engine is switched off. The BAS, ESP®, and 4-ETS are Wheels may lock during hard braking,
running. also switched off (see messages in multifunc- reducing steering capability.
tion display).
왘 Read and observe messages in the
The brake system is still functioning normally multifunction display (컄 page 416).
but without the ABS available.
왘 Have the system checked at an
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
other systems such as the navigation Truck Center as soon as possible.
system* or the automatic transmission may
Failure to follow these instructions
also be malfunctioning.
increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below 왘 Switch off electrical consumers that
10 volts. The ABS has switched off. are currently not needed, e.g. seat
heating*.
The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
왘 If necessary, have the generator
(alternator) and battery checked.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
404
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/conse- Suggested solution

quence
; (USA only) The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the 왘 Release the parking brake
comes on while driving and parking brake set. (컄 page 56).
3 (Canada only)
you hear a warning sound.
The ESP® control unit may be 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
malfunctioning. Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
The driving safety systems
may not be available. 왘 Read and observe messages in the
The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
comes on while driving. in the reservoir. vehicle in a safe location or as soon as
it is safe to do so and notify an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter. Do not add brake fluid! This will
not solve the problem.
!
Warning! G Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system.Overfilling the brake fluid res- If you find that the brake fluid in the
ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
engine parts and the brake fluid catching minimum mark or below, have the
nated can result in an accident. Have your
fire. You can be seriously burned. brake system checked for brake pad
brake system checked immediately if the
thickness and leaks.
brake warning lamp stays on.
405
Practical hints
What to do if …

quence
; (USA only) The red brake warning lamp A malfunction in the Electronic 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
comes on while driving. In Brake Proportioning rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
3 (Canada only)
addition, the yellow ABS mal- (컄 page 102) was detected. Center as soon as possible.
- function indicator lamp, and Failure to follow these instructions
v the yellow ESP® warning lamp increases the risk of an accident.
come on and a warning will
sound.
406
Practical hints
What to do if …

quence
? (USA only) The yellow engine malfunction There is a malfunction in: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as
indicator lamp comes on while possible by an authorized
± (Canada only) 앫 The fuel management
driving. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
system
An on-board diagnostic connector is
앫 The ignition system used by the service station to link the
앫 The emission control vehicle to the shop diagnostics
system system. It allows the accurate identifi-
cation of system malfunctions through
앫 Systems which affect the readout of diagnostic trouble
emissions codes. It is located in the front left area
Such malfunctions may result of the footwell next to the parking
in excessive emissions values brake pedal.
and may switch the engine to
its limp-home (emergency
operation) mode.
i
Some states may by law require you to
visit a workshop immediately as soon
as the engine malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Check local require-
ments.
407
Practical hints
What to do if …

quence
? (USA only) The yellow engine malfunction A loss of pressure has been 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 342).
indicator lamp comes on while detected in the fuel system.
± (Canada only) If it is not closed properly:
driving. The fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system 왘 Close the fuel cap.
may be leaky. If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an
Center.
Your fuel tank is empty. 왘 After refueling start, turn off and
restart the engine three or four times in
succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
408
Practical hints
What to do if …

v ®
The yellow ESP warning lamp ®
The ESP is deactivated. 왘 Switch the ESP® back on
comes on while the engine is Risk of accident! (컄 page 102).
running. ®
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- If the ESP cannot be switched back on:
ing road, weather, and traffic conditions. 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
Center as soon as possible.
v The yellow ESP® warning lamp The ESP® or traction control has come into 왘 When driving off, apply as little throt-
flashes while driving. operation because of detected traction loss tle as possible.
of at least one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the acceler-
ator.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄 page 101)
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
in the fuel gauge comes on while driving. mark. (컄 page 342).
409
Practical hints
What to do if …

< The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on and a warning chime sounds passengers to fasten your seat belts before The seat belt telltale goes out.
for approximately 6 seconds driving off.
after starting the engine with all
doors closed.
< The red seat belt telltale remains You and/or your front passenger have 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
illuminated after driving off. The forgotten to fasten your seat belts.
vehicle’s speed does not exceed There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front
15 mph (25 km/h). ger seat and therefore the system senses the passenger seat and put them in a safe
front passenger seat as being occupied. place.
< The red seat belt telltale flashes You and/or your front passenger have 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
and you additionally hear an in- forgotten to fasten your seat belts.
termittent warning chime with in- There are items placed on the front passen-
creasing intensity for a maximum ger seat and therefore the system senses the 왘 Remove the items from the front
of 60 seconds from the time the front passenger seat as being occupied. passenger seat and put them in a safe
vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph place.
(25 km/h).
i warning chime stops sounding and the out if both the driver and front passen-
After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt telltale illuminates continu- ger’s seat belt are fastened, or the ve-
seat belt on one of the front seats, the ously. The seat belt telltale will only go hicle is standing still and a front door is
opened.
410
Practical hints
What to do if …

1 The red SRS indicator lamp comes There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. 왘 Drive with added caution to the
on while driving. The air bags or emergency tensioning device nearest authorized
(ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
deploy unexpectedly in an accident. Center.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi-
ately to have the system checked, otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpect-
edly and unnecessarily which could result in
an accident and/or injury to you or to
others.
411
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Combination low tire pres- The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* detects a 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
sure/TPMS malfunction telltale loss of pressure in at least one tire. avoiding abrupt steering and braking
for the TPMS or Advanced maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation
TPMS* illuminates continuous- around you.
ly.
왘 Read and observe messages in the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respec-
tive tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the
combination low tire pressure/TPMS mal-
function telltale goes out after few minutes
driving.
H Combination low tire pres- There is a malfunction in the TPMS or 왘 Read and observe messages in the
sure/TPMS malfunction telltale Advanced TPMS*. multifunction display.
for the TPMS or Advanced
왘 Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS*
TPMS* flashes 60 seconds and
checked by an authorized
then stays illuminated.
After the malfunction has been remedied,
the combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.
412
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of in-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please compatible replacement or alternate tires or
should be checked monthly when cold and note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- from functioning properly. Always check the
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure pressure, even if under-inflation has not one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different reached the level to trigger illumination of to ensure that the replacement or alternate
size than the size indicated on the vehicle the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
placard or the tire inflation pressure label, Your vehicle has also been equipped with a to function properly.
you should determine the proper tire infla- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
tires is significantly underinflated. Accord- and then remain continuously illuminated.
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- This sequence will continue upon subse-
minates, you should stop and check your quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to function exists. When the malfunction
the proper pressure. Driving on a significant- indicator is illuminated, the system may not
ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over- be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
heat and can lead to tire failure. as intended.
413
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console

59The front passenger The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the system checked as soon as
front air bag off indicator possible by an authorized
lamp illuminates and re- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
mains illuminated with
왘 Also read and observe any messages
the weight of a typical
in the multifunction display and follow
adult or someone larger
corrective steps (컄 page 423).
than a small individual on
the front passenger seat.
Warning! G
If the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passen-
ger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
414
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible Suggested solution

cause/consequence
59The front passenger The system is malfunction- 왘 Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and
front air bag off indicator ing. child seat and check installation of the child seat.
lamp does not illuminate
왘 Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight
and/or does not remain
onto the seat are present.
illuminated with the
weight of a typical 왘 Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat
12-month-old child in a are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases
standard child restraint or etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints
less on the front passen- pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize
ger seat. such forces as supplemental weight.
왘 If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp
remains out, have the system checked as soon as pos-
sible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center. Do not transport a child on the front passen-
ger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘 Also note any messages in the multifunction display
and follow corrective steps (컄 page 423).
Warning! G weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a

standard child restraint or less on the front
the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
If the 59 indicator lamp does passenger seat, do not transport a child on
not illuminate or remains out with the
415
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the Certain messages of high priority cannot

multifunction display be cleared from the multifunction display Warning! G
using the reset button (컄 page 158) or
Warning and malfunction messages button j, k, ÿ, or è on the All categories of messages contain
appear in the multifunction display located multifunction steering wheel. important information which should be
in the instrument cluster. taken note of and, where a malfunction is
Other messages of high priority and mes- indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
Certain warning and malfunction messag- sages of less immediate priority can be an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
es are accompanied by an audible signal. cleared from the multifunction display Center.
Address these messages accordingly and using the reset button (컄 page 158) or
button j, k, ÿ, or è on the Failure to repair condition noted may cause
follow the additional instructions given in damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
this Operator’s Manual. multifunction steering wheel. They are
then stored in the vehicle status message Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
Selecting the vehicle status message memory (컄 page 173). Remember that age or personal injury.
memory menu in the control system clearing a message will only make the mes-
(컄 page 173) displays both cleared and sage disappear. Clearing a message will
uncleared messages. not correct the condition that caused the Warning! G
High-priority messages appear in the message to appear.
multifunction display in red color. No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
Contact the nearest authorized
416
Practical hints
What to do if …
i On the pages that follow, you will find a

Switching on the ignition causes all compilation of the most important warning
instrument cluster lamps (except high and malfunction messages that may
beam headlamp indicator lamp, and appear in the multifunction display.
turn signal indicator lamps unless acti- For your convenience the messages are
vated) as well as the multifunction dis- divided into two sections:
play to come on. Make sure the lamps
앫 Text messages (컄 page 418)
and multifunction display are in work-
ing order before starting your journey. 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 429)
417
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

ABS Malfunction The ABS has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop and has switched off. Wheels may lock during hard braking,
® reducing steering capability.
The ESP and the BAS are also deac-
tivated. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The brake system is still functioning Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
normally but without the ABS avail- as possible.
able. Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
Display malfunction The ABS or the ABS display is mal- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop functioning. Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
418
Practical hints
What to do if …

ABS unavailable The ABS was deactivated because of 왘 Switch off electrical consumers that are
See Operator’s Manual insufficient power supply. The charg- currently not needed, e.g. seat heating*.
ing voltage has fallen below 10 volts.
왘 If necessary, have the generator
The brake system is still functioning (alternator) and the battery checked.
normally but without the ABS
When the voltage is above this value again, the
available.
ABS is operational again and the message in
the multifunction display should disappear.
Cruise Drive to workshop Cruise control is malfunctioning. 왘 Have cruise control checked by an
control authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
ESP unavailable In addition, the yellow ESP® warning 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s Manual lamp v comes on.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
The ESP® is deactivated because of Truck Center as soon as possible.
a malfunction or interrupted power Failure to follow these instructions increases
supply. the risk of an accident.
419
Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP unavailable ®
If the yellow ESP warning As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the
See Operator’s Manual lamp v flashes while driving and electronic traction system switches on again.
this message appears, the electron- The message in the multifunction display disap-
ic traction system has switched off pears and the ESP® warning lamp v goes
to prevent overheating of the drive
out.
wheel brakes.
The self-diagnosis has not yet been The display will clear after driving a short
completed yet. distance at a vehicle speed of above
12 mph (20 km/h).
Malfunction In addition, the yellow ESP® warning 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop lamp v comes on.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The ESP® has detected a malfunc- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
tion and switched off. as possible.
The ABS may still be operational. Failure to follow these instructions increases
Display malfunction In addition, the yellow ESP® warning 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop lamp v comes on.
The ESP® or the ESP® display is Truck Center as soon as possible.
malfunctioning. Failure to follow these instructions increases
420
Practical hints
What to do if …

P Gear selector lever You have started the engine or 왘 Set the automatic transmission to
in Park switched on the ignition with position P.
KEYLESS-GO* and opened the or
driver’s door with the automatic
transmission not set to position P. 왘 Close the driver’s door
Gear selector lever You have attempted to start the 왘 Set the automatic transmission to
in Neutral or Park engine with the KEYLESS-GO* position P or N.
start/stop button while the auto-
Make sure the brake pedal is depressed
matic transmission was set to
when attempting to start the engine with
position R or D.
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
PRE-SAFE unavailable If ESP® and PRE-SAFE®* malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorizes Mercedes-Benz Light
See Operator’s Manual tion messages are displayed simul- Truck Center as soon as possible.
taneously, PRE-SAFE®* has been
deactivated as a result of these mal-
functions. All other occupant safety
systems, such as the air bags are
still available.
PRE-SAFE®* itself has failed. All oth- 왘 Visit an authorizes Mercedes-Benz Light
er occupant safety systems, such as Truck Center as soon as possible.
the air bags are still available.
421
Practical hints
What to do if …

SRS Restraint sys. The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest
malfunction authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Drive to workshop Center.
Warning! G For your safety, we strongly recommend

that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi- Light Truck Center immediately to have the
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be system checked; otherwise the SRS may not
operational. be activated when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-
essarily which could also result in injury.
422
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible Possible solution

cause/consequence
Front passenger airbag Front passenger front Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passen-
enabled air bag is activated ger seat for the following:
see Operator’s Manual while driving even
왘 Turn off the ignition (컄 page 38).
though a child, small
individual, or object 왘 Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly secure
below the system’s the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary.
weight threshold is on 왘 Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger seat and
the front passenger make sure the storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat is empty.
seat, or the front pas-
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. ob-
senger seat is empty.
Objects on the seat or jects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head re-
forces acting on the straints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as
seat may make the supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat
system sense supple- is of a heavier weight than actually present.
mental weight. 왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and turn on the igni-
tion (컄 page 38).
(Continued on next page)
423
Practical hints
What to do if …

cause/consequence
Front passenger airbag Monitor the 59 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 89) and
enabled the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for the following:
see Operator’s Manual
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫 the 59 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 85) has deactivated the air
bag.
앫 the message Front passenger airbag enabled see Operator’s Manual or the
message Front passenger airbag disabled see Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait
at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and
to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 85),
the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter.
Warning! G mains out even after performing the above

corrective steps, do not have any children
individuals use the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
If the 59 indicator lamp re- 12 years old and under and other small
424
Practical hints
What to do if …

cause/consequence
Front passenger airbag Front passenger front Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passen-
disabled air bag is deactivated ger seat for the following:
see Operator’s Manual while driving even
왘 Turn off the ignition (컄 page 38).
though an adult or
someone larger than a 왘 Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
small individual is oc- 왘 Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 43).
cupying the front pas-
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. ob-
senger seat. Forces
acting on the seat may jects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the
make the system seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser
sense a decrease in weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat.
weight. 왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on the
ignition (컄 page 38).
(Continued on next page)
425
Practical hints
What to do if …

cause/consequence
Front passenger airbag Monitor the 59 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 89) and
disabled the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for the following:
see Operator’s Manual
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫 the 59 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 85) has deactivated the air
bag.
앫 the message Front passenger airbag enabled see Operator’s Manual or the
message Front passenger airbag disabled see Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait
at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and
to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 85),
the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter.
Warning! G mains out even after performing the above

corrective steps, do not have any children
individuals use the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
If the 59 indicator lamp re- 12 years old and under and other small
426
Practical hints
What to do if …

Check tires There was a warning message about 왘 Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set
Then reactivate a loss in the tire inflation pressure for each tire.
Run Flat Indicator and the Run Flat Indicator has not
왘 Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator.
been reactivated yet.
Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized
inactive Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator has been 왘 Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized
unavailable switched off due to an error. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire pressure The Run Flat Indicator indicates that 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Check tires the pressure is too low in one or more steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic sit-
tires. uation around you.
왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 365).
왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 478).
왘 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure values (컄 page 365).
427
Practical hints
What to do if …

Tire pressure displayed Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
only after driving
The tire inflation pressure is being checked.
a few minutes
Tire pressure monitor The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is 왘 Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an
inoperative malfunctioning. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire pressure monitor There are wheels without wheel sensors 왘 Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an
inoperative mounted (e.g. winter tires). authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
No wheel sensors
왘 Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized
Tire pressure monitor The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is unable to 왘 As soon as the causes for the malfunction are no
temporarily monitor the tire pressure due to longer present, the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* auto-
unavailable matically becomes active again after a few minutes
앫 a nearby radio interference source
of driving.
앫 excessive wheel sensor temperatures
Tire pressure monitor One or more sensors malfunction (e.g. bat- 왘 Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an
Wheel sensor missing tery in one or more wheel sensor is empty). authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
One or more wheels without wheel sensors 왘 Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized
mounted (e.g. spare tire). Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire pressure for the respective tire is shown in
the multifunction display.
428
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

# malfunction The battery is no longer charg- 왘 Stop in a safe location or as soon as it is
Visit workshop ing. safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
Possible causes:
If it is broken:
앫 alternator malfunctioning 왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
앫 broken poly-V-belt engine will overheat due to an inoperative
water pump which may result in damage
Do not forget that the brake sys-
to the engine. Notify an authorized
tem requires electrical energy
and may be operating with re-
stricted capability. Considerably If it is intact:
greater brake pedal force is
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest autho-
required and the stopping dis-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
tance is increased.
Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
429
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

# Undervoltage The battery has insufficient 왘 Turn off unnecessary electrical
Switch off consumers voltage. consumers.
Battery/Alternator The battery is defective. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
Stop vehicle soon as it is safe to do so.
왘 Do not continue to drive.
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
2 Brake wear The brake pads have reached 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
Visit workshop their wear limit. possible.
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
inspected by a qualified technician at
the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet.
430
Practical hints
What to do if …

; (USA only) Release You are driving with the parking 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 56).
parking brake brake set.
! (Canada only)
; (USA only) Changed braking behavior A malfunction in the Electronic 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Drive with extreme care Brake Proportioning Wheels may lock during hard braking,
3 (Canada only)
(컄 page 102) was detected. reducing steering capability.
왘 Read and observe messages in the multi-
function display.
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
431
Practical hints
What to do if …

; (USA only) Brake fluid too low There is insufficient brake fluid 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a
Visit workshop in the reservoir. safe location or as soon as it is safe to do
3 (Canada only)
so and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do
not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
!
Warning! G If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the message Brake fluid
minimum mark or below, have the
too low Visit workshop displayed can
brake system checked for brake pad
result in an accident. Have your brake
thickness and leaks.
system checked immediately. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
432
Practical hints
What to do if …

? (USA only) Engine Service There may be a malfunction in 왘 Have the engine checked by an autho-
the rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
± (Canada only)
앫 fuel injection system
앫 ignition system
앫 exhaust system
앫 fuel system
B Coolant The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 351).
Check level
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by an
Center.
! Do not drive without sufficient amount

Warning! G Do not ignore the low engine coolant of coolant in the cooling system. The
level warning. Extended driving with engine will overheat causing major
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
the message and symbol displayed engine damage.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may cause serious engine damage not
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
Warranty.
433
Practical hints
What to do if …

Ï Coolant The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
Stop, engine off soon as it is safe to do so and immediate-
ly turn off the engine.
왘 Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could
otherwise damage the engine.
During severe operation conditions and

Warning! G stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have !
leaked into the engine compartment to The engine should not be operated with
catch fire. You could be seriously burned. the coolant temperature above 248°F
Steam from an overheated engine can cause (120°C). Doing so may cause serious
serious burns and can occur just by opening damage which is not covered by the
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
434
Practical hints
What to do if …

Ï Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
Stop, engine off as it is safe to do so and immediately turn off
the engine.
왘 Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative wa-
ter pump which may result in damage to the
engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
If it is intact:
왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in
serious engine damage that is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘 Observe the coolant temperature in the
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
435
Practical hints
What to do if …

Ï Coolant The cooling fan for the coolant is 왘 Observe the coolant temperature in the
Visit workshop malfunctioning. multifunction display (컄 page 168).
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possi-
ble.
G Display malfunction The instrument cluster display is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop malfunctioning.
The displays for several systems 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by
have malfunctioned. Some sys- an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
tems themselves may also have Center.
malfunctioned.
± Display malfunction Certain electronic systems are 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by
Visit workshop unable to relay information to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
the control system. The follow- Center.
ing systems may have failed:
앫 Coolant temperature display
앫 Tachometer
앫 Cruise control display
c Door open You are attempting to drive with 왘 Close the doors.
one or more doors open.
436
Practical hints
What to do if …

N Check eng. oil level The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 346).
when next refueling
USA only: The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 349) and check
Add 1 qt. engine oil the engine oil level (컄 page 346).
when next refueling
Canada only:
Add 1 liter engine oil
when next refueling
Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
Stop, engine off There is a danger of engine soon as as it is safe to do so in a safe
damage. location.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 349) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 346).
Engine oil level You have added too much 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off.
Reduce oil level engine oil. There is a risk of dam-
Observe all legal requirements with
aging the engine or the catalytic
respect to its disposal.
converter.
Change engine oil It may be that there is water in 왘 Have the engine oil checked.
Visit workshop the engine oil.
437
Practical hints
What to do if …

N Engine oil level The engine oil has dropped to a 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 346)
Visit workshop critical level. and add oil as required (컄 page 349).
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have
the engine checked for possible leaks.
Oil sensor malfunction The measuring system is 왘 Have the measuring system checked by
Visit workshop malfunctioning. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
When the message Add 1 qt. engine oil Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil !
when next refueling (Canada: 1 liter) leaks are noted, drive to the nearest The engine oil level warnings should
appears while the engine is running and at service station where the engine oil should not be ignored. Extended driving with
operating temperature, the engine oil level be topped to the required level with an ap- the symbol displayed could result in
has dropped to approximately the mini- proved oil specified in the Factory serious engine damage that is not
mum level. Approved Service Products pamphlet. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
When this occurs, the warning will first Warranty.
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
438
Practical hints
What to do if …

A Check gas cap A loss of pressure has been 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 342).
See Operator’s Manual detected in the fuel system. The If it is not closed properly:
fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system may 왘 Close the fuel cap.
be leaky. If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an
Center.
a Hood open You are driving with the hood or 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 345) or the
Trunk open the tailgate open. tailgate (컄 page 124).
You are trying to lock the vehicle 왘 Close all doors and/or the tailgate
with the KEYLESS-GO* function (컄 page 124).
with a door or the tailgate open.
439
Practical hints
What to do if …

F Key The SmartKey with 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
not recognized KEYLESS-GO* is not recognized so.
while the engine is running
왘 Search for the SmartKey with
because
KEYLESS-GO*.
앫 the SmartKey with
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
KEYLESS-GO* is not in the locked nor can the engine be started
vehicle again after the engine is stopped.
앫 there is strong
radio-frequency interference
The SmartKey with 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
not recognized.
왘 Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in
the starter switch if necessary.
Key The SmartKey with 왘 Search for the SmartKey with
not recognized KEYLESS-GO* is not recognized KEYLESS-GO*.
while the ignition is switched on
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked
(컄 page 38) and a door is nor can the engine be started.
opened or closed and
왘 Change the position of the SmartKey with
앫 the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
KEYLESS-GO* is not in the
vehicle
440
Practical hints
What to do if …

F Key A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
still in vehicle left in the vehicle was recog- out of the vehicle.
nized while trying to lock the ve-
hicle from the outside.
Remove key You have forgotten to remove 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
the SmartKey. switch.
Replace key There is no additional code avail- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Drive to workshop able for SmartKey or SmartKey Truck Center as soon as possible.
with KEYLESS-GO*.
Key The batteries in the SmartKey 왘 Replace the batteries (컄 page 464).
Check battery with KEYLESS-GO* are dis-
charged.
Do not This message appears for a 왘 Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
forget key maximum of 60 seconds if the
or
driver’s door is opened with the
engine shut off and no SmartKey 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
in the starter switch. with you when leaving the vehicle.
This message is only a reminder.
441
Practical hints
What to do if …

. 3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
malfunctioning. This message Truck Center as soon as possible.
will only appear if all light
emitting diodes have stopped
working.
Brake lamp, left The left brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute bulb on tioning. A substitute bulb is
being used.
Brake lamp, right The right brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
being used.
Brake lamp Brake lamp illumination is de- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Drive to workshop layed or lamp is permanently on. Truck Center as soon as possible.
Display malfunction The display for the lamps or the 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Visit workshop system is malfunctioning. Truck Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp, The left front fog lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left malfunctioning.
Front foglamp, The right front fog lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right malfunctioning.
Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
442
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Active headlamp The active Bi-Xenon* headlamp 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
currently unavailable system is malfunctioning. Truck Center as soon as possible.
Active headlamps The active Bi-Xenon* headlamp 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Substitute bulb on system is malfunctioning. Truck Center as soon as possible.
Another lamp is being used.
inoperative system is malfunctioning. Truck Center as soon as possible.
Display malfunction system is malfunctioning. Truck Center as soon as possible.
High beam, The left high beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
High beam, The right high beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
443
Practical hints
What to do if …

. License plate lamp, The left license plate lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
License plate lamp, The right license plate lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Light sensor The lamp sensor is malfunction- 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation
Drive to workshop ing. The headlamps do not to manual mode (컄 page 148).
switch on automatically.
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch (컄 page 147).
Low beam, The left low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Low beam, The right low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
444
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Marker lamp, The left front side marker lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
front left malfunctioning.
Marker lamp, The right front side marker lamp 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
front right is malfunctioning.
Parking lamp, front left The left front parking lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute bulb on malfunctioning. A substitute
bulb is being used.
Parking lamp, front right The right front parking lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
bulb is being used.
Reverse lamp, The left backup lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Reverse lamp, The right backup lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Switch off lights You have removed the SmartKey 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
from the starter switch and (컄 page 147).
opened the driver’s door or
removed the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the vehicle
and left the headlamps on.
445
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Tail lamp, left The left tail lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute bulb on ing. A substitute bulb is being
used.
Tail lamp, right The right tail lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
being used.
Turn signal, rear left The left rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
bulb is being used.
Turn signal, rear right The right rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
bulb is being used.
Turn signal, front left The left front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
bulb is being used.
Turn signal, front right The right front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
bulb is being used.
446
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Turn signal in The left turn signal in the side 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
mirror, left mirror is malfunctioning. This Truck Center as soon as possible.
message will only appear if all
light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Turn signal in The right turn signal in the side 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
mirror, right mirror is malfunctioning. This Truck Center as soon as possible.
message will only appear if all
light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
447
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Rectify The pressure is too low in one or more 왘 Check and correct tire inflation
tire pressure tires. pressure as required.
Tire pressure One or more tires are deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Caution: Tire defect avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘 If necessary, change the wheel.
Caution: Tire defect Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
One or more tires are deflating.
maneuvers.
The respective tire is shown in the
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
448
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pressure The tire pressure in one or more tires is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Check tires already below the minimum value. avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘 Check and adjust tire inflation
pressure as required.
Check tires Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
maneuvers.
already below the minimum value.
왘 Check and adjust tire inflation
The respective tire is shown in the
multifunction display. pressure as required.
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
449
Practical hints
What to do if …

< Seat belt system The seat belt system is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Drive to workshop Light Truck Center as soon as
possible.
9 Service memory full The maintenance service memory cannot 왘 Have the service memory checked by
See Operator’s Manual save any more data. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
K Close You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the tilt/sliding sunroof*
tilt/sliding sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 255).
switch and the sliding portion of the
tilt/sliding sunroof* open.
J Close You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the tilt/sliding sunroof*
tilt/sliding sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 255).
switch and the tilt portion of the
tilt/sliding sunroof* open.
450
Practical hints
What to do if …

L Malfunction One or more main functions of the 왘 Have the Tele Aid* system checked
Drive to workshop Tele Aid* system are malfunctioning. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Battery The emergency power battery for the 왘 Have the Tele Aid* system checked
Drive to workshop Tele Aid* system is malfunctioning. If the by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
vehicle battery is also malfunctioning or Truck Center.
drained, Tele Aid* will not be operational.
t Function This display appears if button t or
unavailable s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
W Washer fluid The fluid level has dropped to 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 352).
Check level about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.
451
Practical hints
What to do if …

n* Stop, car too low The AIRMATIC* is inoperative. 왘 Avoid large steering angles. Other-
wise a fender or tire could be dam-
aged.
왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘 Have the vehicle checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Visit workshop The AIRMATIC* is malfunctioning. 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) depending on the set
vehicle level.
Truck Center.
Visit workshop The AIRMATIC* is functional only to a 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
limited extent. (80 km/h) depending on the set
vehicle level.
Truck Center.
452
Practical hints
What to do if …

n* wait briefly The vehicle level is too low. 왘 Do not drive off.
The vehicle level control* has not yet
adjusted the vehicle level to the nec-
essary height required for driving.
왘 Wait until the message disappears
from the multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
Compressor Level control was activated too long/too 왘 Let the compressor cool until the
cooling down frequently. message disappears.
The selected level will be set once the
compressor has cooled down.
Level selection You are driving too fast for the desired 왘 Reduce vehicle speed.
not permitted level selection.
왘 Set the next higher level
(컄 page 271).
! Keep in mind that the ride height of the

When the message Compressor cool- vehicle is not yet reached and you
ing down appears in the multifunction could therefore damage the underbody
display, driving is still possible. of the vehicle.
The selected level will be set once the
compressor has cooled down.
453
Practical hints
First aid kit Vehicle tool kit
i The vehicle tool kit is stored under the car-

go compartment floor.
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year The vehicle tool kit includes:
and replace missing/expired items. 앫 Towing eye bolt
앫 Wheel wrench
The first aid kit is stored under the cargo
compartment floor, see “Vehicle tool kit” 앫 Alignment bolt
(컄 page 454). 1 Cargo compartment floor, lowered
앫 Vehicle jack
2 Handle cover
앫 Fuse chart
왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 122).
앫 Spare fuses
왘 Push in handle cover 2 and pull han-
앫 Fuse extractor
dle in direction of arrow.
앫 Collapsible wheel chock
왘 Lift cargo compartment floor 1.
앫 Wheel bolts for spare wheel
454
Practical hints
You can now access the vehicle tool kit. To

remove the vehicle tool kit storage well
casing, proceed as described on
(컄 page 458).
3 Securing hook 3 Securing hook

4 Cargo compartment floor, raised
왘 Release securing hook 3 (located be- 5 Upper cargo compartment lip
low the floor handle) from holder.
왘 Engage securing hook 3 on upper
cargo compartment lip 5. 6 Wheel bolt wrench
7 Electric air pump
! 8 Jack
With the cargo compartment cover 9 Spare fuses, fuse extractor, fuse chart
blind* installed behind the third-row a Spare wheel (collapsible tire)
seats (컄 page 288), disengage cargo b Alignment bolt
compartment cover blind* and flip it c Towing eye bolt
forward. Otherwise the strap of the d Collapsible wheel chock
securing hook could damage the cargo e Spare wheel bolts
compartment cover blind*. f Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
왘 To remove jack b, loosen the hook
and loop fastener.
455
Practical hints
Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located underneath the

storage compartment floor.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
Operational position
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always 왘 Turn crank handle clockwise until it
firmly set parking brake and block wheels Storage position engages (operational position).
before raising vehicle with jack. 왘 Remove vehicle jack from its storage Before storing the vehicle jack in its stor-
Do not disengage parking brake while the
compartment (컄 page 454). age compartment:
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is 왘 Push crank handle up. 앫 The vehicle jack should be fully col-
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, lapsed.
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is 앫 The handle must be folded in (storage
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. position).
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
pacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
456
Practical hints
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock 왘 Tilt both plates upward 1. Spare wheel
The collapsible wheel chock serves to ad- 왘 Fold the lower plate outward 2.
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare
ditionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
왘 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the wheel with collapsible tire. The spare
changing the wheel.
way into the openings of base plate 3. wheel is located underneath the cargo
compartment floor.
Warning! G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted.
The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
rarily, and should be replaced with a regular
road wheel as quickly as possible.
1 Tilt the plate upward

2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
457
Practical hints
i Removing the spare wheel 왘 Remove the jack from the vehicle tool
For information on how to mount the kit (컄 page 455).
spare wheel, see “Mounting the spare 왘 Loosen retaining screw 2 by turning it
wheel” (컄 page 479). counterclockwise.
왘 Remove vehicle tool kit storage well
In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily casing 3.
use the spare wheel when observing the
following restrictions: 왘 Remove spare wheel 1.
앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).
앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility 1 Spare wheel
to have the flat tire repaired or re- 2 Retaining screw
placed as appropriate. 3 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
앫 Do not operate the vehicle with more
than one spare wheel mounted.
458
Practical hints
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the 앫 Grasp an outside door handle.
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the driv- The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
er’s door using the mechanical key. must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the ve-
hicle.
i
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Unlocking the driver’s door with the
mechanical key will trigger the button (컄 page 40).
anti-theft alarm system. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
To cancel the alarm: must be inside the vehicle. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the 1 Mechanical key locking tab

Removing the mechanical key
SmartKey. 2 Mechanical key
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter 왘 Move locking tab 1 in direction of

switch. arrow.
왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
housing.
SmartKey
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
459
Practical hints
Unlocking the driver’s door Locking the vehicle 왘 Exit the vehicle.
왘 Close the driver’s door.
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, lock the vehi- 왘 Enter the vehicle through the rear left
cle carrying out the following steps. door.
왘 Close the front passenger door, the 왘 Press down the locking knob of the
rear right door and the tailgate. driver’s door.
왘 Open the driver’s door and the rear left !
door. To prevent inadvertent lockout, make
왘 Press the central locking switch on the sure to have the SmartKey or SmartKey
1 Unlocking driver’s door (컄 page 131). with KEYLESS-GO* with you before
2 Mechanical key proceeding with the next step. The next
The locking knobs of the front passen-
왘 Insert mechanical key 2 into the step will lock the vehicle.
ger door and the rear doors move
driver’s door lock until it stops. down.
왘 Exit the vehicle.
왘 Turn mechanical key 2 counterclock- If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
wise to position 1 and hold it there. drained: 왘 Close the rear left door.
왘 Pull the door handle until the locking 왘 Press down the locking knobs of The vehicle is locked.
knob moves up. the front passenger door and the
The driver’s door is unlocked. rear doors manually.
왘 Pull the door handle once more to open

the driver’s door.
460
Practical hints
Fuel filler flap 왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin 왘 Pull red fuel filler flap release 3 in di-
into the slot of lock 1. rection of arrow.
왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90° The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
The fuel filler flap release is located behind in direction of arrow.
왘 Open the fuel filler flap (컄 page 342).
a cover in the right side trim panel of the
왘 Remove cover 2.
cargo compartment. i
The fuel filler flap release may differ,
depending on production date. If your
vehicle is not equipped with the fuel
filler flap release as illustrated, pulling a
red fabric cord instead unlocks the fuel
filler flap.
3 Fuel filler flap release

1 Lock
2 Cover
461
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Take crank 2 out of the Operator’s
Manual pouch.
왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the
You can open or close the tilt/sliding
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 왘 Insert crank 2 into hole.
sunroof manually should an electrical
(컄 page 66).
malfunction occur. 왘 Turn crank 2 clockwise to
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located 앫 slide sunroof closed
the starter switch to position 0,
behind a cover on the overhead control 앫 raise sunroof at the rear
same as with the SmartKey re-
panel.
moved from starter switch). The 왘 Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to
driver’s door can then be closed
앫 slide sunroof open
again.
왘 Press on cover 1 at the position indi- 앫 lower sunroof at the rear
cated by the arrow.
i
왘 Take off cover 1. Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be syn-
chronized if it has been operated man-
ually (컄 page 258).
1 Cover
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter i
switch. The panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel* cannot be operated
as described. Contact an authorized
2 Crank
462
Practical hints
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the i SmartKey
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are dis- When replacing batteries, make sure
charged, the vehicle can no longer be Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
they are clean and free of lint.
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to CR 2025 or equivalent.
have the batteries replaced at an autho- 왘 Remove mechanical key 1 from the
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. i
SmartKey (컄 page 459).
When replacing batteries, always
replace both batteries. The required re-
Warning! G placement batteries are available at
any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can harm

the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
1 Mechanical key
method of disposal. Many states require
2 Slide
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
3 Battery compartment
for recycling.
왘 Insert mechanical key 1 in side open-
ing in direction of arrow.
왘 Using mechanical key 1, push gray
slide 2 to unlatch battery compart-
ment 3. 컄컄
463
Practical hints
컄컄 왘 Pull battery compartment 3 out of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
housing in direction of arrow. SmartKey housing.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
왘 Remove the batteries in direction of ar-
CR 2025 or equivalent.
row.
왘 Remove mechanical key 1 from the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(컄 page 459).
3 Batteries
4 Contact spring
4 Battery 왘 Pull out batteries 4.
5 Contact spring
왘 Using a line-free cloth, insert new bat-
왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries 4 under contact springs 3 with
1 Mechanical key
teries 4 under contact spring 5 with the positive terminal (+) side facing up.
2 Battery compartment
the positive terminal (+) facing up.
왘 Return battery compartment 2 into
왘 Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
왘 Return battery compartment 3 into housing until it locks into place.
housing until it locks into place. 왘 Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
왘 Slide mechanical key 1 back into
arrow.
왘 Slide mechanical key 1 back into SmartKey.
SmartKey. The battery compartment is unlatched.
왘 Check the operation of the SmartKey.
왘 Check the operation of the SmartKey.
464
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Bulbs i i
If the headlamps or front fog lamps are Backup bulbs will be brought into use
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
fogged up on the inside as a result of when the following lamps malfunction:
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
high humidity, driving the vehicle a dis-
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as- 앫 Turn signal lamps
tance with the lights on should clear up
semblies are in good working order at all 앫 Brake lamps
the fogging.
times.
앫 Parking lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and 앫 Tail lamps
readjusted at regular intervals and when a Read and observe messages in the
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized multifunction display (컄 page 442).
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
headlamp adjustment.
465
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps Rear lamps
Lamp Type Lamp Type

1 Parking/standing lamp W 5 W 8 High-mounted brake
2 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W lamp LED
3 Additional turn signal 9 Tail, brake, and

lamp LED sidemarker lamp P 21 W
4 Headlamps: a Turn signal lamp PY 21 W

Low beam H7 (55W) b Backup lamp P 21 W
Bi-Xenon headlamps*: c Rear fog lamp (driver’s
Low beam1 D2S-35 W side only) P 21 W
5 Headlamps: d License plate lamps C5W
High beam/high beam
flasher H7 (55W)
Bi-Xenon headlamps*:
High beam/high beam
flasher spot lamp H7 (55W)
6 Sidemarker lamp WY 5 W
7 Corner-illuminating
front fog lamp* H11 (55W)
1 Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Do not
replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
466
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
Warning! G 앫 Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. and with the specified watt rating.
앫 the additional turn signal lamps in the
Allow the lamp to cool down before chang- 앫 Switch the lights off before changing a
ing a bulb. bulb to prevent short circuits. exterior rear view mirrors
Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 the high mounted brake lamp
앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. handling bulbs. 앫 the Bi-Xenon* low beam lamps
A bulb can explode if you: 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil 앫 the Bi-Xenon high beam flasher spot-
앫 touch or move it when hot and grease. light*
앫 drop the bulb 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not 앫 the front sidemarker lamps
앫 scratch the bulb come on, visit an authorized
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
467
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps Low beam headlamp bulbs

왘 Turn cover 1 counterclockwise.
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first: 왘 Remove cover 1.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to 왘 Turn bulb socket 3 counterclockwise.
position M (컄 page 147). 왘 Pull bulb socket 3 out of the head-
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 345). lamp housing.
왘 Pull the low beam bulb out of bulb
Halogen headlamps socket 3.
2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 왘 Insert the new low beam bulb into bulb
socket 3.
왘 Insert bulb socket 3 into the head-
lamp housing.
왘 Turn bulb socket 3 clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Place cover 1 on the opening in the
headlamp housing.
1 Low beam/high beam headlamp cover 왘 Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag-
2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp es.
3 Bulb socket for low beam headlamp
4 Bulb socket for high beam headlamp
468
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam headlamp bulbs Front turn signal lamp bulbs Bi-Xenon headlamps*
왘 Turn cover 1 counterclockwise. 왘 Pull bulb socket 2 out of the head-
lamp housing.
왘 Remove cover 1.
왘 Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb
왘 Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise.
socket 2.
왘 Pull bulb socket 4 out of the head-
왘 Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb
lamp housing.
socket 2.
왘 Pull the high beam bulb out of bulb
왘 Insert bulb socket 2 into the head-
socket 4.
lamp housing.
왘 Insert the new high beam bulb into bulb
socket 4. 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 Low beam/high beam headlamp cover
왘 Insert bulb socket 4 into the head- – Do not remove
lamp housing.
engages.
왘 Place cover 1 on the opening in the
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag-
es.
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
469
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Low beam and high beam flasher spot Front turn signal lamp bulbs Parking and standing lamp bulbs
bulbs
왘 Pull bulb socket 1 out of the head-
lamp housing.
Warning! G 왘 Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb
socket 1.
Do not remove the low beam/high beam
cover for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because 왘 Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb
of high voltage in Bi-Xenon* lamps, it is dan- socket 1.
gerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp 왘 Insert bulb socket 1 into the head-
and its components. We recommend that lamp housing.
you have such work done by a qualified
technician. 1 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp
왘 Turn bulb socket 1 counterclockwise.
왘 Pull bulb socket 1 out of the housing.
왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 1.
왘 Insert the new parking and standing
lamp bulb into bulb socket 1.
왘 Insert bulb socket 1 into the housing.
engages.
470
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Corner-illuminating front fog lamp*

bulbs
4 Retaining screws 5 Corner-illuminating front fog lamp bulb

socket
왘 Remove screws 4 that retain front fog
1 Corner-illuminating front fog lamp* lamp 1. 왘 Turn bulb socket 5 counterclockwise.
2 Cover
왘 Remove corner-illuminating front fog 왘 Pull bulb socket 5 out of the housing.
3 Retaining screw
lamp 1. 왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 5.
왘 Remove retaining screw 3.
왘 Insert a suitable object (e.g. screwdriv- 왘 Insert the new corner-illuminating front
er) at point indicated by the arrow and fog lamp bulb into bulb socket 5.
pry out cover 2. 왘 Insert bulb socket 5 into the housing.컄컄
Cover 2 is released.
왘 Swing cover 2 outwards and take it
off.
471
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
컄컄 왘 Turn bulb socket 5 clockwise until it Additional turn signal lamps bulbs Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
engages.
The additional turn signal lamps in the
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
왘 Insert corner-illuminating front fog exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
lamp, do the following first:
lamp 1 back into bumper. If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func-
왘 Turn the combination switch to
왘 Fasten retaining screws 4. tion, the entire turn signal unit must be re-
position M (컄 page 147).
placed. Have the turn signal unit replaced
왘 Reinsert cover 2 and press it in until it
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
engages. Tail lamp unit
Truck Center.
왘 Fasten retaining screw 3. i
Front sidemarker lamp bulbs To access the tail lamp units, you have
Since replacing the sidemarker lamp bulbs to remove the cover in the correspond-
is a technically highly demanding process, ing side trim panel of the cargo com-
we recommend you have the sidemarker partment.
lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. 왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 122).
472
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Opening the side trim panels 왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin 왘 Depending on which bulb needs to be
into the slot of lock 1. replaced, turn the respective bulb
socket 1 - 4 counterclockwise.
왘 Turn lock 1 clockwise (left side trim
panel) or counterclockwise (right side 왘 Pull the bulb socket out of the housing.
trim panel) by 90° in direction of arrow.
왘 Similarly turn the bulb counterclock-
왘 Remove cover 2. wise carefully and pull the bulb out of
bulb socket.
Replacing bulbs
왘 Insert the new bulb into the bulb sock-
et.
왘 Turn the bulb in the bulb socket clock-
1 Lock
wise carefully.
2 Cover in left side trim panel
왘 Insert the bulb socket into the housing.
왘 Turn the bulb socket clockwise until it
engages.
1 Tail, sidemarker, standing, and parking

lamp bulb socket
2 Turn signal lamp bulb socket
3 Fog lamp bulb socket
1 Lock (driver’s side only)
2 Cover in right side trim panel 4 Backup lamp bulb socket
473
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp
1 License plate lamp cover

2 Screw
왘 Loosen screws 2.
왘 Remove license plate lamp cover 1.
왘 Replace the license plate lamp bulb.
왘 Reinstall license plate lamp cover 1.
왘 Retighten screws 2.
474
Practical hints
왔 Replacing wiper blades
Front wiper blades Removing
! Warning! G
Never open the hood when the wiper
arms are folded forward. For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove the SmartKey from starter switch
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
of the impact from the tensioning
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
spring could crack the windshield.
Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact and cause injury. 1 Wiper blade
the windshield glass without a wiper 2 Tab
blade inserted. 3 Wiper arm
Make sure the wiper blades are proper- switch. 왘 Press tabs 2 together.
ly installed. Improperly installed wiper 왘 Tilt wiper blade 1 away from wiper
or
blades may cause windshield damage. arm 3.
왘 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
For your convenience, we recommend 왘 Take off wiper blade 1 in direction of
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
that you have this work carried out by arrow.
electronics have status 0 (컄 page 39).
Truck Center. 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they
engage.
475
Practical hints
Installing 왘 Fold wiper blade 1 towards wiper Rear wiper blade

arm.
Tabs 2 must engage into both recess-
es of attachment 2.
Warning! G
왘 Check whether the wiper blade is For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
securely fastened. remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
the windshield.
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
folding the wiper arm back. and cause injury.
1 Wiper blade
2 Attachment
3 Guide tab !
4 Opening Hold on to the wiper when folding the
왘 With guide tab 3 sliding into opening wiper arm back. If released, the force
4, place wiper blade 1 onto wiper of the impact from the tensioning
arm in direction of arrow. spring could crack the rear window.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the rear window glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
476
Practical hints
Make sure the wiper blades are proper- 왘 Fold wiper arm 1 away from the rear Installing
ly installed. Improperly installed wiper window until it engages.
blades may cause rear window dam-
age.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
Truck Center.
Removing
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter 1 Wiper arm
switch. 1 Wiper arm 2 Wiper blade
or 2 Wiper blade
왘 Insert wiper blade 2 into wiper
왘 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Turn wiper blade 2 to form a right an- arm 1.
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board gle with wiper arm 1 as shown.
왘 Hold wiper arm 1 and engage wiper
electronics have status 0 (컄 page 39). 왘 Hold wiper arm 1 and disengage wip- blade 2 by pushing it in direction of ar-
er blade 2 by carefully sliding it in row until it locks into place.
direction of arrow.
왘 Check whether the wiper blade is
왘 Remove wiper blade 2. securely fastened.
왘 Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear
window.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
477
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

Warning! G 왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the
왘 Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif- KEYLESS-GO* button once
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a (컄 page 66).
when possible.
result, the vehicle handling characteristics 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flasher
change when driving with a spare wheel starter switch in position 0, same as
(컄 page 153).
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord- with the SmartKey removed from the
ingly. 왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the starter switch). The driver’s door then
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
front wheels are in a straight-ahead can be closed again.
When driving with spare wheel mounted,
position.
왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do 왘 Set the parking brake (컄 page 65). a safe distance from the roadway.
not exceed a vehicle speed of
왘 Set the automatic transmission to P
50 mph (80 km/h). i
(컄 page 197).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Open doors only when conditions are
Vehicles with SmartKey: safe to do so.
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 66).
wheel. 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
Never operate the vehicle with more than switch.
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® with a spare
wheel mounted.
478
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel Lifting the vehicle

왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
Warning! G
Preparing the vehicle by blocking wheels with wheel chocks The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
or other sizable objects.
왘 Prepare the vehicle as described up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
(컄 page 478). One wheel chock is included with the built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 455). avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
왘 Take the wheel wrench and the vehicle
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
jack from the vehicle tool kit When changing wheel on a level surface:
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
(컄 page 455). 왘 Place the wheel chock in front of and by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
왘 Take the spare wheel from the wheel another sizable object behind the the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
well under the cargo compartment wheel that is diagonally opposite to the firmly set parking brake and block wheels
floor (컄 page 458). wheel being changed. before raising vehicle with jack.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack Do not disengage parking brake while the
on a level surface. However, should cir- vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
cumstances require you to do so on a hill, always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
place the wheel chock and another sizable especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
object as follows: on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
왘 Place the wheel chock and another
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
sizable object on the downhill side
capacity jackstands before working under
blocking both wheels of the axle not
the vehicle.
being worked on.
479
Practical hints
Flat tire
1 Wheel wrench 2 Take-up bracket 왘 Turn crank 4 clockwise until jack 3

3 Jack is fully seated in take-up bracket 2
왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do 4 Crank and the jack base evenly meets the
not yet remove the wheel bolts
왘 Place jack 3 on firm ground. ground.
(approximately one full turn with wheel
wrench 1). 왘 Continue to turn crank 4 until the
왘 Position jack 3 under the take-up
bracket 2 so that it is always vertical wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm)
The jack take-up brackets are located di-
(plumb-line) as seen from the side, from the ground.
rectly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings. even if the vehicle is parked on an in-
cline.
!
Do not position the jack on the body of
the vehicle, as this may cause damage
to the vehicle.
480
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel Mounting the spare wheel

Warning! G
The jack is intended only for lifting the
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle.
앫 Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
앫 Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
1 Alignment bolt 1 Wheel bolt for 18" and 19" light alloy
wheels
왘 Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and
2 Wheel bolt for 17" light alloy wheels or
remove.
collapsible tire (located in trunk with
왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment spare wheel)
bolt 1 supplied in the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 454). !
왘 Remove the remaining wheel bolts. Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting the spare wheel with collaps-
! ible tire. The use of any wheel bolts oth-
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. er than wheel bolts 2 for the spare
This could result in damage to the bolts wheel with collapsible tire will physical-
and wheel hub threads. ly damage the vehicle’s brakes.
왘 Remove the wheel.
481
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and

wheel hub. Warning! G
! Only use genuine equipment
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
against hub and hold it there while bolts may come loose.
installing first wheel bolt. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
Warning! G
왘 Guide spare wheel onto the alignment
Always replace wheel bolts that are bolt and push it on.
damaged or rusted.
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. slightly.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
482
Practical hints
Flat tire
Inflating the collapsible tire 왘 Screw union nut 5 onto the collaps-
ible tire valve.
Warning! G 왘 Insert electrical plug 3 into a power
outlet (컄 page 306).
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly mounted. !
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
The cigarette lighter* (컄 page 303) is
air pump (컄 page 454) before lowering the
not designed for use with the electric
vehicle.
air pump. Use a power outlet
(컄 page 306) for electric air pump
1 Flap operation.
2 On/off switch
Warning! G 3 Electrical plug 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent to position 1.
Observe instructions on air pump label. screw
5 Union nut or
! 왘 Open flap 1 on electric air pump. 왘 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Do not lower the vehicle before inflat- Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
왘 Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
ing the collapsible tire. Otherwise the button once without depressing the
with pressure gauge 4. brake pedal.
rim may be damaged.
왘 Remove the valve cap from the collaps- 왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 2.
왘 Take the electric air pump out of the ible tire valve.
The electric air pump should now
vehicle tool kit storage well
switch on and inflate the collapsible
(컄 page 454).
tire. 컄컄
483
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 왘 Inflate the spare wheel tire to the rec- ! 왘 Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.
ommended tire inflation pressure given Please compare the recommended tire 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
in the “Technical data” section inflation pressure for your vehicle with to position 0.
(컄 page 514). the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
or
This takes about 5 minutes for the col- label located on the spare wheel rim.
lapsible tire. 왘 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If the tire inflation pressure on the yel-
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
low label on the spare wheel rim differs
button twice without depressing the
Warning! G from the values given in this Operator’s
brake pedal.
Manual, inflate the tire to the recom-
Air hose 4 and union nut 5 can become mended tire inflation pressure given on 왘 If the tire inflation pressure is above
hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution the yellow label on the spare wheel rim. the recommended tire inflation pres-
to avoid burning yourself when using the sure given in this Operator’s Manual,
equipment. ! release excess tire inflation pressure
using the vent screw.
Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than 8 minutes without interrup-
tion. Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the electric air pump
again after it has cooled off.
484
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle

Warning! G
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures. Warning! G
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- properly mounted.
cause they are more likely to become punc-
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
air pump (컄 page 483) before lowering the
etc.
vehicle.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling 6 Wheel wrench
왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail 왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-
from being overheated. lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
ly on its own weight.
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
왘 Detach the electric air pump. 왘 Remove the jack. Observe a tightening torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
왘 Store the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the
electric air pump back in the vehicle Warning! G
tool kit storage well.
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm). 컄컄
1-5 Wheel bolts
485
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 왘 Store jack and all other vehicle tool kit

items back into the storage well.
i
The removed road wheel cannot be
stored in the spare wheel well under
the cargo compartment floor, but
should be transported in the cargo
compartment wrapped in a protective
wrap.
486
Practical hints
Battery
왔 Battery
G Observe E
The battery is located under the front all safety instructions Wear eye protection.
passenger seat. and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
i
C Keep children away.
Mercedes-Benz recommends to have
the battery replaced at authorized A Risk of explosion
F
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Follow the instructions in this
D Keep flames or sparks away Operator’s Manual.
from battery. Do not smoke.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated ser-
B
vice life. Battery acid is caustic. Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm
allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
with skin, eyes or clothing. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
short-distance trips, you will need to have
method of disposal. Many states require
the battery charge checked more In case it does, immediately sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
frequently. flush affected area with clean for recycling.
When replacing the battery, always use water and seek medical help if
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. necessary.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle

for an extended period of time, consult an
Center about steps you need to observe.
487
Practical hints
Battery
! Even though VRLA batteries do not !

The battery is a valve-regulated lead require topping-up of the electrolyte The factory-equipped VRLA battery is
acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as level and cannot be opened to check leak-proofed. Only use a battery as re-
“fleece” battery. Such batteries do not the electrolyte level, the battery condi- placement that has the same security
require topping-up of the electrolyte tion must be checked periodically by features and is of identical size,
level. VRLA batteries therefore do not performing a battery conductance test. voltage, and capacity as the
have cell caps and the battery cover is Refer to Maintenance Booklet for bat- factory-equipped battery.
non-removable. Do not attempt to tery condition testing intervals.
The battery, the battery ventilation and
open the battery as otherwise the bat- As with any other battery, the battery the lateral plug must always be
tery will be damaged. may discharge if the vehicle is not securely installed when the vehicle is in
operated for an extended period of operation.
time. You can connect a battery
maintenance charge unit tested and
approved for use on your vehicle model Warning! G
or disconnected the battery to prevent
battery discharge. Contact an Jump starting must only be done using the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck jump-start contacts located in the engine
Center for more information. compartment (컄 page 496).
488
Practical hints
Battery
! Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling

Warning! G Never loosen or detach battery termi- and reconnecting the battery
nal clamps while the engine is running
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
sult in severe injury or death.
Otherwise the alternator and other Warning! G
Observe all safety instructions and precau- electronic components could be se-
tions when handling automotive batteries Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and
verely damaged.
(컄 page 487). reconnecting the battery is a complicated
Have the battery checked regularly by and technically demanding procedure that
Never lean over batteries while connecting, an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light also requires safety precautions to avoid the
you might get injured. Truck Center. risk of injury. We strongly recommend that it
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Contact your authorized be performed by a qualified technician or an
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately further information. Center only. Please read the instructions
flush affected area with water and seek fully before beginning operation and only
medical help if necessary. undertake it if you feel fully capable of per-
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, Warning! G forming all of the tasks involved as de-
which is flammable and explosive. Keep scribed in these instructions. Observe all
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid Do not place metal objects on the battery as safety instructions and precautions when
improper connection of jumper cables, this could result in a short circuit. handling automotive batteries
smoking etc. (컄 page 487). Performing the tasks involved
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
and impair the operating safety of the
vehicle, and/or cause severe injury to you
or others.
489
Practical hints
Battery
i 왘 Set the automatic position to P Step 2 (Disconnecting)

With a disconnected battery you will no (컄 page 199).
longer be able to turn the SmartKey in 왘 Firmly depress the parking brake
the starter switch and pressing the (컄 page 65).
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button will
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 66).
have no effect.
왘 Leave the ignition switched on
Step 1 (Disconnecting) (컄 page 38).
왘 Switch off all electrical consumers.
i
왘 Read and observe safety instructions
If your battery is discharged, the vehi-
cle must be jump started (컄 page 496) and precautions (컄 page 487). 1 Seat rail covers, front right
using the jump start contacts in the 왘 Open the front passenger door. 2 Seat rail covers, front left
engine compartment, or an accessory 왘 Pull off right seat rail cover 1 in direc-
battery charge unit* approved by i tion of arrow.
Mercedes-Benz must be connected Open doors only when conditions are
왘 Pull left seat rail cover 2 in direction
using the jump start contacts in the safe to do so.
of arrow as far as it will go.
engine compartment (see separate
instructions for the accessory battery 왘 Move the front passenger seat to the Left seat rail cover 2 cannot be re-
charge unit*) before any of the follow- most rearward position (컄 page 43). moved.
ing steps can be performed. If the bat-
tery cannot be jumped or charged,
please contact an authorized
490
Practical hints
Battery
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38). Step 3 (Disconnecting)

switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0.
After turning off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
3 Battery cover mounting nuts with the driver's door closed, the
starter switch is in position 1. With
왘 Using a 6 mm T-handle hex key (not 4 Seat rail, rear
the driver’s door opened, the start-
supplied with vehicle) with a minimum 5 Seat rail cover, rear
er switch is set to position 0, same
shaft length of 12 in (30 cm), unfasten as SmartKey removed from starter 왘 Pull seat rail cover 5 away from seat
and remove battery cover mounting switch (컄 page 39). rail 4 on both sides as indicated by ar-
nuts 2 located at the floor carpet per- rows.
foration.
왘 Pull off seat rail cover 5 to the rear as
왘 Move the front passenger seat to the indicated by arrow.
most forward position (컄 page 43).
491
Practical hints
Battery
Step 4 (Disconnecting) Step 5 (Disconnecting) Step 6 (Disconnecting)
6 Floor carpet 7 Battery cover mounting nuts 8 Battery cover with integrated air
channel
왘 Pull back and fold floor carpet 8 in 왘 Unfasten and remove battery cover
direction of the arrow. mounting nuts 7. 9 Pulling battery cover out
a Lifting battery cover
i 왘 Lift battery cover 8 slightly in direc-
To release the floor carpet perforations tion of arrow a.
(see dotted line in above illustration),
왘 Pull battery cover 8 in direction of
you will have to apply somewhat great-
arrow 9.
er force when pulling the floor carpet
back. 왘 Remove battery cover 8.
492
Practical hints
Battery
Step 7 (Disconnecting) Step 8 (Disconnecting) Step 9 (Removing)

왘 Take out battery.
Step 10 (Reinstalling)
왘 Carry out step 9 (컄 page 493) first and
then step 7 (컄 page 493), both in re-
verse order.
b Battery ventilation hose f Positive terminal with cover

c Battery g Negative terminal
d Battery attachment
왘 Disconnect battery negative lead from
e Attachment nuts
negative terminal g.
왘 Pull battery ventilation hose b out of 왘 Remove the cover from positive termi-
battery c. nal f.
왘 Unfasten and remove attachment b Battery ventilation hose
왘 Disconnect battery positive lead from
nuts e. h Vent plug
positive terminal f.
왘 Remove battery attachment d. !
The battery, battery ventilation
hose b, and vent plug h must always
be securely installed when the vehicle
is in operation. 컄컄
493
Practical hints
Battery
컄컄 왘 Carry out step 8 to reconnect the bat- 왘 Make sure the SmartKey is removed i
tery (컄 page 493). from the starter switch. The following procedures must be car-
왘 Carry out steps 6 to 1 in reverse order Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: ried out following any interruption of
to complete reinstall the battery, battery power (e.g. due to disconnec-
왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
(컄 page 492) to (컄 page 490). tion):
electronics have status 0.
앫 Set the clock (컄 page 180).
Step 11 (Reconnecting) With the driver’s door opened, the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have Vehicles with Modular COMAND
왘 If the battery has been removed, carry status 0, same as SmartKey re- system with navigation module*:
out step 9 (컄 page 493) first and then moved from the starter switch Time and date are set automatical-
step 7 (컄 page 493), both in reverse (컄 page 39). ly.
order, before starting the connecting
procedure. 왘 Connect the positive lead to the posi- 앫 Synchronize the door windows
tive terminal and fasten it’s cover (컄 page 251).
왘 Open the driver’s door.
(컄 page 493). 앫 Synchronize the power tilt/sliding
왘 Connect the negative lead to the nega- sunroof* (컄 page 258).
tive terminal (컄 page 493). 앫 Synchronize the power tilt/sliding
! panel* (컄 page 262).
Never invert the terminal connections! 앫 Synchronize the power folding
exterior rear view mirrors*
(컄 page 211).
494
Practical hints
Battery
Charging the battery 왘 Charge the battery in accordance with

the instructions of the battery charger
If the battery is discharged, the battery can manufacturer.
be charged using the jump-start contacts
Batteries contain materials that can harm
located in the engine compartment
the environment if disposed of improperly.
(컄 page 497).
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
Warning! G method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
Never charge a battery while still installed in for recycling.
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during charg-
ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
Center for information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the accessory
battery charger.
495
Practical hints
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the bat- are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow- parts that move when the engine is
Failure to follow these directions will cause ing: started or running.
damage to the electronic components, and
앫 Jump starting should only be performed !
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. using the jump-start contacts in the en-
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
gine compartment (컄 page 497).
Never lean over batteries while connecting tempts.
or jump starting, you might get injured. 앫 Jump starting should only be performed
Do not attempt to start the engine us-
when the engine and catalytic convert-
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not ing a battery quick charge unit.
er are cold.
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, If the engine does not run after several
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
flush affected area with water, and seek frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
checked at the nearest authorized
medical help if necessary. 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, same voltage rating (12V). Jump start-
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep ing with a more powerful battery could
repeated failed starting attempts may
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
damage the catalytic converter.
improper connection of jumper cables, which will not be covered by the
smoking, etc. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery 앫 Use only jumper cables with sufficient
can result in it exploding, causing personal cross-section and insulated terminal Make sure the cable clamps do not
injury. clamps. touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
496
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 왘 Connect positive terminals 2 and 4

Warning! G 왘 Apply parking brake.
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to
charged battery 4 first.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery. 왘 Set automatic transmission to
왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the
Do not smoke. position P.
charged battery and run at idle speed.
Observe all safety instructions and precau- 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 345).
tions when handling automotive batteries. 왘 Connect negative terminals 1 and 3
왘 Open cover of positive terminal 2. of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 3
The jump-start contacts are located in the first.
engine compartment.
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehi-

cle.
1 Negative terminal of discharged

battery
2 Positive terminal of discharged battery
1 Negative (-) terminal 3 Negative terminal of charged battery
2 Positive (+) terminal 4 Positive terminal of charged battery
왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
497
Practical hints
Jump starting
You can now turn on the electrical con-

sumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
왘 Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 1 and 3 and then
from the positive terminals 2 and 4.
You can now turn on the lights.
왘 Have the battery checked at the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
498
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the When circumstances do not permit the !
vehicle be transported with all wheels off recommended towing methods, the When towing the vehicle with all wheels
the ground using flatbed or appropriate vehicle may be towed with all wheels on on the ground, the automatic transmis-
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is the ground only so far as necessary to have sion must be in position N and the
preferable to other types of towing. the vehicle moved to a safe location where SmartKey must be in starter switch
the recommended towing methods can be position 2.
! employed.
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip- When towing the vehicle with all wheels
ment, with the SmartKey in starter ! on the ground, the vehicle may be
switch turned to position 0. Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing towed only for distances up to 30 miles
so could damage the transfer case, (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. 30 mph (50 km/h).
which is not covered by the
Towing with sling-type equipment over
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. If the vehicle is towed with the front
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports. All wheels must be on or off the ground. axle raised (observe instructions re-
Observe instructions for towing the ve- garding flexible drive shaft), the engine
To prevent damage during transport, must be shut off (SmartKey in starter
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or hicles with all wheels on the ground.
switch position 1). Otherwise, the
suspension parts. Use the towing eyes. 4-ETS may become engaged which may
Switch off the ESP® (컄 page 101), cause loss of towing control.
tow-away alarm (컄 page 107) and the
automatic central locking
(컄 page 130).
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
499
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
To be certain to avoid additional dam- Warning! G Warning! G
age to the vehicle powertrain, however
If circumstances require towing the vehicle With the engine not running, there is no
you should observe the following:
with all wheels on the ground, always tow power assistance for the brake and steering
앫 With damage to the front axle with a tow bar if: systems. In this case, it is important to keep
앫 raise front axle 앫 the engine will not run in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
앫 remove flexible drive shaft be- 앫 there is a malfunction in the power
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
tween rear axle and transfer supply or in the vehicle’s electrical sys-
case tem
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on i
앫 With damage to the rear axle
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in To signal turns while being towed with
앫 raise rear axle starter switch position 2. hazard warning flasher in use, turn the
앫 tow vehicle with wheel lift or If the SmartKey is left in starter switch SmartKey in starter switch to
dolly placed under front wheels position 0 for an extended period of time, it position 2 and activate combination
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this switch for left or right turn signal in
앫 With damage to the transfer case usual manner – only the selected turn
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
앫 remove flexible drive shaft to remove SmartKey from starter switch and signal will operate.
the drive axles reinsert. Upon canceling the turn signal, the
Always install new self-locking nuts hazard warning flasher will operate
when reinstalling flexible drive shaft. again.
500
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i ! Installing towing eye bolts

The vehicle cannot be started via When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, note the following: The front towing eye is located behind a
tow-start.
cover on the passenger side below the
With the automatic central locking front bumper.
i activated and the ignition in position 2
If the battery is disconnected or dis- (컄 page 38), the vehicle doors lock if
charged, the automatic transmission the left front wheel is turning at a speed
will remain locked in position P and the of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or above.
SmartKey will not turn in the starter To prevent the vehicle doors from
switch. For more information, see “Bat- locking, deactivate the automatic
tery” (컄 page 487) and “Jump starting” central locking (컄 page 130).
(컄 page 496).
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 107).
Towing of the vehicle should only be 1 Towing eye cover
done using the towing eye. Never
attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod
to vehicle chassis, frame or suspension
parts.
501
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
The rear towing eye is located behind the 왘 Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by Stranded vehicle
right side cover in the rear bumper panel. the arrow.
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
왘 Lift off cover 1 to reveal the threaded
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should
hole for towing eye bolt.
be done with the greatest of care, especial-
왘 Take the towing eye bolt and wheel ly if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
wrench from the vehicle toolkit
Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or diago-
(컄 page 455).
nally, since it could result in damage to the
왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and chassis alignment.
tighten with wheel wrench.
Never try to free a vehicle that is still cou-
왘 After use, unscrew towing eye bolt. pled to a trailer.
1 Towing eye cover 왘 Store the towing eye bolt and wheel If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer
wrench back into the vehicle toolkit hitch receiver should be pulled backward
(컄 page 455).
Warning! G in its own previously made tracks.
왘 Engage cover 1 at top and press at
In order to avoid possible serious burns or bottom.
injury, use extreme caution when removing
the cover, because the rear exhaust pipe is
extremely hot.
502
Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to !
stop the supply of electricity to a device Warning! G Only install fuses that have been tested
that is malfunctioning. This helps to and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
prevent damage to the other vehicle Only use fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz
that have the specified amperage
electronics. If a fuse is blown, the compo- with the specified amperage for the system
rating. Otherwise, electrical parts or
nents and systems secured by that fuse in question. Otherwise, a short circuit could
systems could be damaged.
will stop operating. result and cause a fire.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
The following aids are available to help you blown fuse. Have the cause determined
change fuses. They are included with the and remedied by an authorized
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 455): Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫 Fuse chart
The fuse chart explains the fuse alloca-
tion and fuse amperages.
앫 Spare fuses
앫 Fuse extractor
503
Practical hints
Fuses
Main fuse box 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38) and Fuse box in cargo compartment
remove the SmartKey from the starter
The main fuse box is located on the pas- switch. The fuse box is located behind under the
senger side of the engine compartment. cargo compartment cover on the
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
right-hand side of the spare wheel well.
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the
왘 Lift the cargo compartment cover
starter switch in position 0, same as
(컄 page 454).
with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then 왘 Secure cargo compartment cover with
can be closed again. strap (컄 page 455).
왘 Release clamp 1.
왘 Lift fuse box cover 2 up.
왘 Install main fuse box cover in reverse
1 Clamp order.
2 Main fuse box cover
!
The fuse box cover must be installed
properly to prevent moisture and/or
dirt from entering the fuse box and pos-
sibly impairing fuse operation. 1 Cover
2 Handle
왘 Lift cover 1 at handle 2.
504
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment Opening:

왘 Pull cover 1 in direction of arrow.
The fuse box is located behind a cover in
the dashboard on the passenger side. Closing:
왘 Open the front passenger door. 왘 Clip upper end of cover 2 into open-
ing.
왘 Push on lower end of cover 2 until it
engages.
1 Cover
!
Do not use sharp objects such as a
screwdriver to open fuse box cover 1,
as this could damage it.
505
506
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
507
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers !
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of Genuine The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Parts required for mainte- parts and accessories not authorized
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
gically located parts distribution centers vehicle, which is not covered by the
provide quick and reliable parts service. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
More than 300 000 different parts for could compromise the vehicle’s
Mercedes-Benz models are available. durability or safety.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
should be installed.
508
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your Accessories warranties, copies of which
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck are available at any Mercedes-Benz Light Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Center will exchange or repair any defec- Truck Center. Information booklet, have an authorized
tive parts originally installed on the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange
in accordance with the terms of the follow- for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
ing warranties:
앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
509
Technical data
1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar) Example certification label R 500 4 Second-row seat
2 Paintwork code 5 Carpet
3 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
왘 Move second-row seat 4 on passen-
i
ger side to the rear as far as possible
Data shown on certification label are (컄 page 137).
for illustration purposes only. These
data are specific to each vehicle and 왘 Fold carpet 5 in direction of arrow.
may vary from data shown in the illus- You may have to cut the perforated car-
tration. Refer to certification label on pet using a sharp object, e. g. a knife.
vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle. i
When ordering parts, please specify
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is vehicle identification and engine num-
also embossed underneath the passen- ber.
ger-side seat in the second seat row.
510
Technical data
7 Vacuum line routing diagram label

8 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission stan-
dards
9 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
a Engine number (engraved on engine)
511
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
R 350 R 500
1 Idler pulley 1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Idler pulley 2 Power steering pump
3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Power steering pump 4 Crankshaft
5 Air conditioning compressor 5 Coolant pump
6 Crankshaft 6 Generator (alternator)
7 Coolant pump 7 Idler pulley
8 Generator (alternator)
512
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
Model R 350 (251.1651) R 500 (251.175)1
Engine 272 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 8
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm) 3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 213 cu in (3498 cm ) 303 cu in (4966 cm3)
Compression ratio 10.7:1 10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 268 hp/6000 rpm 2 302 hp/5600 rpm 2
(200 kW/6000 rpm) (225 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 258 lb-ft/2400 - 5000 rpm 339 lb-ft/2700 - 4750 rpm
(350 Nm/2400 - 5000 rpm) (460 Nm/2700 - 4750 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 6300 rpm
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2404 mm 2370 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
513
Technical data
Rims and tires
! ! i
Only use tires which have been tested Using tires other than those approved Further information on tires and rims is
and approved for your vehicle by by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimen- available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by tal effects, such as Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with
Mercedes-Benz are developed to pro- the recommended tire inflation pres-
앫 poor handling characteristics
vide best possible performance in con- sures is located on the driver’s door
junction with the driving safety 앫 increased noise B-pillar (컄 page 510). Some vehicles
systems on your vehicle such as ABS or 앫 increased fuel consumption may have supplemental tire inflation
ESP®. Tires specially developed for pressure information for driving at high
your vehicle and tested and approved Moreover, tires and rims not approved speeds (컄 page 364) or for vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, loads less than the maximum loaded
finding the following on the tire’s side- exhibit dimensional variations and dif- vehicle condition (컄 page 364). If such
wall: ferent tire deformation characteristics information is provided, it can be found
that could cause them to come into on the placard located on the inside of
앫 MO = Mercedes-Benz Original contact with the vehicle body or axle
equipment tires the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehi- pressure should be checked regularly
Using tires other than those approved cle may be the result. and should only be adjusted on cold
by Mercedes-Benz may result in dam- tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s main-
age that is not covered by the tenance recommendation included
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. with vehicle.
514
Technical data
Rims and tires
i
The following pages also list the
approved wheel rim and tire sizes for
equipping your vehicles with winter
tires. Winter tires are not available as
standard or optional factory equip-
ment, but can be purchased from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Depending on vehicle model and the
standard or optional factory-equipped
wheel rim/tire configuration on your
vehicle (Appearance Package, Sport
Package etc.), equipping your vehicle
with winter tires approved for your
vehicle model may also require the
purchase of two or four wheel rims of
the recommended size for use with
these winter tires. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for more infor-
mation.
515
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
R 350 R 500 R 350 (Sport Package*)

R 500 (Sport Package*)
Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 8 J x 18 H2 8 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 2.20 in (56 mm) 2.64 in (67 mm) 2.64 in (67 mm)
1
Summer tires - - 255/50 R19 103W
All-season tires1 235/65 R17 104H M+S 255/55 R18 105H M+S -
1,2
Winter tires 235/65 R17 104H M+S. 255/55 R18 105H M+S. -
1
Radial-ply tires
2
Not available as factory equipment.
516
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel (collapsible tire)
All models
Rim 6.5 B x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.58 in (40 mm)
Collapsible tire 195/75-18 106P1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
! i
Please compare the recommended tire Please note that the tire inflation
inflation pressure for your vehicle with pressure of the collapsible tire differs
the tire inflation pressure on the yellow from the tire inflation pressure of the
label located on the spare wheel rim. road tires.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yel- Inflate the collapsible tire to
low label on the spare wheel rim differs 44 psi (3.0 bar).
from the values given in this Operator’s
Manual, inflate the collapsible tire to
the recommended tire inflation pres-
sure given on the yellow label on the
spare wheel rim.
517
Technical data
Electrical system
Model R 350 R 500

Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/70 Ah 2 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs NGK PLKR 6A NGK PFR 5R-11
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque 15 - 22 lb-ft (20 - 30 Nm) 15 - 22 lb-ft (20 - 30 Nm)
518
Technical data
Main Dimensions
왔 Main Dimensions
Model R 350, R 500
Overall vehicle length 203.0 in (5157 mm)
Overall vehicle width 75.7 in (1922 mm)
Overall vehicle height 65.4 in (1661 mm)
Wheelbase 126.6 in (3215 mm)
Track, front 65.6 in (1665 mm)
Track, rear 65.3 in (1658 mm)
Ground clearance 5.8 in (148 mm)
Turning circle 40.7 ft (12.4 m)
519
Technical data
Weights
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
520
Technical data
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities Therefore only use products tested and Please refer to the Factory Approved
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
Vehicle components and their respective your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
lubricants must match.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter R 350 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
R 500 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Automatic transmis- 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
sion
Transfer case 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear axle 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
Front axle 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
Power steering approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB Power Steering Fluid
Front wheel hubs approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system - MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
521
Technical data
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Cooling system R 350 10 US qt (9.5 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
R 500 11.1 US qt (10.5 l)
Fuel Tank 21.1 US gal (80.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
including a reserve of approx. 3.4 US gal (13.0 l) Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil
(never R-12)
Windshield washer and 8.2 US qt (7.8 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
headlamp cleaning
system*
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 528).
522
Technical data
Engine oils Please follow Maintenance System Brake fluid

(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
Engine oils are specifically tested for their vehicles) recommendations for sched- During vehicle operation, the boiling point
suitability in our engines and durability for uled oil changes. Failure to do so could of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
our service intervals. Therefore, only use result in engine damage not covered by through the absorption of moisture from
approved engine oils and oil filters re- the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the atmosphere.
quired for vehicles with Maintenance Sys-
tem (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles). For a listing of approved engine
Engine oil additives Warning! G
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Ap- Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. Under extremely strenuous operating condi-
proved Service Products pamphlet, or con- They may damage the engine. tions, this moisture content can lead to the
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light formation of bubbles in the system, thus re-
Truck Center. Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by ducing the system’s efficiency.
! the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
Using engine oils and oil filters of regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s
specification other than those express- Air conditioning refrigerant Maintenance Booklet for replacement inter-
ly required for the Maintenance System val.
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter lubricating oil are used in the air condition-
Only brake fluid approved by
at change intervals longer than those ing system.
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
called for by the Maintenance System Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu- authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the Center will provide you with additional in-
vehicles) will result in engine damage system will occur. formation.
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
523
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline ! Fuel requirements

To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gaso- Only use premium unleaded fuel.
Warning! G line must be used. If premium unleaded 앫 The octane number (posted at the
is not available and low octane fuel is pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
used, follow these precautions: of both the Research (R) octane num-
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
앫 Have the fuel tank only partially ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
filled with unleaded regular and fill (R+M)/2). This is also known as the
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
up with premium unleaded as soon ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline! as possible. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
acceleration. used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not
앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
persons and no luggage. exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is

accelerator pedal position if the not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
vehicle is fully loaded or operating 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
in mountainous terrain. can be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
524
Technical data
Gasoline additives In areas where carbon deposits may be Coolants

encountered due to lack of availability of
A major concern among engine manufac- gasolines which contain these additives, The engine coolant is a mixture of water
turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso- Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the additives approved by us for use on provides:
use of quality gasoline containing additives Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory 앫 Corrosion protection
that prevent the build-up of carbon depos- Approved Service Products pamphlet for a
its. listing of approved product(s). Follow 앫 Freeze protection
After an extended period of using fuels directions on product label. 앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the
without such additives carbon deposits Do not blend other specific fuel additives boiling point)
can build up, especially on the intake with fuel. This only results in unnecessary The cooling system was filled at the factory
valves and in the combustion area, leading costs and may be harmful to the engine with a coolant providing freeze protection
to engine performance problems such as: operation. to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corro-
앫 Warm-up hesitation Damage or malfunction resulting from sion protection.
앫 Unstable idle poor fuel quality or from blending addition- If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
al fuel additives other than those tested -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool-
앫 Knocking/pinging and approved by us for use on ant in the pressurized cooling system is
앫 Misfire Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the Fac- reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
tory Approved Service Products pamphlet
앫 Power loss
are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
525
Technical data
The coolant solution must be used year If the coolant level is low, water and
round to provide the necessary corrosion MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should
protection and increase boil-over protec- be used to bring it up to the proper level
tion. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for (have cooling system checked for signs of
replacement interval. leakage). Please make sure the mixture is
in accordance with label instructions.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticor- The water in the cooling system must meet
rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze minimum requirements, which are usually
protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]). If satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
you use a solution that is more than 55% are not sure about the water quality, con-
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protec- sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
tion to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the engine Truck Center.
temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
Therefore, do not use more than this
amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
526
Technical data
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anti- Before the start of the winter season (or
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum corrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in once a year in hot southern regions), you
components in motor vehicle engines ne- a significantly shortened service life.) should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
cessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze Therefore, the following product is strongly
concentration checked. The coolant is also
coolant used in such engines be recommended for use in your vehicle:
regularly checked each time you bring your
specifically formulated to protect the Mercedes-Benz 325.0 anticorrosion/anti-
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center for service.
freeze agent.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection

– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)
R 350 5.0 US qt (4.75 l) 5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
R 500 5.6 US qt (5.25 l) 6.1 US qt (5.8 l)
527
Technical data
Windshield washer and headlamp Windshield and headlamp washer fluid

cleaning* system mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
Both the windshield washer and headlamp
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
cleaning* system are supplied from the
“MB SummerFit” and water:
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
The windshield and headlamp washer fluid
water
reservoir has a capacity of approx.
8.2 US qt (7.8 l). (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] water)
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or con- For temperatures below freezing point, use
centrate and commercially available MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
premixed windshield washer “MB SummerFit” and commercially avail-
solvent/antifreeze, depending on am- able premixed windshield washer
bient temperatures). solvent/antifreeze:
앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
Warning! G solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
1 gal [4.0 l] solvent)
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
528
Technical terms
ABS Alignment bolt CAC

(Antilock Brake System) Metal pin with thread. The centering (Customer Assistance Center)
Prevents the wheels from locking up pin is an aid used when changing a tire Mercedes-Benz customer service
during braking so that the vehicle can to align the wheel with the wheel hub. center, which can help you with any
continue to be steered. questions about your vehicle and
Aspect ratio
provide assistance in the event of a
Accessory weight (컄 page 385)
breakdown.
(컄 page 385)
Bar
CAN system
ADS (컄 page 386)
(Controller Area Network)
(Adaptive Damping System)
BAS Data bus network serving to control
Automatically adapts the optimum sus- (Brake Assist System) vehicle functions such as door locking
pension damping to prevailing driving
System for potentially reducing braking or windshield wiping.
conditions.
distances in emergency braking situa-
Cockpit
Airmatic* tions. The system is activated when it
All instruments, switches, buttons and
Automatically selects the optimum sus- senses an emergency based on how
indicator/warning lamps in the
pension tuning and ride height for your fast the brake is applied.
passenger compartment needed for
vehicle. Airmatic consists of two com-
Bead vehicle operation and monitoring.
ponents:
(컄 page 386)
Cold tire inflation pressure
앫 Adaptive Damping System Bi-Xenon headlamps* (컄 page 386)
앫 Vehicle level control Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more
Air pressure
intense light than filament headlamps.
(컄 page 385)
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
529
Technical terms
Collapsible tire Engine number FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles)

An especially compact spare tire that The number set by the manufacturer (Flexible Service System PLUS)
must be inflated with a provided air and placed on the cylinder block to Maintenance service indicator in the
pump before using. It should only be uniquely identify each engine speedometer display that informs the
used to bring the vehicle to the nearest produced. driver when the next vehicle mainte-
service station. nance service is due. FSS evaluates en-
Engine oil viscosity
gine temperature, oil level, vehicle
Control system Measurement for the inner friction (vis-
speed, engine speed, distance driven
The control system is used to call up cosity) of the oil at different tempera-
and the time elapsed since your last
vehicle information and to change tures. The higher the temperature an
service, and calls for the next mainte-
component settings. Information and oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
nance service accordingly.
messages appear in the multifunction or the lower the temperature it can tol-
display. The driver uses the buttons on erate without becoming viscous, the GAWR
the multifunction steering wheel to better the viscosity. (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
navigate through the system and to ad- ESP® (컄 page 386)
just settings.
(Electronic Stability Program) Gear range
Cruise control Improves vehicle handling and direc- Number of gears which are available to
Driving convenience system for tional stability. the automatic transmission for shifting.
automatically maintaining the vehicle The automatic gear shifting process
ETD
speed set by the driver. can be adapted to specific operating
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Curb weight conditions using the gear selector
Device which deploys in certain frontal
(컄 page 386) lever.
and rear collisions exceeding the sys-
tem's threshold to tighten the seat
DOT
belts.
(Department of Transportation)
->SRS
(컄 page 386)
530
Technical terms
GPS Kickdown Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)

(Global Positioning System) Depressing the accelerator past the Maintenance service indicator in the
Satellite-based system for relaying point of resistance shifts the transmis- multifunction display that informs the
geographic location information to and sion down to the lowest possible gear. driver when the next vehicle mainte-
from vehicles equipped with special re- This very quickly accelerates the vehi- nance service is due. The Maintenance
ceivers. Employs CD or DVD digital cle and should not be used for normal system tracks distance driven and the
maps for navigation. acceleration needs. time elapsed since the last mainte-
nance service, calculates other mainte-
GVW Kilopascal (kPa)
nance service work required, and calls
(Gross Vehicle Weight) (컄 page 386)
for the next service accordingly.
(컄 page 386)
Line of fall
Maximum load rating
GVWR The direct line that an object moves
(컄 page 387)
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) downhill when influenced by the force
(컄 page 386) of gravity alone. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(컄 page 387)
Instrument cluster Locking knob
The displays and indicator/warning Knob on the door which indicates Maximum tire inflation pressure
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, in- whether the door is locked or un- (컄 page 387)
cluding the tachometer, speedometer, locked. Pushing the locking knob down
Modular COMAND System
engine temperature and fuel gauge. on an individual door from inside will
Information and operating center for
lock that door.
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and the ra-
dio and navigation system, as well as
for other optional equipment (CD
changer, telephone, etc.).
531
Technical terms
Memory function* Normal occupant weight Power train

Used to store three individual seat, (컄 page 387) Collective term designating all compo-
steering wheel and mirror positions. nents used to generate and transmit
Overspeed range
motive power to the drive axles, includ-
MON Engine speeds within the red marking
ing
(Motor Octane Number) on the tachometer dial. Avoid this en-
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline gine speed range, as it may result in se- 앫 engine
as determined by a standardized meth- rious engine damage that is not
앫 clutch/torque converter
od. It is an indication of a gasoline's covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
ability to resist undesired detonation Warranty. 앫 transmission
(knocking). The average of both the Occupant distribution 앫 transfer case
MON (Motor Octane Number) and (컄 page 387) 앫 drive shaft
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as Parktronic (Parking assist)* 앫 differential
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. System which uses visual and acoustic
signals to assist the driver during park- 앫 axle shafts/axles
Multifunction display
ing maneuvers. PRE-SAFE®*
The display field in the instrument clus-
Poly-V-belt drive (Preventive Occupant Safety System)
ter used to present information provid-
Drives engine-components (alternator, Vehicles equipped with PRE-SAFE®*
ed by the control system.
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. take preventive measures when the
Multifunction steering wheel system senses certain driving dynam-
Steering wheel with buttons for operat- ics suggesting a possible accident.
ing the control system.
Production options weight
(컄 page 387)
532
Technical terms
Program mode selector switch RON Tele Aid System*

Used to switch the automatic transmis- (Research Octane Number) (Telematic Alarm Identification on
sion between standard operation (S) The Research Octane Number for gaso- Demand)
and comfort operation (C). line as determined by a standardized The Tele Aid system consists of three
method. It is an indication of a gaso- types of response: automatic and man-
PSI
line's ability to resist undesired detona- ual emergency, roadside assistance
(Pounds per square inch)
tion (knocking). The average of both and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
(컄 page 387)
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) tivated by completing a subscriber
Recommended tire inflation pressure and RON (Research Octane Number) is agreement and placing an acquain-
(컄 page 387) posted at the pump, also known as tance call.
REST ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. The Tele Aid system is operational pro-
(Residual Engine Heat Utilization) vided that the vehicle’s battery is
Sidewall
Feature that uses the engine heat charged, properly connected, not dam-
(컄 page 387)
stored in the coolant to heat the vehi- aged and cellular and GPS coverage is
cle interior for a short time after the en- SRS available.
gine has been turned off. (Supplemental Restraint System)
Telematics*
Seat belts, emergency tensioning de-
Restraint system A combination of the terms “telecom-
vice and air bags. Though independent
Seat belts, belt tensioner, air bags and munications” and “informatics”.
systems, they are closely interfaced to
child seat restraint systems. As inde- provide effective occupant protection. Tightening torque
pendent systems, their protective func- Force times lever arm (e.g. a wheel
tions complement one another. wrench) with which threaded fasteners
Rim such as wheel bolts are tightened.
(컄 page 387)
533
Technical terms
TIN Treadwear indicators

(Tire Identification Number) (컄 page 388)
(컄 page 387)
TWR
Tire load rating (Tongue Weight Rating)
(컄 page 387) (컄 page 388)
Tire ply composition and material used Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Tire speed rating Vehicle capacity weight
Traction Vehicle level control
(컄 page 388) The ground clearance of the vehicle is
automatically controlled according to a
Transfer case
selected setting and speed.The driver
Speed of rotation/torque converter
can set the ground clearance manually
that works together with the ->auto-
for example on very rough roads.
matic transmission.
VIN
Tread
(Vehicle Identification Number)
(컄 page 388)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
534
Index
A Immobilizer 66, 104 Seat cushion tilt 44

ABS 97, 529 Rear window defroster 215 Seat fore and aft adjustment 43
ABS control 97 Rear window wiper 62 Seat height 44
Malfunction indicator lamp 404 Residual heat 243 Seats 42
Messages in display 418 Residual heat* 228 Steering column height 47
Warning lamp 404 Seat heating* 142 Steering wheel 45
Accelerator position, automatic Tow-away alarm 107 Adjusting steering column in or out 47
transmission 203 Warning indicators (Parktronic*) 276 Adjusting steering column up or down 47
Accessory weight 385, 529 Windshield wipers 59 Air bags 71
Accident Adding Children 72
In case of 63 Coolant 351 Front 75
Activating Engine oil 349 Passenger 75
Air circulation mode 242 Additional turn signal lamps Safety guidelines 74
Air conditioning (cooling) 226 Replacing bulbs 466 Side impact 76
Air recirculation mode 225, 239 Adjusting 42 Window curtain 76
Anti-theft alarm system 105 Air distribution 222, 236 Air conditioning
Central locking (control system) 188 Air volume 222, 237 Turning off 226
Defrosting 223 Backrest tilt 44 Turning on 226
Easy-entry/exit feature* 189 Exterior rear view mirror 48 Air conditioning refrigerant 523
Electric air pump 483 Head restraint height 44 Air distribution
ESP® 102 Head restraint tilt 45 Adjusting 222, 236
Exterior headlamps 58 Instrument cluster illumination 158 Air pressure 385, 529
Hazard warning flasher 154 Interior rear view mirror 48 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Headlamps 58 Mirrors 47 Air pump, electric
High beams 151 Multicontour seat* 136 Turning on 483
Ignition 38 Seat cushion depth 136
535
Index
Air recirculation mode 224, 239 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Automatic climate control* (3-zone) 230
Activating 225, 239 Armrest Adjusting air distribution 236
Deactivating 226, 240 Storage compartment in front of 296 Adjusting air volume 237
Air volume Storage compartments 296 Air recirculation mode 239
Adjusting 222, 237 Ashtray Rear passenger compartment 244
AIRMATIC* 269 Front center console 303 Residual heat utilization 243
Alarm Aspect ratio 385, 529 Setting the temperature 236
Audible 95, 106 ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 350 Automatic headlamp mode 148
Canceling 106 AUDIO menu 170 Automatic lighting control
Visual 104 Selecting radio station 170 Activating 155
Alarm system Selecting satellite radio* station 171 Deactivating 155
Anti-theft 104 Audio system Automatic locking when driving 130
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 481, 529 CD mode 171 Automatic shift program
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 527 Automatic antiglare for rear view Automatic transmission* 204
Antiglare mirror 209 Automatic transmission
Automatic 209 Automatic central locking Accelerator position 203
Antilock brake system (ABS) 529 Activating/deactivating (control Emergency operation (Limp Home
Anti-theft alarm system system) 188 Mode) 207
Arming 105 Automatic climate control* Gear ranges 202
Canceling alarm 106 Front defroster 238 Gear selector lever position 199, 200
Disarming 106 Residual ventilation 243 Gear shifting malfunctions 207
Anti-theft systems Kickdown 203
Anti-theft alarm system 104 Transmission fluid 350
Immobilizer 104 Automatic transmission*
Tow-away alarm 106 Automatic shift program 204
536
Index
B Brake lamps C
Backup lamps Replacing bulbs 466 CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 529
Replacing bulbs 466 Brake pads California
Bar 386, 529 Message in display 430 Important notice 11
BAS 99, 529 Brakes 332 Call priority
Batteries, SmartKey Warning lamp 405 Tele Aid* 318
Check lamp 113, 119 Break-in period 330 Calling up
Batteries, vehicle Bulbs, replacing 465 Range (distance to empty) 193
Messages in display 430 Additional turn signal lamps 466 Service indicator 393
Battery discharged Backup lamps 466 CAN system 529
Jump starting 496 Bi-Xenon* headlamps 466 Capacities
Battery, SmartKey 463 Brake lamps 466 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 521
Battery, vehicle 487 Front fog lamp 471 Card holder 300
Charging 495 Front fog lamps* 466 Cargo compartment
Dis-/reconnecting 489 Front lamps 466 Extending 283
Removing/installing 489 Headlamps 466 Fuse box 504
Bead 386, 529 License plate lamps 466, 474 Lamp 157
Bi-Xenon* headlamps 529 Parking lamps 466 Tie-down rings 281
Replacing bulbs 466 Rear fog lamps 472 Cargo compartment cover blind* 288
Block heater (Canada only) 391 Rear side marker lamp bulbs 472 Closing 288
Blocking Sidemarker lamps 466 Installing 289
Rear door window operation 93 Standing lamps 466 Opening 288
Bottle opener 300 Tail lamp assemblies 472 Removing 288
Brake assist system (BAS) 529 Tail lamps 466 Cargo tie-down rings 281
Brake fluid 523 Turn signal lamps 466 Carpets, cleaning 402
Message in display 432
537
Index
Catalytic converter 340 Checking Cleaning

CD player Coolant level 351 Headlamps 208
Operating 171 Oil level 346 Headliner 402
CD-changer* 294 Tire inflate pressure 344 Light alloy wheels 401
Center console 29 Vehicle lighting 344 Plastic and rubber parts 402
Lower part 30 Checking tire pressure electronically with Steering wheel 402
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring Windows 400
lamp 414 System* (Advanced TPMS*) 371 Windshield 60
Upper part 29 Checking tire pressure electronically with Cleaning tires 355
Central locking the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Climate control 216
Automatic 130 (TPMS) 368 Adjusting 222
Switch 131 Child safety 82 Adjusting air volume 222
Switching on/off (control Air bags 72 deactivating 220
system) 188 Infant and child restraint systems 78, Front defroster 223
Unlocking from inside 131 82 Rear passenger compartment 228
Central locking switch 131 LATCH child seat mounts 92 Setting the temperature 222
Certification label 510 Child safety switch see Blocking of rear Clock 180
Changing door window operation Closing
SmartKey setting 189 Cigarette lighter Glove box 294
Charging Front center console 303 Hood 346
Vehicle battery 495 Cigarette lighter* 305 Panorama sliding/pop-up roof 260
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 462
lamp 407, 408 Side windows 249
Tailgate 124, 128, 129
Tilt/sliding sunroof* 255
Windows 248
538
Index
Closing the tailgate from the inside Control system 530 Coolant 351, 525
electrically* 124 AUDIO menu 170 Adding 351
Closing the tailgate from the outside (vehi- Convenience submenu 189 Anticorrosion/antifreeze
cles without KEYLESS-GO*) 126 Display digital speedometer 169 quantity 526
Closing tilt/sliding sunroof* Functions 165 Checking level 351
In an emergency 462 Instrument cluster submenu 178, Messages in display 433, 436
Cockpit 22, 529 180 Temperature 341
Cold tire inflation pressure 386, 529 Lighting submenu 182 Coolant level
Collapsible tire 457, 530 Malfunction memory menu 173 Checking 351
Collapsible wheel chock 457 Menus 164, 165 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 152
Combination switch Selecting radio system 170 Cruise control 264, 530
High beam flasher 58 Selecting satellite radio* system 171 Canceling 266
Turn signals 58 Settings menu 174 Driving downhill 265
Windshield wipers 59 Standard display menu 168 Driving uphill 265
Compass 186, 327 Submenus 163, 165 Setting current speed 265
Adjustment 186 TEL* menu 194 Setting speeds 269
Calibration 187 Trip computer menu 192 Cruise control lever 264
Setting the compass zone 186 Vehicle submenu 186 Cup holder
Control and operation of radio Convenience submenu 189 Front center console 299
transmitters 339 Activating easy-entry/exit In rear center console 301
feature* 189 Cup holders 299
Cleaning 401
Curb weight 386, 530
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 529
539
Index
D Rear passenger compartment ventila- Discharged battery

Daytime running lamp mode 149 tion and climate control 245 Jump starting 496
Setting 182 Rear window defroster 215 Disconnecting
Deactivating Rear window wiper 62 Vehicle battery 489
Air conditioning 227 Residual heat 228, 243 Display
Air conditioning (cooling) 242 Seat heating* 143 Selecting 179
Air recirculation mode 226, 240 Tow-away alarm 107 Displays
Alarm 106 Deep water see Standing water Digital speedometer 169
Anti-theft alarm system 106 Defogging Maintenance service indicator 392
Automatic climate control* Windshield 224, 238 Messages 347
(3-zone) 234 Delayed switch-off Selecting 179
Central locking (control system) 188 Interior lighting 185 Showing malfunctions 173
Climate control system 220 Department of Transportation see DOT Distance to empty (range)
Cruise control 266 Dialing Calling up 192
Defrost 223, 238 A number (telephone*) 195 Door control panel 34
Engine 66 Difficulties Door entry lamps 157
ESP® 101 While driving see Problems while driv- Door handle 34
Hazard warning flasher 154 ing Door unlock
Headlamps 65 Digital speedometer 168 With Tele Aid* 319
Immobilizer 104 Direction of rotation (tires) 356 Door windows 248
Interior lighting delayed Automatic closing 250
switch-off 185 Automatic opening 250
540
Index
Closing 248 Driving safety systems Emergency calls

Closing fully (Express-close) 250 4-ETS 102 Initiating an emergency call 314
Opening 248 ABS 97 With Tele Aid* 313
Opening fully (Express-open) 250 BAS 99 Emergency operation (Limp Home
Stopping 250 EBP 102 Mode) 207
Synchronizing 251 ESP® 99 Emergency operations
Doors Driving systems 264 Closing tilt/sliding sunroof* 462
Message in display 436 AIRMATIC* 269 Locking the vehicle 460
Opening from inside vehicle 121 Cruise control 264 Opening tilt/sliding sunroof* 462
Opening from outside 112 Driving safety systems 97 Remote door unlock 319
DOT 386, 530 Parktronic* 274 Unlocking the vehicle 459
Downhill driving Driving tips 203 Emergency tensioning device see ETD
Cruise control 265 Accelerator position 203 Emission control 340
Drinking and driving 331 Kickdown 203 Emission control label 511
Drive sensibly-save fuel 331 Ending
E
Driving 50, 56 A call (telephone*) 195
Easy-entry/exit feature* 132
Abroad 339 Engine
Activating 189
In winter 337 Message in the display 433
EBP 102
Problems 62 Starting 53
Electrical fuses 503
Safety systems 97 Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 54
Electrical system
Through standing water 338 Technical data 513
Technical data 518
Driving abroad 339 Turning off 66
Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP
Driving off 333 Engine cleaning 397
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Engine compartment
Electronic Traction System see 4-ETS
Hood 345
Main fuse box 504
541
Index
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 407, Exterior rear view mirrors 4-ETS 102
433 Adjusting 48 Front air bags 75
Engine malfunction indicator lamp (Cana- Power folding* 211 Front defroster 223, 238
da only) 27 Synchronizing 211 Front fog lamps
Engine malfunction indicator lamp (USA Indicator lamp 147
F
only) 27 Front lamps
Fastening the seat belts 50
Engine number 530 Messages in display 442
First aid kit 454
Engine oil 346, 523 Replacing bulbs 466, 468
Flat tire 478
Adding 349 Front seats
Lowering the vehicle 485
Additives 523 Head restraints 44
Preparing the vehicle 479
Checking level 346 Front towing eye 501
Spare wheel 457
Consumption 346 Front wiper blades
Flexible Service System PLUS (FSS
Display messages 437–438 Installing 476, 477
PLUS) 530
Messages in display 347, 437–438 Removing 475
Floormats* 328
Viscosity 530 FSS PLUS (Flexible Service System
Fluid level
ESP® 25, 99, 530 PLUS) 530
Automatic transmission 350
Switching off 101 Fuel 343
Fog lamp, rear
Switching on 102 Additives 525
Switching on 151
Warning lamp 409 Fuel reserve warning lamp 409
Fog lamps, front*
ETD 530 Gasoline additives 525
Messages in display 442
Safety guidelines 74 Premium unleaded gasoline 343,
Replacing bulbs 466
ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 80 524
Switching on 151
Extending cargo compartment 283 Requirements 524
Folding
Exterior mirrors Fuel additives 525
Exterior mirrors 211
Folding 211 Fuel cap
Message in display 439
542
Index
Fuel consumption statistics Gear range 530 Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
After start 192 Automatic transmission 202 GTW 386
Since last reset 193 Limiting 202 GVW 386, 531
Fuel filler flap Shifting into optimal 207 GVWR 386, 531
Locking 342 Gear range limit
H
Opening 461 Canceling 207
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 402
Unlocking 342 Gear selector lever
Hazard warning flasher 153
Fuel requirements 524 Message in the display 421
Switching off 154
Fuel tank Position 200
Switching on 154
Filler flap 342 Position (automatic
Head restraints
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 521 transmission) 199
Front seats 44
Functions (control system) 165 Global
Rear seats 139
Resetting 176 Locking 112
Headlamp cleaning system* 352
Fuses 503 Unlocking 112
Headlamps
Fuse box in cargo compartment 504 Global Positioning System (GPS) 531
Automatic control 148
Fuse box in passenger Glove box 294
Bi-Xenon* 529
compartment 505 Closing 294
Cleaning lenses 399
Main fuse box 504 Opening 294
Cleaning system* 208, 352
Good visibility 208
G Refilling washer fluid 352
GPS 531
Garage door opener* 320 Replacing bulbs 466
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gasoline additives 525 Switching off 65
Gross Trailer Weight see GTW
Gasoline see Fuel Switching on 58
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
GAWR 386, 530 Washer fluid 528
Washer system 528
543
Index
Headliner Immobilizer 104 Interior lighting 154

Cleaning 402 Activating 104 Activating automatic control 155
Height adjustment Deactivating 104 Deactivating automatic control 155
Head restraints 44 Infant and child restraint systems 82 Delayed switch-off 185
Seat belts 52 Installing 90 Manual operation 155
Steering wheel 45 LATCH child seat mounts 92 Interior rear view mirror
High beam flasher 58, 152 Information Adjusting 48
High beam headlamps About service and warranty 10 Intermittent wiping 60
Messages in display 443 Button for Tele Aid* 317
J
Switching on 151 Infrared reflecting windshield* 328
Jump starting 496
Hood 345 Inside rear view mirror
Closing 346 Antiglare 209 K
Message in display 439 Installing Key, Mechanical 459
Opening 345 Front wiper blades 476, 477 KEYLESS-GO*
Hooks Infant and child restraint systems 90 Closing tailgate 128, 129
Loading 282 Vehicle battery 489 Loss of SmartKey with
Hydroplaning 335 Instrument cluster 24, 158, 531 KEYLESS-GO* 121
Cleaning 401 Starting the engine 54
I
Illumination 158 Turning off engine 66
Identification labels 510
Lamps in 409 Unlocking and opening, tailgate 120
Certification label 510
Outside temperature indicator 159 Unlocking with 37
Vehicle identification number
Selecting language 178 Kickdown 203, 531
(VIN) 511
Instruments and controls see Cockpit Kilometers/miles in speedometer 178
Ignition 38
Kilopascal 386
Switching on 54
Kilopascal (kPa) 531
Km/h or mph in speedometer 178
544
Index
L Language Night security illumination 150

Labels, identification 510 Multifunction display 178 Parking lamps 147
Lamp bulbs, exterior 465 Setting 178 Rear fog lamp 151
Lamps, exterior LATCH child seat anchors 92 Settings (control system) 182
Front 466 LATCH child seat mounts 92 Standing lamps 147
Light sensor 444 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 512 Limiting the gear range 202
Messages in display 442, 444 Lever Limp Home Mode 207
Rear 466 For cruise control 264 Line of fall 531
Lamps, indicator and warning License plate lamps Loading 279
ABS 404 Messages in display 444 Cargo compartment cover
Air bag Off 76 Replacing bulbs 466, 474 blind* 288
Battery (SmartKey with Light alloy wheels Cargo tie-down rings 281
KEYLESS-GO*) 118 Cleaning 401 Hooks 282
Battery (SmartKey) 112 Light sensor 444 Instructions 280
Brakes 405 Lighter see cigarette lighter* Parcel nets 298
CHECK ENGINE 407, 408 Lighting 147 Partition net* 290
CHECK Engine malfunction indicator Automatic headlamp mode 148 Roof rack 279
lamp 408 Cargo compartment lamp 157 Loading terminology 385
Engine diagnostics 407, 408 Daytime running lamp mode 149 Loading the vehicle 356
ESP® 409 Door entry lamps 157 Locator lighting 150
Front fog lamps 147 Front fog lamps* 151 Setting 183
Fuel reserve 409 High beams 151 Lock button 531
Rear fog lamp 147 Instrument cluster illumination 158 Lock buttons
Seat belts 410 Interior 154 Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 68
SRS 411 Locator lighting 150
Low beam 147
545
Index
Locking 67, 110 M Maximum load rating 387, 531

Automatic while driving 130 Main dimensions 519 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 387,
Centrally from inside 131 Main fuse box 504 531
Fuel filler flap 342 Maintenance 12 Maximum tire inflation pressure 531
Global (SmartKey with Maintenance service Mechanical key 459
KEYLESS-GO*) 118 Overdue 393 Memory function 144, 532
Global, SmartKey 112 Resetting maintenance service Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
Vehicle in an emergency 460 indicator 394 ing positions 146
Locking the vehicle 120 When due 392 Storing SmartKey dependent
Loss of Service and Warranty Information Maintenance service indicator 392 settings 145
Booklet 509 Resetting 394 Memory function*
Loss of SmartKey 114 Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 531 Recalling positions from
Loss of Smartkey with Malfunction memory 145
KEYLESS-GO* 121 Displaying 173 Menus 164
Low beam bulbs Malfunction memory 173 AUDIO 170
Replacing bulbs 468 Calling up 173 In control system 164, 165
Low tire pressure telltale 25 Manual operations Malfunction memory 173
Lowering Fuel filler flap 461 Settings menu 174
Vehicle 485 Interior lighting control 155 Standard display 168
Locking the vehicle 460 Submenus 163
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 462 TEL* 194
Unlocking the driver’s door 459 Trip computer 192
Manual seat Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Adjusting head restraint tilt 45 Setting 178
MAXCOOL maximum cooling 239
Maximum inflation pressure 387
546
Index
Mirrors Fuel cap 439 Occupant safety 70

Adjusting 47 Hood 439 Children and air bags 72
Automatic antiglare for rear view Lamps 444 Children in the vehicle 82
mirror 209 Lamps, exterior 442 Fastening the seat belt 50
Exterior rear view mirror 48 Oil 437–438 Infant and child restraint systems 82
Storing exterior rear view mirror park- Parking brake 431 LATCH child seat mounts 92
ing position 146 SmartKey 441 Seat belts 50, 74
Modular Control System 531 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 440 Oil
MON 343 Tele Aid* 450, 451 Adding 349
MON (Motor Octane Number) 532 Telephone* 451 Consumption 346
Mph or km/h in speedometer 178 Washer fluid 451 Dipstick 346
Multicontour seat* 136 Multifunction steering wheel 28, 532 Filler neck 349
Multifunction display 532 Viscosity 530
N
Selecting language 178 One-touch gearshifting
Navigation system 172
Standard display 165 Canceling gear range limit 207
Night security illumination 150
Multifunction display messages Opening
Normal occupant weight 387, 532
ABS 418 Doors from the inside 121
Batteries 430 O Fuel filler flap 342
Brake fluid 432 Occupant Classification System 85 Fuel filler flap manually 461
Brake pads 430 Self-test 90 Glove box 294
Coolant 436 Occupant distribution 387 Hood 345
Coolant level 433
Doors 436
EBP (Electronic Brake
Proportioning) 431
Engine oil 437, 438
547
Index
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof 260 P Partition net* 290

Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 462 Paintwork 397 Engaging 291
Tailgate 122 Panic alarm 95 Removing 292, 293
Tilt/sliding sunroof* 255 Panic button on remote control 95 Tightening 291
Tilt/Sliding sunroof* in an Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Parts service 508
emergency 462 panel* 259 Passenger compartment 338
Windows 248 Panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel Fuse box 505
Opening the tailgate from the inside 122, Cleaning 401 Interior lighting 154
123, 124 Parcel nets 298 Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Opening the tailgate from the inside Parking 334 Pedals 331
electrically* 123 Parking and locking 64 Phone book*
Opening the tailgate from the Parking brake 56, 65 Loading 195
outside 122 Engaging 65 Quick search 195
Operating Message in display 431 Phone number*
CD player 171 Releasing 56 Dialing 195
Radio 170 Parking lamps Redialing 196
Radio transmitters 339 Replacing bulbs 466 Plastic and rubber parts
Telephone* 194 Parking position Cleaning 402
Vehicle outside the USA or Exterior rear view mirrors 146 Plastic parts, cleaning 401
Canada 13 Parktronic* 274, 532 Poly-V-belt drive 532
Operating safety 17 Cleaning system sensor 399 Layout 512
Operator’s Manual 10 Range of the sensors 275 Positions (Memory function*)
Ornamental moldings 399 Sensor cover 399 Recalling from memory 145
Outside temperature indicator 159 Warning indicators 276 Storing in memory 145
Overhead control panel 31
Overspeed range 532
548
Index
Potential problems associated with Practical hints R

underinflated and overinflated First aid kit 454 Radio
tires 375 Fuses 503 Selecting stations 170
Pounds per square inch see PSI Jump starting 496 Selecting stations (satellite*) 171
Power assistance 331 Lamp in center console 414 Radio transmitters, control and
Power outlets 306 Lamps in instrument cluster 404 operation 339
Power seat* Messages in the display 416 Range (distance to empty)
Adjusting backrest tilt 44 Spare wheel 457 Calling up 193
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 44 Vehicle jack 456 Range of the sensors
Adjusting seat height 44 Vehicle tool kit 454 Parktronic* 275
Seat fore and aft adjustment 43 Premium unleaded gasoline 524 Rear automatic climate control* 244
Power seats* PRE-SAFE®* 81, 532 Rear center console* 308
Adjusting head restraint height 44 Preventive occupant safety* see Rear climate control 228
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 255 PRE-SAFE®* Rear door window
Closing 462 Problems Blocking operation 93
Opening 462 While driving 62 Rear door window sunshade* 214
Power train 532 With vehicle 18 Rear fog lamp
Power washer 396 Product information 9 Indicator lamp 147
Power windows Production options weight 387, 532 Switching on 151
Blocking of rear door window Program mode selector switch 533 Rear lamp bulbs
operation 93 PSI 387, 388, 533 Replacing 472
Cleaning 400 Rear lamps
Q
Door windows 248 Messages in display 442
Quick search
Synchronizing 251 Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Phone book* 195
Rear passenger compartment
ventilation 228
549
Index
Rear passenger compartment ventilation Regular checks 343 Replacing front fog lamp* bulb 471
and climate control Remote control Reporting
Deactivating 245 Integrated 110 Safety defects 19
Rear passenger compartment ventilation SmartKey 110 Reset button in the instrument
and rear automatic climate SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 115 cluster 175, 176
control 244 Remote door unlock Resetting
Rear towing eye 502 With Tele Aid* 319 All functions of a submenu 176
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 209 Removing Fuel consumption 193
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Front wiper blades 475 Maintenance service indicator 394
Rear window defroster 215 Rear wiper blade 477 Trip odometer 159
Activating 215 Vehicle battery 489 Residual heat 227
Deactivating 215 Wheel 481 Residual heat utilization 243, 533
Rear window wiper switch 61 Removing spare wheel 458 Residual heat* utilization 228
Rear window wiper/washer 61 Replacing Residual ventilation 227, 243
Rear wiper blade Backup lamp bulbs 472 REST (Residual engine heat
Removing 477 Brake lamp bulbs 472 utilization) 533
Replacing 476 Bulbs 465 Restraint system 533
Recommended inflation pressure 387 Front lamp bulbs 468 Restraint system see Infant and child
Recommended tire inflation License plate lamp bulbs 474 restraint systems
pressure 533 Low beam bulbs 468 Rim 387, 533
Reconnecting Rear fog lamp bulbs 472 Rims and tires 514
Vehicle battery 489 Rear lamp bulbs 466, 472 Roadside assistance 12
Recovery services Rear side marker lamp bulbs 472 Tele Aid* 315
For stolen vehicle 319 Rear turn signal bulbs 472 Roller sunblinds 259
Refrigerant Rear wiper blade 476 RON 343
Air conditioning 523 Wiper blades 475 RON (Research Octane Number) 533
550
Index
Roof rack 279 Seat heating* Setting

Rubber parts Switching off 143 Convenience functions 177, 189
Cleaning 402 Switching on 142 Cruise control 265
Rubber parts, cleaning 401 Seating capacity 358 Day (clock) 181
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 366 Seats 132 Daytime running lamp mode 182
Adjusting 42 Higher speed in cruise control 267
S
Easy entry/exit feature* 132 Hours (clock) 180
Safety
Heating* 141 Individual vehicle settings 174
Occupant 70
Multicontour seat* 136 Interior lighting delayed
Safety belts see Seat belts
Securing cargo switch-off 185
Safety defects
Cargo tie-down rings 281 Lamps and lighting (control
Reporting 19
Selecting display 179 system) 182
Safety systems
Self-test Language, multifunction display 178,
Driving 97
Occupant Classification System 90 179
Seat belt force limiter 80
Tele Aid* 312 Locator lighting 183
Seat belt height adjustment 52
Service Lower speed in cruise control 267
Seat belts 77
Calling up the service indicator 393 Miles/kilometers in
Cleaning 402
Parts 508 speedometer 178
Fastening 50
Service and Warranty Booklet Minutes (clock) 180
Height adjustment 52
Loss of 509 Month (clock) 181
Proper use of 52, 79
Service and warranty information 10 Slower speed in cruise control 267
Safety guidelines 74
Service indicator Speed in cruise control 269
Warning lamp 410
Calling up 393 Speedometer display mode 178
Seat cushion depth
Clearing 393 Temperature (interior) 222, 236
Adjusting 136
Service life (tires) 354 Units in speedometer 178
Year (clock) 181
551
Index
Setting current speed 265 Simultaneous wiping and washing Snow chains 391
Settings Rear window wiper/washer 62 Spare wheel 457, 517
Convenience functions 189 Windshield wipers 60 Removing 458
Factory, SmartKey 112 Single wipe 60 Speed
Lighting (control system) 182 Sliding/pop-up roof* Setting current 265
Menus and submenus 163 Stopping 262 Speed settings
Resetting all (control system) 175 SmartKey 110 Cruise control 267, 269
Resetting in the submenu 176 Battery 463 Speedometer 25
Selective 112, 118 Battery check lamp 112, 118 Settings units 178
Settings menu Checking the batteries 113, 119 Speedometer display mode
Individual vehicle settings 174 Factory setting 112 Selecting 178
Submenus 176 Global locking 112 SRS 79, 533
Shifting Global locking and unlocking 112 Indicator lamp 411
Gear selector lever positions 200 Global unlocking 112 SRS indicator lamp 27
Into optimal gear range (automatic Loss of 114 Standing lamps
transmission) 207 Selective setting 112 Replacing bulbs 466
Side impact air bags 76 Starter switch positions 38 Standing water
Side marker lamps Unlocking with 36 Driving instructions 338
Cleaning lenses 399 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 114 Starting difficulties 55
Side windows Factory setting 118 Starting position 38
Closing 249 Global locking 118 Starting the engine 53
Sidemarker lamps Loss of 121 Steering column
Replacing bulbs 466 Messages in display 440 Height adjustment 47
Sidewall 387, 533, 534 Remote control 115 Length adjustment 47
Selective setting 118
Unlocking 114
552
Index
Steering wheel Resetting functions in Control Rear fog lamp 151

Adjusting 45 system 176 Seat heating* 142
Cleaning 402 Selecting 176 Windshield wipers 59
Electrical adjustment* 46 Settings menu 176 Synchronizing
Steering wheel gearshift control Vehicle 186 Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* 262
Automatic transmission 205 Sun visor 212 Power windows 251
Stolen vehicle Sunshade* Tilt/sliding sunroof* 258
Recovery services 319 Rear door window 214
T
Stopping Third-row 214
Tachometer 159
Sliding/pop-up roof* 262 Supplemental Restraint System
Displaying gear range 202
Stopping door windows 250 (SRS) 533
Overspeed range 159
Storage compartments 294 Switching off
Tail lamps 472
Armrest 296 Automatic central locking (control
Cleaning lenses 399
Glove box 294 system) 188
Replacing bulbs 466
Storage compartment in front of ESP® 101
Tailgate
armrest 296 Hazard warning flasher 154
Closing 124
Storing (Memory function*) Headlamps 65
Closing from the inside
Positions in memory 145 Seat heating* 143
electrically* 124
Storing tires 355 Switching on
Closing from the outside (vehicles with-
Stranded vehicle 502 Automatic central locking (control
out KEYLESS-GO*) 126
Submenus system) 188
Opening 122
Convenience 189 ESP® 102
Opening from the inside
For settings 163 Front fog lamps* 151
electrically* 123
In control system 165 Hazard warning flasher 154
Instrument cluster 178, 180 Headlamps 58
Lighting 182 High beams 151
553
Index
Opening from the outside 122 Tele Aid* 311 3-zone automatic climate control* 230
Unlocking and opening with Call priority 318 Ticket holder 300
KEYLESS-GO* 120 Emergency calls 313 Tie-down rings (Cargo
Unlocking with SmartKey 114 Information 317 compartment) 281
Tar stains 396 Initiating an emergency call Tightening torque 533
Technical data 523 manually 314 Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 485
Brake fluid 523 Messages in display 450, 451 Tilt
Coolants 525 Remote door unlock 319 Head restraint 45
Electrical system 518 Roadside assistance 315 Tilt/sliding sunroof*
Engine 513 Stolen vehicle recovery services 319 Closing 255
Engine oil 523 System self-check 312 Opening 255
Engine oil additives 523 Telematics* 533 Synchronizing 258
Fuel requirements 524 Telephone* 310 Time
Gasoline additives 525 Answering a call 195 Setting day 181
Main dimensions 519 Dialing a number from the phone Setting hours 180
Premium unleaded gasoline 524 book 195 Setting minutes 180
Rims and tires 514 Ending a call 195 Setting month 181
Weights 520 Loading phone book* 195 Setting year 181
Windshield washer and headlamp Messages in the display 451 TIN 387, 534
cleaning* system 528 Operating 194 Tire
Tele Aid System* 533 Redialing 196 Vehicle maximum load on 388
Temperature Tire and Loading Information 357
Setting interior temperature 222, Tire and loading terminology 385
236 Tire care and maintenance 354
Tires 364 Tire Identification Number see TIN
Third-row sunshade* 214
554
Index
Tire inflation pressure Tow-away alarm 106 U

Checking 344, 363, 365 Arming 106 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire inflation pressure see the placard on Disarming 106 Standards 388, 534
the fuel filler flap Disarming for transport 106 Units
Tire inspection 354 Towing eye Setting speedometer units 178
Tire load rating 387, 534 Front 501 Unlocking 36, 110
Tire ply composition and material Rear 502 Centrally from inside 131
used 388 Towing the vehicle Driver’s door in an emergency 459
Tire speed rating 336, 378, 388, 534 Stranded vehicle 502 Fuel filler flap 342
Tire terminology 385 TPMS malfunction telltale* 25 Global 112
Tire traction 335 Traction 205, 388, 534 Global (SmartKey with
Tires 353, 514 Transfer case 534 KEYLESS-GO*) 118
Direction of rotation 356 Tread 388, 534 In an emergency 459
Driving instructions 334 Tread depth 355 Selective settings 112, 118
Low tire pressure telltale 412 Tread depth (tires) 390 Tailgate with SmartKey 114
Retreads 353 Treadwear indicators 388, 534 Vehicle in an emergency 319
Rims and tires 514 Trip computer 192 With the SmartKey 36
Rotating 388 Trip odometer With the SmartKey with
Run Flat Indicator 366 Resetting 159 KEYLESS-GO* 114
Service life 354 Turn signal lamps Unlocking and opening
Temperature 364, 384 Cleaning lenses 399 Tailgate with KEYLESS-GO* 120
TPMS malfunction telltale 412 Replacing bulbs 466 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 37
Tread depth 355, 390 Turn signals 58 Uphill driving
Wear pattern 389 Turning off the engine 66 Cruise control 265
Winter 390 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) 534
Tools 454
555
Index
Useful features 294 Power washer 396 W

Ashtrays* 302 Steering wheel 402 Warning indicators
Cup holders 299 Tar stains 396 Parktronic* 276
Power outlets 306 Vehicle washing 397 Warning sounds
Storage compartments 294 Vehicle identification number (VIN) 511 Drivers seat belts 77
Tele Aid* 311 Vehicle jack 456 Parking brake 57
Telephone* 310 Vehicle lighting Warranty coverage 509
Checking 344 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
V
Vehicle loading terminology 385 Washing the vehicle 395
Vehicle
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 388 Wear pattern (tires) 389
Data recording 20
Vehicle tool kit 454 Weights 520
Individual settings 174, 177
Collapsible wheel chock 455, 457 Wheel change
Locking in an emergency 460
Vehicle washing 397 Tightening torque 485
Lowering 485
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 511, Wheels
Proper use of 17
534 Tires and wheels 353
Unlocking in an emergency 459
Window curtain air bags 76
Vehicle capacity weight 388, 534
Windows, cleaning 400
Vehicle care
Windshield
Engine cleaning 397
Cleaning wiper blades 400
Light alloy wheels 401
Defogging 224, 238
Ornamental moldings 399
Paintwork 397
Parktronic* system sensor 399
Plastic and rubber parts 402
556
Index
Infrared reflecting* 328 Winter driving

Refilling washer fluid 352 Snow chains 391
Replacing wiper blades 475 Tires 390
Washer fluid 352, 528 Winter driving instructions 337
Washer system 528 Winter tires 390
Windshield washer fluid 528 Wiper blades
Message in display 451 Replacing 475
Mixing ratio 528 Wiper/washer
Refilling 352 Rear window 61
Wiping with 60 Wiping
Windshield washer system 528 And washing simultaneously 60
Windshield wiper switch 59 Intermittent 59, 60
Windshield wipers 59 Interval 59
Fast wiper speed 59 With windshield washer fluid 60
Intermittent 59 Wiping and washing simultaneously 62
Intermittent wiping 59 Wood trims, cleaning 402
Interval wiping 60
X
Normal wiper speed 59
Xenon headlamps*
Rear window wiper/washer 61
Bi-Xenon* 529
Replacing wiper blades 475
Simultaneous wiping and washing 62
Single wipe 60
Switching on 59
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 60
557
558
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and genuine Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-3056-31
Press time June 13, 2005
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany

2006 r350 r500 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 r350 r500 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 r350 r500 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the manual intended to help the user with?

What is the manual intended to help the user with?

What recommendations does the manual ask the user to follow?

What recommendations does the manual ask the user to follow?

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Operator’s Manual R-Class

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started................................... 35

Corner-illuminating front fog

Loading .............................................. 279 At the gas station .............................. 342

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Replacing wiper blades ...................... 475

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 521

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Additional charges may be applicable for a

Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the USA

Here you will find descriptions of the safety

Symbols 왘 This symbol points to instructions for

Proper use of the vehicle

For the USA only:

Reporting safety defects

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page

9 Tachometer with: 4 Fuel filler flap indica- 342

A High beam headlamp 151 Selected program mode 199

Item Page Item Page

Lower part Item Page

4 Front interior lighting on/off 154 c Vehicles with telephone* 311

Item Page Item Page

The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey

Unlocking with Keyless-Go* i 왘 Grasp an outside door handle or the

Starter switch positions SmartKey mains on after starting the engine or

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i

! SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* i

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be i

i For information on starting the engine

Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

Seat adjustment 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38). i

Seat height Head restraint height Vehicles with memory function*:

Raising: Head restraint tilt Steering wheel

For more information, see “Seats”

! For more information, see “Rear view mir-

Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-

1 Seat belt outlet

Starting the engine Automatic transmission

Starting with the SmartKey Starting with KEYLESS-GO*

Parking brake Driving

왘 Release the brake pedal.

Switching on headlamps High beam Turn signals

Low beam headlamps

The combination switch resets automati- Windshield wipers !

Switching on windshield wipers

Intermittent wiping i Wiping with windshield washer fluid

! Intermittent wiping is interrupted when 왘 Press the combination switch in direc-

! 앫 Remove blockage. Rear window wiper/washer

Deactivating intermittent wipe Problems while driving

The coolant temperature is above In case of accident

You have now completed your first drive.

왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 1.

Releasing seat belts Locking i

Locking with the SmartKey Locking with KEYLESS-GO*